SMC Networks SMC6752AL2 User manual

TigerSwitch 10/100
48-Port 10/100Mbps
Fast Ethernet Managed Switch
◆
◆
◆
◆
◆
◆
◆
◆
◆
◆
◆
◆
48 auto-MDI/MDI-X 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX ports
2 Gigabit RJ-45 ports shared with 2 SFP transceiver slots
2 Gigabit RJ-45 ports
17.8 Gbps of aggregate bandwidth
Non-blocking switching architecture
Spanning Tree Protocol and Rapid STP
Up to four LACP or static 4-port trunks
Layer 2/3/4 CoS support through four priority queues
Full support for VLANs with GVRP
IGMP multicast filtering and snooping
Support for jumbo frames up to 9 KB
Manageable via console, Web, SNMP, RMON
Management Guide
SMC6752AL2
TigerSwitch 10/100
Management Guide
From SMC’s Tiger line of feature-rich workgroup LAN solutions
38 Tesla
Irvine, CA 92618
Phone: (949) 679-8000
November 2004
Pub. # 149100005200H
Information furnished by SMC Networks, Inc. (SMC) is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed by SMC for its use,
nor for any infringements of patents or other rights of third parties which
may result from its use. No license is granted by implication or otherwise
under any patent or patent rights of SMC. SMC reserves the right to change
specifications at any time without notice.
Copyright © 2004 by
SMC Networks, Inc.
38 Tesla
Irvine, CA 92618
All rights reserved.
Trademarks:
SMC is a registered trademark; and EZ Switch, TigerStack and TigerSwitch are trademarks of SMC Networks,
Inc. Other product and company names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.
LIMITED WARRANTY
Limited Warranty Statement: SMC Networks, Inc. (“SMC”) warrants its products to be free
from defects in workmanship and materials, under normal use and service, for the applicable
warranty term. All SMC products carry a standard 90-day limited warranty from the date of
purchase from SMC or its Authorized Reseller. SMC may, at its own discretion, repair or replace
any product not operating as warranted with a similar or functionally equivalent product, during
the applicable warranty term. SMC will endeavor to repair or replace any product returned under
warranty within 30 days of receipt of the product.
The standard limited warranty can be upgraded to a Limited Lifetime* warranty by registering
new products within 30 days of purchase from SMC or its Authorized Reseller. Registration can
be accomplished via the enclosed product registration card or online via the SMC web site.
Failure to register will not affect the standard limited warranty. The Limited Lifetime warranty
covers a product during the Life of that Product, which is defined as the period of time during
which the product is an “Active” SMC product. A product is considered to be “Active” while it is
listed on the current SMC price list. As new technologies emerge, older technologies become
obsolete and SMC will, at its discretion, replace an older product in its product line with one that
incorporates these newer technologies. At that point, the obsolete product is discontinued and is
no longer an “Active” SMC product. A list of discontinued products with their respective dates
of discontinuance can be found at:
http://www.smc.com/index.cfm?action=customer_service_warranty.
All products that are replaced become the property of SMC. Replacement products may be
either new or reconditioned. Any replaced or repaired product carries either a 30-day limited
warranty or the remainder of the initial warranty, whichever is longer. SMC is not responsible for
any custom software or firmware, configuration information, or memory data of Customer
contained in, stored on, or integrated with any products returned to SMC pursuant to any
warranty. Products returned to SMC should have any customer-installed accessory or add-on
components, such as expansion modules, removed prior to returning the product for
replacement. SMC is not responsible for these items if they are returned with the product.
Customers must contact SMC for a Return Material Authorization number prior to returning
any product to SMC. Proof of purchase may be required. Any product returned to SMC without
a valid Return Material Authorization (RMA) number clearly marked on the outside of the
package will be returned to customer at customer’s expense. For warranty claims within North
America, please call our toll-free customer support number at (800) 762-4968. Customers are
responsible for all shipping charges from their facility to SMC. SMC is responsible for return
shipping charges from SMC to customer.
i
LIMITED WARRANTY
WARRANTIES EXCLUSIVE: IF AN SMC PRODUCT DOES NOT OPERATE AS
WARRANTED ABOVE, CUSTOMER’S SOLE REMEDY SHALL BE REPAIR OR
REPLACEMENT OF THE PRODUCT IN QUESTION, AT SMC’S OPTION. THE
FOREGOING WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND ARE IN LIEU
OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, EITHER
IN FACT OR BY OPERATION OF LAW, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING
WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. SMC NEITHER ASSUMES NOR AUTHORIZES ANY OTHER
PERSON TO ASSUME FOR IT ANY OTHER LIABILITY IN CONNECTION WITH
THE SALE, INSTALLATION, MAINTENANCE OR USE OF ITS PRODUCTS. SMC
SHALL NOT BE LIABLE UNDER THIS WARRANTY IF ITS TESTING AND
EXAMINATION DISCLOSE THE ALLEGED DEFECT IN THE PRODUCT DOES
NOT EXIST OR WAS CAUSED BY CUSTOMER’S OR ANY THIRD PERSON’S MISUSE,
NEGLECT, IMPROPER INSTALLATION OR TESTING, UNAUTHORIZED
ATTEMPTS TO REPAIR, OR ANY OTHER CAUSE BEYOND THE RANGE OF THE
INTENDED USE, OR BY ACCIDENT, FIRE, LIGHTNING, OR OTHER HAZARD.
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY: IN NO EVENT, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), SHALL SMC BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES OF ANY KIND,
OR FOR LOSS OF REVENUE, LOSS OF BUSINESS, OR OTHER FINANCIAL LOSS
ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SALE, INSTALLATION,
MAINTENANCE, USE, PERFORMANCE, FAILURE, OR INTERRUPTION OF ITS
PRODUCTS, EVEN IF SMC OR ITS AUTHORIZED RESELLER HAS BEEN ADVISED
OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR
THE LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES FOR
CONSUMER PRODUCTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS MAY
NOT APPLY TO YOU. THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS,
WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE TO STATE. NOTHING IN THIS WARRANTY
SHALL BE TAKEN TO AFFECT YOUR STATUTORY RIGHTS.
* SMC will provide warranty service for one year following discontinuance from the active SMC
price list. Under the limited lifetime warranty, internal and external power supplies, fans, and
cables are covered by a standard one-year warranty from date of purchase.
SMC Networks, Inc.
38 Tesla
Irvine, CA 92618
ii
CONTENTS
1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
Key Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Description of Software Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
System Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
2
Initial Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Connecting to the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Required Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Remote Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Basic Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Console Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Setting Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Setting an IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Manual Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Dynamic Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Enabling SNMP Management Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Community Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Trap Receivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Saving Configuration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Managing System Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
3
Configuring the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Using the Web Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Navigating the Web Browser Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Basic Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Displaying System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Displaying Switch Hardware/Software Versions . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Setting the Switch’s IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Manual Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
iii
CONTENTS
Using DHCP/BOOTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Managing Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Downloading System Software from a Server . . . . . . . . . .
Saving or Restoring Configuration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Downloading Configuration Settings from a Server . . . . .
Console Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Telnet Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring Event Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Log Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Log Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying Log Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sending Simple Mail Transfer Protocol Alerts . . . . . . . . .
Resetting the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the System Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring SNTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Time Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Simple Network Management Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Community Access Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying Trap Managers and Trap Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring User Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring Local/Remote Logon Authentication . . . . . . . . .
Configuring HTTPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing the Default Secure-site Certificate . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the Secure Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Generating the Host Key Pair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the SSH Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring Port Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring 802.1X Port Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying 802.1X Global Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring 802.1X Global Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring Port Settings for 802.1X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying 802.1X Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filtering Addresses for Management Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Access Control Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring Access Control Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the ACL Name and Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iv
3-19
3-21
3-22
3-24
3-26
3-28
3-30
3-33
3-33
3-35
3-38
3-39
3-41
3-42
3-42
3-44
3-45
3-45
3-46
3-48
3-48
3-50
3-54
3-56
3-57
3-60
3-63
3-65
3-67
3-69
3-70
3-71
3-74
3-76
3-78
3-78
3-79
CONTENTS
Configuring a Standard IP ACL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80
Configuring an Extended IP ACL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-82
Configuring a MAC ACL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-84
Binding a Port to an Access Control List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86
Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-88
Displaying Connection Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-88
Configuring Interface Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-91
Creating Trunk Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-93
Statically Configuring a Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-95
Enabling LACP on Selected Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-97
Configuring LACP Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-99
Displaying LACP Port Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-103
Displaying LACP Settings and Status for the Local Side 3-104
Displaying LACP Settings and Status for the Remote Side3-107
Setting Broadcast Storm Thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-109
Configuring Port Mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-111
Configuring Rate Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-113
Rate Limit Granularity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-113
Rate Limit Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-114
Showing Port Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-115
Address Table Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-122
Setting Static Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-122
Displaying the Address Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-123
Changing the Aging Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-125
Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-125
Displaying Global Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-127
Configuring Global Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-131
Displaying Interface Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-135
Configuring Interface Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-139
VLAN Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-142
IEEE 802.1Q VLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-142
Enabling or Disabling GVRP (Global Setting) . . . . . . . 3-147
Displaying Basic VLAN Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-147
Displaying Current VLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-148
Creating VLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-150
Adding Static Members to VLANs (VLAN Index) . . . . 3-152
Adding Static Members to VLANs (Port Index) . . . . . . . 3-154
v
CONTENTS
Configuring VLAN Behavior for Interfaces . . . . . . . . . .
Private VLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying Current Private VLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring Private VLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Associating VLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying Private VLAN Interface Information . . . . . .
Configuring Private VLAN Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Class of Service Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Layer 2 Queue Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Default Priority for Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Queue Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Service Weight for Traffic Classes . . . . . . . . .
Layer 3/4 Priority Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mapping Layer 3/4 Priorities to CoS Values . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting IP Precedence/DSCP Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mapping IP Precedence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mapping DSCP Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mapping IP Port Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mapping CoS Values to ACLs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multicast Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Layer 2 IGMP (Snooping and Query) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters . . .
Displaying Interfaces Attached to a Multicast Router . .
Specifying Static Interfaces for a Multicast Router . . . . .
Displaying Port Members of Multicast Services . . . . . . .
Assigning Ports to Multicast Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
3-156
3-159
3-160
3-162
3-163
3-164
3-166
3-168
3-168
3-168
3-170
3-173
3-174
3-175
3-175
3-176
3-176
3-178
3-180
3-182
3-184
3-185
3-185
3-188
3-189
3-190
3-192
Command Line Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Using the Command Line Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessing the CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Telnet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keywords and Arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Minimum Abbreviation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Command Completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vi
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-2
4-4
4-4
4-4
4-5
CONTENTS
Getting Help on Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Showing Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Partial Keyword Lookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Negating the Effect of Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Using Command History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Understanding Command Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Exec Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Configuration Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Command Line Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Command Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
timeout login response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
exec-timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
password-thresh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
silent-time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
databits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
stopbits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
show line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
General Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
show history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
reload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
quit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
System Management Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Device Designation Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
hostname . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
vii
CONTENTS
User Access Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
username . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
enable password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IP Filter Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
show management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Web Server Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ip http port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ip http server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ip http secure-server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ip http secure-port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Telnet Server Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ip telnet port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ip telnet server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Secure Shell Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ip ssh server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ip ssh timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ip ssh authentication-retries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ip ssh server-key size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
delete public-key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ip ssh crypto host-key generate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ip ssh crypto zeroize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ip ssh save host-key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
show ip ssh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
show ssh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
show public-key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Event Logging Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
logging on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
logging history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
logging host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
logging facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
logging trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
clear logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
show logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
show log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SMTP Alert Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
logging sendmail host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
viii
4-34
4-35
4-36
4-37
4-38
4-39
4-40
4-41
4-41
4-42
4-43
4-44
4-44
4-45
4-46
4-49
4-50
4-51
4-51
4-52
4-53
4-54
4-54
4-55
4-55
4-57
4-59
4-59
4-60
4-61
4-62
4-63
4-64
4-64
4-66
4-68
4-68
CONTENTS
logging sendmail level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
logging sendmail source-email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
logging sendmail destination-email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
logging sendmail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
show logging sendmail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
Time Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
sntp client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
sntp server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
sntp poll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
show sntp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
clock timezone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
calendar set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
show calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
System Status Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
show startup-config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
show running-config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
show system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
show users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
show version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
Frame Size Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
jumbo frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
Flash/File Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
dir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
whichboot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
boot system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
Authentication Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
Authentication Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
authentication login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
authentication enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
RADIUS Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
radius-server host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
radius-server port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
radius-server key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
radius-server retransmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100
radius-server timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100
ix
CONTENTS
show radius-server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TACACS+ Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
tacacs-server host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
tacacs-server port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
tacacs-server key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
show tacacs-server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port Security Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
port security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
802.1X Port Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
dot1x system-auth-control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
dot1x default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
dot1x max-req . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
dot1x port-control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
dot1x operation-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
dot1x re-authenticate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
dot1x re-authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
dot1x timeout quiet-period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
dot1x timeout re-authperiod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
dot1x timeout tx-period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
show dot1x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Access Control List Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IP ACLs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
access-list ip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
permit, deny (Standard ACL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
permit, deny (Extended ACL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
show ip access-list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ip access-group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
show ip access-group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
map access-list ip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
show map access-list ip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAC ACLs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
access-list mac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
permit, deny (MAC ACL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
show mac access-list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
mac access-group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
show mac access-group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
map access-list mac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
x
4-101
4-102
4-102
4-103
4-103
4-104
4-104
4-105
4-107
4-108
4-108
4-109
4-109
4-110
4-111
4-111
4-112
4-112
4-113
4-114
4-117
4-118
4-119
4-120
4-122
4-124
4-125
4-126
4-126
4-127
4-128
4-128
4-130
4-131
4-132
4-132
4-133
CONTENTS
show map access-list mac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134
ACL Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135
show access-list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135
show access-group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135
SNMP Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136
snmp-server community . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136
snmp-server contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-137
snmp-server location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138
snmp-server host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139
snmp-server enable traps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-140
show snmp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141
Interface Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144
interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-145
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-145
speed-duplex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-146
negotiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-148
flowcontrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-149
shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-150
switchport broadcast packet-rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-151
clear counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-152
show interfaces status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-153
show interfaces counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154
show interfaces switchport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-156
Mirror Port Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-158
port monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-158
show port monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-159
Rate Limit Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-160
rate-limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-161
rate-limit granularity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-161
show rate-limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-162
Link Aggregation Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-163
channel-group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-165
lacp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-166
lacp system-priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-167
lacp admin-key (Ethernet Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-169
lacp admin-key (Port Channel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-170
xi
CONTENTS
lacp port-priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
show lacp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Address Table Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
mac-address-table static . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
clear mac-address-table dynamic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
show mac-address-table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
mac-address-table aging-time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
show mac-address-table aging-time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spanning Tree Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
spanning-tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
spanning-tree mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
spanning-tree forward-time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
spanning-tree hello-time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
spanning-tree max-age . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
spanning-tree priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
spanning-tree pathcost method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
spanning-tree transmission-limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
spanning-tree spanning-disabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
spanning-tree cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
spanning-tree port-priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
spanning-tree edge-port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
spanning-tree portfast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
spanning-tree link-type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
spanning-tree protocol-migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
show spanning-tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VLAN Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing VLAN Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vlan database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring VLAN Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
interface vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
switchport mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
switchport acceptable-frame-types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
switchport ingress-filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
switchport native vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
switchport allowed vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
switchport forbidden vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xii
4-171
4-172
4-177
4-178
4-179
4-179
4-180
4-181
4-182
4-183
4-184
4-185
4-185
4-186
4-187
4-188
4-188
4-189
4-190
4-191
4-191
4-192
4-193
4-194
4-195
4-197
4-197
4-197
4-198
4-200
4-200
4-201
4-202
4-203
4-204
4-205
4-206
CONTENTS
Displaying VLAN Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-207
show vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-207
Configuring Private VLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-208
private-vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-210
private vlan association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-211
switchport mode private-vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-212
switchport private-vlan host-association . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-213
switchport private-vlan mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-213
show vlan private-vlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-214
GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-215
bridge-ext gvrp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-215
show bridge-ext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-216
switchport gvrp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-217
show gvrp configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-217
garp timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-218
show garp timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-219
Priority Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-220
Priority Commands (Layer 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-220
queue mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-221
switchport priority default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-222
queue bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-223
queue cos-map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-224
show queue mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-225
show queue bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-225
show queue cos-map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-226
Priority Commands (Layer 3 and 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-227
map ip port (Global Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-227
map ip port (Interface Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-228
map ip precedence (Global Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . 4-229
map ip precedence (Interface Configuration) . . . . . . . . . 4-230
map ip dscp (Global Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-231
map ip dscp (Interface Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-231
show map ip port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-233
show map ip precedence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-234
show map ip dscp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-235
xiii
CONTENTS
Multicast Filtering Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IGMP Snooping Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ip igmp snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ip igmp snooping vlan static . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ip igmp snooping version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
show ip igmp snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
show mac-address-table multicast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IGMP Query Commands (Layer 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ip igmp snooping querier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ip igmp snooping query-count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ip igmp snooping query-interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ip igmp snooping query-max-response-time . . . . . . . . . .
ip igmp snooping router-port-expire-time . . . . . . . . . . . .
Static Multicast Routing Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ip igmp snooping vlan mrouter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
show ip igmp snooping mrouter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IP Interface Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ip address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ip default-gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ip dhcp restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
show ip interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
show ip redirects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A
4-236
4-236
4-237
4-237
4-238
4-239
4-239
4-240
4-241
4-241
4-242
4-243
4-244
4-245
4-245
4-246
4-247
4-247
4-249
4-249
4-250
4-251
4-251
Software Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1
Software Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Management Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Management Information Bases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
B
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1
Problems Accessing the Management Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Using System Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Glossary
Index
xiv
TABLES
Table 1-1
Table 1-2
Table 3-1
Table 3-2
Table 3-3
Table 3-4
Table 3-5
Table 3-6
Table 3-7
Table 3-8
Table 3-9
Table 3-10
Table 3-11
Table 3-12
Table 3-13
Table 3-14
Table 4-1
Table 4-2
Table 4-3
Table 4-4
Table 4-5
Table 4-6
Table 4-7
Table 4-8
Table 4-9
Table 4-10
Table 4-11
Table 4-12
Table 4-13
Table 4-14
Table 4-15
Table 4-16
Table 4-17
Table 4-18
Table 4-19
Table 4-20
Key Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
System Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Logging Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
HTTPS System Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
802.1X Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74
LACP Port Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-102
LACP Internal Configuration Information . . . . . . . . . 3-103
LACP Neighbor Configuration Information . . . . . . . . 3-106
Port Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-115
Egress Queue Priority Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-169
CoS Priority Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-170
Mapping IP Precedence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-176
Mapping DSCP Priority Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-177
Egress Queue Priority Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-181
Command Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Configuration Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Command Line Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Command Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
General Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
System Management Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Device Designation Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
User Access Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Default Login Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
IP Filter Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Web Server Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
HTTPS System Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Telnet Server Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
SSH Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
show ssh - display description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
Event Logging Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Logging Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
show logging flash/ram - display description . . . . . . . . . 4-65
show logging trap - display description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
xv
TABLES
Table 4-21
Table 4-22
Table 4-23
Table 4-24
Table 4-25
Table 4-26
Table 4-27
Table 4-28
Table 4-29
Table 4-30
Table 4-31
Table 4-32
Table 4-33
Table 4-34
Table 4-35
Table 4-36
Table 4-37
Table 4-38
Table 4-39
Table 4-40
Table 4-41
Table 4-42
Table 4-43
Table 4-44
Table 4-45
Table 4-46
Table 4-47
Table 4-49
Table 4-48
Table 4-50
Table 4-51
Table 4-52
Table 4-53
Table 4-54
Table 4-55
Table 4-56
Table 4-57
xvi
SMTP Alert Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
Time Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
System Status Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
Frame Size Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
Flash/File Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
File Directory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
Authentication Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
Authentication Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
RADIUS Client Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
TACACS Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102
Port Security Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105
802.1X Port Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107
Access Control Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118
IP ACLs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118
Egress Queue Priority Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
MAC ACLs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
Egress Queue Priority Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133
ACL Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135
SNMP Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136
Interface Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144
Interfaces Switchport Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-157
Mirror Port Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-158
Rate Limit Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-160
Link Aggregation Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-164
show lacp counters - display description . . . . . . . . . . . 4-174
show lacp internal - display description . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-175
show lacp neighbors - display description . . . . . . . . . . 4-177
Address Table Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-178
show lacp sysid - display description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-178
Spanning Tree Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-183
VLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-198
Editing VLAN Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-198
Configuring VLAN Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-201
Show VLAN Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-208
Private VLAN Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-209
GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands . . . . . . . . . . 4-216
Priority Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-221
TABLES
Table 4-58
Table 4-59
Table 4-60
Table 4-61
Table 4-62
Table 4-63
Table 4-64
Table 4-65
Table 4-66
Table 4-67
Table B-1
Priority Commands (Layer 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-221
Default CoS Priority Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-225
Priority Commands (Layer 3 and 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-228
Mapping IP Precedence Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-231
IP DSCP to CoS Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-233
Multicast Filtering Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-237
IGMP Snooping Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-237
IGMP Query Commands (Layer 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-241
Static Multicast Routing Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-246
IP Interface Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-248
Troubleshooting Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
xvii
TABLES
xviii
FIGURES
FIGURES
Figure 3-1
Figure 3-2
Figure 3-3
Figure 3-4
Figure 3-5
Figure 3-6
Figure 3-7
Figure 3-8
Figure 3-9
Figure 3-10
Figure 3-11
Figure 3-12
Figure 3-13
Figure 3-14
Figure 3-15
Figure 3-16
Figure 3-17
Figure 3-18
Figure 3-19
Figure 3-20
Figure 3-21
Figure 3-22
Figure 3-23
Figure 3-24
Figure 3-25
Figure 3-26
Figure 3-27
Figure 3-28
Figure 3-29
Figure 3-30
Figure 3-31
Figure 3-32
Figure 3-33
Figure 3-34
Figure 3-35
Figure 3-36
Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Switch Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Bridge Extension Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Manual IP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
DHCP IP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Operation Code Image File Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Select Start-Up Operation File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Deleting Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Copy Configuration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Setting the Startup Configuration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Console Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Enabling Telnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
System Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Remote Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Displaying Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Enabling and Configuring SMTP Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Resetting the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
SNTP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Setting the System Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Configuring SNMP Community Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Configuring IP Trap Managers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Access Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
Authentication Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
HTTPS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
SSH Host-Key Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
SSH Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
Configuring Port Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
802.1X Global Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
802.1X Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70
802.1X Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72
Displaying 802.1X Port Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
Creating a Web IP Filter List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
Selecting ACL Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80
ACL Configuration - Standard IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-81
xix
FIGURES
Figure 3-37
Figure 3-38
Figure 3-39
Figure 3-40
Figure 3-41
Figure 3-42
Figure 3-43
Figure 3-44
Figure 3-45
Figure 3-46
Figure 3-47
Figure 3-48
Figure 3-49
Figure 3-50
Figure 3-51
Figure 3-52
Figure 3-53
Figure 3-54
Figure 3-55
Figure 3-56
Figure 3-57
Figure 3-58
Figure 3-59
Figure 3-60
Figure 3-61
Figure 3-62
Figure 3-63
Figure 3-64
Figure 3-65
Figure 3-66
Figure 3-67
Figure 3-68
Figure 3-69
Figure 3-70
Figure 3-71
Figure 3-72
Figure 3-73
xx
ACL Configuration - Extended IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-83
ACL Configuration - MAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-85
Binding a Port to an ACL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86
Displaying Port/Trunk Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-88
Port/Trunk Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-92
Static Trunk Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-95
LACP Trunk Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-97
LACP - Aggregation Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-100
LACP - Port Counters Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-102
LACP - Port Internal Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-105
LACP - Port Neighbors Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-107
Port Broadcast Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-109
Mirror Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-111
Rate Limit Granularity Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-112
Output Rate Limit Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-114
Port Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-119
Configuring a Static Address Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-122
Configuring a Dynamic Address Table . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-123
Setting the Address Aging Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-124
STA Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-128
STA Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-133
STA Port Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-137
STA Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-141
Enabling GVRP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-146
VLAN Basic Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-147
Displaying Current VLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-148
Configuring a VLAN Static List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-150
Configuring a VLAN Static Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-153
VLAN Static Membership by Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-154
VLAN Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-157
Private VLAN Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-160
Private VLAN Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-161
Private VLAN Association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-162
Private VLAN Port Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-164
Private VLAN Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-166
Port Priority Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-168
Traffic Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-171
FIGURES
Figure 3-74
Figure 3-75
Figure 3-76
Figure 3-77
Figure 3-78
Figure 3-79
Figure 3-80
Figure 3-81
Figure 3-82
Figure 3-83
Figure 3-84
Figure 3-85
Figure 3-86
Queue Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-172
Configuring Queue Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-173
IP Precedence/DSCP Priority Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-175
Mapping IP Precedence Priority Values . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-176
Mapping IP DSCP Priority Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-178
IP Port Priority Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-180
IP Port Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-180
ACL CoS Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-182
IGMP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-186
Multicast Router Port Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-188
Static Multicast Router Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . 3-189
IP Multicast Registration Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-190
IGMP Member Port Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-192
xxi
FIGURES
xxii
CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION
This switch provides a broad range of features for Layer 2 switching. It
includes a management agent that allows you to configure the features
listed in this manual. The default configuration can be used for most of the
features provided by this switch. However, there are many options that you
should configure to maximize the switch’s performance for your particular
network environment.
Key Features
Table 1-1 Key Features
Feature
Description
Configuration
Backup and
Restore
Backup to TFTP server
Authentication
Console, Telnet, web – User name / password, RADIUS,
TACACS+
Web – HTTPS; Telnet – SSH
SNMP – Community strings
Port – IEEE 802.1X, MAC address filtering
Access Control
Lists
Supports up to 88 IP or MAC ACLs
DHCP Client
Supported
Port Configuration Speed, duplex mode and flow control
Rate Limiting
Input and output rate limiting per port
Port Mirroring
One port mirrored to a single analysis port
1-1
INTRODUCTION
Table 1-1 Key Features
Feature
Description
Port Trunking
Supports up to 4 trunks using either static or dynamic
trunking (LACP)
Broadcast Storm
Control
Supported
Static Address
Up to 8K MAC addresses in the forwarding table
IEEE 802.1D
Bridge
Supports dynamic data switching and addresses learning
Store-and-Forward Supported to ensure wire-speed switching while eliminating
Switching
bad frames
Spanning Tree
Algorithm
Supports standard STP and Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
(RSTP)
Virtual LANs
Up to 255 using IEEE 802.1Q, port-based, or private
VLANs
Traffic
Prioritization
Default port priority, traffic class map, queue scheduling, IP
Precedence or Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP),
and TCP/UDP Port
Multicast Filtering
Supports IGMP snooping and query
Description of Software Features
The switch provides a wide range of advanced performance enhancing
features. Flow control eliminates the loss of packets due to bottlenecks
caused by port saturation. Broadcast storm suppression prevents broadcast
traffic storms from engulfing the network. Port-based and private VLANs,
plus support for automatic GVRP VLAN registration provide traffic
security and efficient use of network bandwidth. CoS priority queueing
ensures the minimum delay for moving real-time multimedia data across
the network. While multicast filtering provides support for real-time
network applications. Some of the management features are briefly
described below.
1-2
DESCRIPTION OF SOFTWARE FEATURES
Configuration Backup and Restore – You can save the current
configuration settings to a file on a TFTP server, and later download this
file to restore the switch configuration settings.
Authentication – This switch authenticates management access via the
console port, Telnet or web browser. User names and passwords can be
configured locally or can be verified via a remote authentication server (i.e.,
RADIUS or TACACS+). Port-based authentication is also supported via
the IEEE 802.1X protocol. This protocol uses the Extensible
Authentication Protocol over LANs (EAPOL) to request user credentials
from the 802.1X client, and then verifies the client’s right to access the
network via an authentication server.
Other authentication options include HTTPS for secure management
access via the web, SSH for secure management access over a
Telnet-equivalent connection, IP address filtering for SNMP/web/Telnet
management access, and MAC address filtering for port access.
Access Control Lists – ACLs provide packet filtering for IP frames
(based on address, protocol, TCP/UDP port number or TCP control
code) or any frames (based on MAC address or Ethernet type). ACLs can
be used to improve performance by blocking unnecessary network traffic
or to implement security controls by restricting access to specific network
resources or protocols.
Port Configuration – You can manually configure the speed, duplex
mode, and flow control used on specific ports, or use auto-negotiation to
detect the connection settings used by the attached device. Use the
full-duplex mode on ports whenever possible to double the throughput of
switch connections. Flow control should also be enabled to control
network traffic during periods of congestion and prevent the loss of
packets when port buffer thresholds are exceeded. The switch supports
flow control based on the IEEE 802.3x standard.
1-3
INTRODUCTION
Rate Limiting – This feature controls the maximum rate for traffic
transmitted or received on an interface. Rate limiting is configured on
interfaces at the edge of a network to limit traffic into or out of the
network. Traffic that falls within the rate limit is transmitted, while packets
that exceed the acceptable amount of traffic are dropped.
Port Mirroring – The switch can unobtrusively mirror traffic from any
port to a monitor port. You can then attach a protocol analyzer or RMON
probe to this port to perform traffic analysis and verify connection
integrity.
Port Trunking – Ports can be combined into an aggregate connection.
Trunks can be manually set up or dynamically configured using IEEE
802.3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP). The additional ports
dramatically increase the throughput across any connection, and provide
redundancy by taking over the load if a port in the trunk should fail. The
switch supports up to four trunks.
Broadcast Storm Control – Broadcast suppression prevents broadcast
traffic from overwhelming the network. When enabled on a port, the level
of broadcast traffic passing through the port is restricted. If broadcast
traffic rises above a pre-defined threshold, it will be throttled until the level
falls back beneath the threshold.
Static Addresses – A static address can be assigned to a specific interface
on this switch. Static addresses are bound to the assigned interface and will
not be moved. When a static address is seen on another interface, the
address will be ignored and will not be written to the address table. Static
addresses can be used to provide network security by restricting access for
a known host to a specific port.
IEEE 802.1D Bridge – The switch supports IEEE 802.1D transparent
bridging. The address table facilitates data switching by learning addresses,
and then filtering or forwarding traffic based on this information. The
address table supports up to 8K addresses.
1-4
DESCRIPTION OF SOFTWARE FEATURES
Store-and-Forward Switching – The switch copies each frame into its
memory before forwarding them to another port. This ensures that all
frames are a standard Ethernet size and have been verified for accuracy
with the cyclic redundancy check (CRC). This prevents bad frames from
entering the network and wasting bandwidth.
To avoid dropping frames on congested ports, the switch provides 8 MB
for frame buffering. This buffer can queue packets awaiting transmission
on congested networks.
Spanning Tree Algorithm – The switch supports these spanning tree
protocols:
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP, IEEE 802.1D) – This protocol provides
loop detection and recovery by allowing two or more redundant
connections to be created between a pair of LAN segments. When there
are multiple physical paths between segments, this protocol will choose a
single path and disable all others to ensure that only one route exists
between any two stations on the network. This prevents the creation of
network loops. However, if the chosen path should fail for any reason, an
alternate path will be activated to maintain the connection.
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP, IEEE 802.1w) – This protocol
reduces the convergence time for network topology changes to 3 to 5
seconds, compared to 30 seconds or more for the older IEEE 802.1D STP
standard. It is intended as a complete replacement for STP, but can still
interoperate with switches running the older standard by automatically
reconfiguring ports to STP-compliant mode if they detect STP protocol
messages from attached devices.
Virtual LANs – The switch supports up to 255 VLANs. A Virtual LAN is
a collection of network nodes that share the same collision domain
regardless of their physical location or connection point in the network.
The switch supports tagged VLANs based on the IEEE 802.1Q standard.
Members of VLAN groups can be dynamically learned via GVRP, or ports
can be manually assigned to a specific set of VLANs. This allows the
1-5
INTRODUCTION
switch to restrict traffic to the VLAN groups to which a user has been
assigned. By segmenting your network into VLANs, you can:
•
•
•
•
Eliminate broadcast storms which severely degrade performance in a
flat network.
Simplify network management for node changes/moves by remotely
configuring VLAN membership for any port, rather than having to
manually change the network connection.
Provide data security by restricting all traffic to the originating VLAN.
Use private VLANs to restrict traffic to pass only between data ports
and the uplink ports, thereby isolating adjacent ports within the same
VLAN, and allowing you to limit the total number of VLANs that need
to be configured.
Traffic Prioritization – This switch prioritizes each packet based on the
required level of service, using four priority queues with strict or Weighted
Round Robin Queuing. It uses IEEE 802.1p and 802.1Q tags to prioritize
incoming traffic based on input from the end-station application. These
functions can be used to provide independent priorities for delay-sensitive
data and best-effort data.
This switch also supports several common methods of prioritizing layer 3/
4 traffic to meet application requirements. Traffic can be prioritized based
on the priority bits in the IP frame’s Type of Service (ToS) octet or the
number of the TCP/UDP port. When these services are enabled, the
priorities are mapped to a Class of Service value by the switch, and the
traffic then sent to the corresponding output queue.
Multicast Filtering – Specific multicast traffic can be assigned to its own
VLAN to ensure that it does not interfere with normal network traffic and
to guarantee real-time delivery by setting the required priority level for the
designated VLAN. The switch uses IGMP Snooping and Query to manage
multicast group registration.
1-6
SYSTEM DEFAULTS
System Defaults
The switch’s system defaults are provided in the configuration file
“Factory_Default_Config.cfg.” To reset the switch defaults, this file
should be set as the startup configuration file (page 3-23).
The following table lists some of the basic system defaults.
Table 1-2 System Defaults
Function
Parameter
Default
Console Port
Connection
Baud Rate
9600
Data bits
8
Stop bits
1
Parity
none
Local Console Timeout
0 (disabled)
Privileged Exec Level
Username “admin”
Password “admin”
Normal Exec Level
Username “guest”
Password “guest”
Enable Privileged Exec
from Normal Exec Level
Password “super”
RADIUS Authentication
Disabled
TACACS Authentication
Disabled
802.1X Port
Authentication
Disabled
HTTPS
Enabled
SSH
Disabled
Port Security
Disabled
IP Filtering
Disabled
Authentication
1-7
INTRODUCTION
Table 1-2 System Defaults
Function
Parameter
Default
Web
Management
HTTP Server
Enabled
HTTP Port Number
80
HTTP Secure Server
Enabled
HTTP Secure Port
Number
443
Community Strings
“public” (read only)
“private” (read/write)
Traps
Authentication traps: enabled
Link-up-down events: enabled
Admin Status
Enabled
Auto-negotiation
Enabled
Flow Control
Disabled
Rate Limiting
Input and output limits
Disabled
Port Trunking
Static Trunks
None
LACP (all ports)
Disabled
SNMP
Port
Configuration
Broadcast Storm Status
Protection
Broadcast Limit Rate
Spanning Tree
Enabled
Address Table
1-8
Status
Disabled (all ports)
32,000 octets per second
Enabled, RSTP
(Defaults: All values based on
IEEE 802.1w)
Fast Forwarding (Edge
Port)
Disabled
Aging Time
300 seconds
SYSTEM DEFAULTS
Table 1-2 System Defaults
Function
Parameter
Default
Virtual LANs
Default VLAN
1
PVID
1
Acceptable Frame Type
All
Ingress Filtering
Disabled
Switchport Mode (Egress
Mode)
Hybrid: tagged/untagged frames
GVRP (global)
Disabled
GVRP (port interface)
Disabled
Ingress Port Priority
0
Weighted Round Robin
Queue: 0 1 2 3
Weight: 1 2 4 6
IP Precedence Priority
Disabled
IP DSCP Priority
Disabled
IP Port Priority
Disabled
IP Address
0.0.0.0
Subnet Mask
255.0.0.0
Default Gateway
0.0.0.0
DHCP
Client: Enabled
BOOTP
Disabled
Multicast
Filtering
IGMP Snooping
Snooping: Enabled
System Log
Status
Enabled
Messages Logged
Levels 0-6
Traffic
Prioritization
IP Settings
Querier: Enabled
Messages Logged to Flash Levels 0-3
SMTP Email
Alerts
Event Handler
Enabled (but no server defined)
SNTP
Clock Synchronization
Disabled
1-9
INTRODUCTION
1-10
CHAPTER 2
INITIAL CONFIGURATION
Connecting to the Switch
Configuration Options
The switch includes a built-in network management agent. The agent
offers a variety of management options, including SNMP, RMON
(Groups 1, 2, 3, 9) and a Web-based interface. A PC may also be connected
directly to the switch for configuration and monitoring via a command line
interface (CLI).
Note: The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default.
To change this address, see “Setting an IP Address” on page 2-6.
The switch’s HTTP Web agent allows you to configure switch parameters,
monitor port connections, and display statistics using a standard Web
browser such as Netscape Navigator version 6.2 and higher or Microsoft
IE version 5.0 and higher. The switch’s Web management interface can be
accessed from any computer attached to the network.
The CLI program can be accessed by a direct connection to the RS-232
serial console port on the switch, or remotely by a Telnet connection over
the network.
The switch’s management agent also supports SNMP (Simple Network
Management Protocol). This SNMP agent permits the switch to be
managed from any system in the network using network management
software such as SMC EliteView.
2-1
INITIAL CONFIGURATION
The switch’s Web interface, CLI configuration program, and SNMP agent
allow you to perform the following management functions:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Set user names and passwords for up to 16 users
Set an IP interface for a management VLAN
Configure SNMP parameters
Enable/disable any port
Set the speed/duplex mode for any port
Configure the bandwidth of any port by limiting input or output rates
•
Control port access through IEEE 802.1X security or static address
filtering
•
Filter packets using Access Control Lists (ACLs)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Configure up to 255 IEEE 802.1Q VLANs
Enable GVRP automatic VLAN registration
Configure IGMP multicast filtering
Upload and download system firmware via TFTP
Upload and download switch configuration files via TFTP
Configure Spanning Tree parameters
Configure Class of Service (CoS) priority queuing
Configure up to 4 static or LACP trunks
Enable port mirroring
Set broadcast storm control on any port
Display system information and statistics
Configure any stack unit through the same IP address
Required Connections
The switch provides an RS-232 serial port that enables a connection to a
PC or terminal for monitoring and configuring the switch. A null-modem
console cable is provided with the switch.
Note: When configuring a stack, connect to the console port on the
Master unit.
2-2
CONNECTING TO THE SWITCH
Attach a VT100-compatible terminal, or a PC running a terminal
emulation program to the switch. You can use the console cable provided
with this package, or use a null-modem cable that complies with the wiring
assignments shown in the Installation Guide.
To connect a terminal to the console port, complete the following steps:
1. Connect the console cable to the serial port on a terminal, or a PC
running terminal emulation software, and tighten the captive retaining
screws on the DB-9 connector.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the RS-232 serial port on the
switch.
3. Make sure the terminal emulation software is set as follows:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Select the appropriate serial port (COM port 1 or COM port 2).
Set the baud rate to 9600 bps.
Set the data format to 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and no parity.
Set flow control to none.
Set the emulation mode to VT100.
When using HyperTerminal, select Terminal keys, not Windows
keys.
Notes: 1. When using HyperTerminal with Microsoft® Windows® 2000,
make sure that you have Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 or later
installed. Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 fixes the problem of
arrow keys not functioning in HyperTerminal’s VT100
emulation. See www.microsoft.com for information on
Windows 2000 service packs.
2. Refer to “Line Commands” on page 4-14 for a complete
description of console configuration options.
3. Once you have set up the terminal correctly, the console login
screen will be displayed.
2-3
INITIAL CONFIGURATION
For a description of how to use the CLI, see “Using the Command Line
Interface” on page 4-1. For a list of all the CLI commands and detailed
information on using the CLI, refer to “Command Groups” on page 4-12.
Remote Connections
Prior to accessing the switch’s onboard agent via a network connection,
you must first configure it with a valid IP address, subnet mask, and default
gateway using a console connection, DHCP or BOOTP protocol.
The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default. To
manually configure this address or enable dynamic address assignment via
DHCP or BOOTP, see “Setting an IP Address” on page 2-6.
Note: This switch supports four concurrent Telnet/SSH sessions.
After configuring the switch’s IP parameters, you can access the onboard
configuration program from anywhere within the attached network. The
onboard configuration program can be accessed using Telnet from any
computer attached to the network. The switch can also be managed by any
computer using a web browser (Internet Explorer 5.0 or above, or
Netscape Navigator 6.2 or above), or from a network computer using
SNMP network management software.
Note: The onboard program only provides access to basic configuration
functions. To access the full range of SNMP management
functions, you must use SNMP-based network management
software.
2-4
BASIC CONFIGURATION
Basic Configuration
Console Connection
The CLI program provides two different command levels — normal
access level (Normal Exec) and privileged access level (Privileged Exec).
The commands available at the Normal Exec level are a limited subset of
those available at the Privileged Exec level and allow you to only display
information and use basic utilities. To fully configure the switch
parameters, you must access the CLI at the Privileged Exec level.
Access to both CLI levels are controlled by user names and passwords.
The switch has a default user name and password for each level. To log
into the CLI at the Privileged Exec level using the default user name and
password, perform these steps:
1. To initiate your console connection, press <Enter>. The “User Access
Verification” procedure starts.
2. At the Username prompt, enter “admin.”
3. At the Password prompt, also enter “admin.” (The password
characters are not displayed on the console screen.)
4. The session is opened and the CLI displays the “Console#” prompt
indicating you have access at the Privileged Exec level.
Setting Passwords
Note: If this is your first time to log into the CLI program, you should
define new passwords for both default user names using the
“username” command, record them and put them in a safe place.
Passwords can consist of up to 8 alphanumeric characters and are case
sensitive. To prevent unauthorized access to the switch, set the passwords
as follows:
1. Open the console interface with the default user name and password
“admin” to access the Privileged Exec level.
2-5
INITIAL CONFIGURATION
2. Type “configure” and press <Enter>.
3. Type “username guest password 0 password,” for the Normal Exec
level, where password is your new password. Press <Enter>.
4. Type “username admin password 0 password,” for the Privileged Exec
level, where password is your new password. Press <Enter>.
Note: ‘0’ specifies the password in plain text, ‘7’ specifies the
password in encrypted form.
Username: admin
Password:
CLI session with the SMC6752AL2 is opened.
To end the CLI session, enter [Exit].
Console#configure
Console(config)#username guest password 0 [password]
Console(config)#username admin password 0 [password]
Console(config)#
Setting an IP Address
You must establish IP address information for the switch to obtain
management access through the network. This can be done in either of the
following ways:
Manual — You have to input the information, including IP address and
subnet mask. If your management station is not in the same IP subnet as
the switch, you will also need to specify the default gateway router.
Dynamic — The switch sends IP configuration requests to BOOTP or
DHCP address allocation servers on the network.
2-6
BASIC CONFIGURATION
Manual Configuration
You can manually assign an IP address to the switch. You may also need to
specify a default gateway that resides between this device and management
stations that exist on another network segment. Valid IP addresses consist
of four decimal numbers, 0 to 255, separated by periods. Anything outside
this format will not be accepted by the CLI program.
Note: The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default.
Before you can assign an IP address to the switch, you must obtain the
following information from your network administrator:
•
•
•
IP address for the switch
Default gateway for the network
Network mask for this network
To assign an IP address to the switch, complete the following steps:
1. From the Privileged Exec level global configuration mode prompt,
type “interface vlan 1” to access the interface-configuration mode.
Press <Enter>.
2. Type “ip address ip-address netmask,” where “ip-address” is the switch
IP address and “netmask” is the network mask for the network. Press
<Enter>.
3. Type “exit” to return to the global configuration mode prompt. Press
<Enter>.
4. To set the IP address of the default gateway for the network to which
the switch belongs, type “ip default-gateway gateway,” where “gateway”
is the IP address of the default gateway. Press <Enter>.
Console(config)#interface vlan 1
Console(config-if)#ip address 192.168.1.5 255.255.255.0
Console(config-if)#exit
Console(config)#ip default-gateway 192.168.1.254
Console(config)#
2-7
INITIAL CONFIGURATION
Dynamic Configuration
If you select the “bootp” or “dhcp” option, IP will be enabled but will not
function until a BOOTP or DHCP reply has been received. You therefore
need to use the “ip dhcp restart” command to start broadcasting service
requests. Requests will be sent periodically in an effort to obtain IP
configuration information. (BOOTP and DHCP values can include the IP
address, subnet mask, and default gateway.)
If the “bootp” or “dhcp” option is saved to the startup-config file (step 6),
then the switch will start broadcasting service requests as soon as it is
powered on.
To automatically configure the switch by communicating with BOOTP or
DHCP address allocation servers on the network, complete the following
steps:
1. From the Global Configuration mode prompt, type “interface vlan 1”
to access the interface-configuration mode. Press <Enter>.
2. At the interface-configuration mode prompt, use one of the following
commands:
•
To obtain IP settings via DHCP, type “ip address dhcp” and press
<Enter>.
•
To obtain IP settings via BOOTP, type “ip address bootp” and
press <Enter>.
3. Type “end” to return to the Privileged Exec mode. Press <Enter>.
4. Type “ip dhcp restart” to begin broadcasting service requests.
Press <Enter>.
5. Wait a few minutes, and then check the IP configuration settings by
typing the “show ip interface” command. Press <Enter>.
2-8
BASIC CONFIGURATION
6. Then save your configuration changes by typing “copy running-config
startup-config.” Enter the startup file name and press <Enter>.
Console(config)#interface vlan 1
Console(config-if)#ip address dhcp
Console(config-if)#end
Console#ip dhcp restart
Console#show ip interface
IP address and netmask: 192.168.1.54 255.255.255.0 on VLAN 1,
and address mode: User specified.
Console#copy running-config startup-config
Startup configuration file name []: startup
\Write to FLASH Programming.
\Write to FLASH finish.
Success.
Enabling SNMP Management Access
The switch can be configured to accept management commands from
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) applications such as
SMC EliteView. You can configure the switch to (1) respond to SNMP
requests or (2) generate SNMP traps.
When SNMP management stations send requests to the switch (either to
return information or to set a parameter), the switch provides the
requested data or sets the specified parameter. The switch can also be
configured to send information to SNMP managers (without being
requested by the managers) through trap messages, which inform the
manager that certain events have occurred.
Community Strings
Community strings are used to control management access to SNMP
stations, as well as to authorize SNMP stations to receive trap messages
from the switch. You therefore need to assign community strings to
specified users or user groups, and set the access level.
2-9
INITIAL CONFIGURATION
The default strings are:
•
public - with read-only access. Authorized management stations are
only able to retrieve MIB objects.
•
private - with read-write access. Authorized management stations are
able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects.
Note: If you do not intend to utilize SNMP, we recommend that you
delete both of the default community strings. If there are no
community strings, then SNMP management access to the switch
is disabled.
To prevent unauthorized access to the switch via SNMP, it is
recommended that you change the default community strings.
To configure a community string, complete the following steps:
1. From the Privileged Exec level global configuration mode prompt,
type “snmp-server community string mode,” where “string” is the
community access string and “mode” is rw (read/write) or ro (read
only). Press <Enter>. (Note that the default mode is read only.)
2. To remove an existing string, simply type “no snmp-server community
string,” where “string” is the community access string to remove. Press
<Enter>.
Console(config)#snmp-server community admin rw
Console(config)#snmp-server community private
Console(config)#
Trap Receivers
You can also specify SNMP stations that are to receive traps from the
switch. To configure a trap receiver, complete the following steps:
1. From the Privileged Exec level global configuration mode prompt,
type “snmp-server host host-address community-string,” where
“host-address” is the IP address for the trap receiver and
2-10
BASIC CONFIGURATION
“community-string” is the string associated with that host. Press
<Enter>.
2. In order to configure the switch to send SNMP notifications, you must
enter at least one snmp-server enable traps command. Type
“snmp-server enable traps type,” where “type” is either authentication
or link-up-down. Press <Enter>.
Console(config)#snmp-server enable traps link-up-down
Console(config)#
Saving Configuration Settings
Configuration commands only modify the running configuration file and
are not saved when the switch is rebooted. To save all your configuration
changes in nonvolatile storage, you must copy the running configuration
file to the start-up configuration file using the “copy” command.
To save the current configuration settings, enter the following command:
1. From the Privileged Exec mode prompt, type “copy running-config
startup-config” and press <Enter>.
2. Enter the name of the start-up file. Press <Enter>.
Console#copy running-config startup-config
Startup configuration file name []: startup
\Write to FLASH Programming.
\Write to FLASH finish.
Success.
Console#
2-11
INITIAL CONFIGURATION
Managing System Files
The switch’s flash memory supports three types of system files that can be
managed by the CLI program, Web interface, or SNMP. The switch’s file
system allows files to be uploaded and downloaded, copied, deleted, and
set as a start-up file.
The three types of files are:
•
Configuration — This file stores system configuration information
and is created when configuration settings are saved. Saved
configuration files can be selected as a system start-up file or can be
uploaded via TFTP to a server for backup. A file named
“Factory_Default_Config.cfg” contains all the system default settings
and cannot be deleted from the system. See “Saving or Restoring
Configuration Settings” on page 3-24 for more information.
•
Operation Code — System software that is executed after boot-up,
also known as run-time code. This code runs the switch operations and
provides the CLI and Web management interfaces. See “Managing
Firmware” on page 3-21 for more information.
•
Diagnostic Code — Software that is run during system boot-up, also
known as POST (Power On Self-Test).
Due to the size limit of the flash memory, the switch supports only two
operation code files. However, you can have as many diagnostic code files
and configuration files as available flash memory space allows.
In the system flash memory, one file of each type must be set as the
start-up file. During a system boot, the diagnostic and operation code files
set as the start-up file are run, and then the start-up configuration file is
loaded.
Note that configuration files should be downloaded using a file name that
reflects the contents or usage of the file settings. If you download directly
to the running-config, the system will reboot, and the settings will have to
be copied from the running-config to a permanent file.
2-12
CHAPTER 3
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
Using the Web Interface
This switch provides an embedded HTTP Web agent. Using a Web
browser you can configure the switch and view statistics to monitor
network activity. The Web agent can be accessed by any computer on the
network using a standard Web browser (Internet Explorer 5.0 or above, or
Netscape Navigator 6.2 or above).
Note: You can also use the Command Line Interface (CLI) to manage
the switch over a serial connection to the console port or via
Telnet. For more information on using the CLI, refer to Chapter 4
“Command Line Interface.”
Prior to accessing the switch from a Web browser, be sure you have first
performed the following tasks:
1. Configure the switch with a valid IP address, subnet mask, and default
gateway using an out-of-band serial connection, BOOTP or DHCP
protocol. (See “Setting an IP Address” on page 2-6.)
2. Set user names and passwords using an out-of-band serial connection.
Access to the Web agent is controlled by the same user names and
passwords as the onboard configuration program. (See “Setting
Passwords” on page 2-5.)
3. After you enter a user name and password, you will have access to the
system configuration program.
3-1
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
Notes: 1. You are allowed three attempts to enter the correct password;
on the third failed attempt the current connection is
terminated.
2. If you log into the Web interface as guest (Normal Exec level),
you can view the configuration settings or change the guest
password. If you log in as “admin” (Privileged Exec level), you
can change the settings on any page.
3. If the path between your management station and this switch
does not pass through any device that uses the Spanning Tree
Algorithm, then you can set the switch port attached to your
management station to fast forwarding (i.e., enable Admin
Edge Port) to improve the switch’s response time to
management commands issued through the web interface. See
“Configuring Interface Settings” on page 3-138.
3-2
NAVIGATING THE WEB BROWSER INTERFACE
Navigating the Web Browser Interface
To access the web-browser interface you must first enter a user name and
password. The administrator has Read/Write access to all configuration
parameters and statistics. The default user name and password for the
administrator is “admin.”
Home Page
When your web browser connects with the switch’s web agent, the home
page is displayed as shown below. The home page displays the Main Menu
on the left side of the screen and System Information on the right side.
The Main Menu links are used to navigate to other menus, and display
configuration parameters and statistics.
Figure 3-1 Home Page
3-3
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
Configuration Options
Configurable parameters have a dialog box or a drop-down list. Once a
configuration change has been made on a page, be sure to click on the
Apply button to confirm the new setting. The following table summarizes
the web page configuration buttons.
Table 3-1 Configuration Options
Button
Action
Revert
Cancels specified values and restores current values prior to
pressing Apply.
Apply
Sets specified values to the system.
Help
Links directly to webhelp.
Notes: 1. To ensure proper screen refresh, be sure that Internet Explorer
5.x is configured as follows: Under the menu “Tools / Internet
Options / General / Temporary Internet Files / Settings,” the
setting for item “Check for newer versions of stored pages”
should be “Every visit to the page.”
2. When using Internet Explorer 5.0, you may have to manually
refresh the screen after making configuration changes by
pressing the browser’s refresh button.
Panel Display
The web agent displays an image of the switch’s ports. The Mode can be
set to display different information for the ports, including Active (i.e., up
or down), Duplex (i.e., half or full duplex, or Flow Control (i.e., with or
without flow control). Clicking on the image of a port opens the Port
Configuration page as described on page 3-90.
Figure 3-2 Panel Display
3-4
MAIN MENU
Main Menu
Using the onboard web agent, you can define system parameters, manage
and control the switch, and all its ports, or monitor network conditions.
The following table briefly describes the selections available from this
program.
Table 3-2 Main Menu
Menu
Description
System
Page
3-11
System Information
Provides basic system description, including
contact information
3-11
Switch Information
Shows the number of ports, hardware/
firmware version numbers, and power status
3-13
Bridge Extension
Shows the bridge extension parameters
3-15
IP Configuration
Sets the IP address for management access
3-17
File
3-21
Copy
Allows the transfer and copying files
3-21
Delete
Allows deletion of files from the flash
memory
3-22
Set Startup
Sets the startup file
3-22
Line
3-28
Console
Sets console port connection parameters
3-28
Telnet
Sets Telnet connection parameters.
3-30
Log
3-33
Logs
Stores and displays error messages
3-33
System Logs
Sends error messages to a logging process
3-33
Remote Logs
Configures the logging of messages to a
remote logging process
3-35
SMTP Logs
Sends an SMTP client message to a
participating server
3-39
Restarts the switch
3-41
Reset
3-5
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
Table 3-2 Main Menu (Continued)
Menu
Description
SNTP
3-42
Configuration
Configures SNTP client settings, including
broadcast mode or a specified list of servers
3-42
Clock Time Zone
Sets the local time zone for the system clock
3-44
SNMP
Configuration
3-45
Configures community strings and related
trap functions
Security
3-45
3-48
User Accounts
Assigns a new password for the current user
3-48
Authentication Settings
Configures authentication sequence,
RADIUS and TACACS
3-50
HTTPS Settings
Configures secure HTTP settings
SSH
Host-Key Settings
3-54
3-57
Generates the host key pair (public and
private)
3-60
Settings
Configures Secure Shell server settings
3-63
Port Security
Configures per port security, including
status, response for security breach, and
maximum allowed MAC addresses
3-65
802.1X
Port authentication
3-67
Information
Displays global configuration settings
3-70
Configuration
Configures the global configuration setting
3-70
Port Configuration
Sets parameters for individual ports
3-71
Statistics
Displays protocol statistics for the selected
port
3-74
ACL
3-6
Page
3-78
Configuration
Configures packet filtering based on IP or
MAC addresses
3-78
Port Binding
Binds a port to the specified ACL
3-86
MAIN MENU
Table 3-2 Main Menu (Continued)
Menu
IP Filter
Description
Sets IP addresses of clients allowed
management access via the Web, SNMP, and
Telnet
Port
Page
3-76
3-87
Port Information
Displays port connection status
3-87
Trunk Information
Displays trunk connection status
3-87
Port Configuration
Configures port connection settings
3-90
Trunk Configuration
Configures trunk connection settings
3-90
Trunk Membership
Specifies ports to group into static trunks
3-94
LACP
3-92
Configuration
Allows ports to dynamically join trunks
3-96
Aggregation Port
Configures parameters for link aggregation
group members
3-98
Port Counters
Displays statistics for LACP protocol
messages
3-102
Port Internal
Information
Displays settings and operational state for
the local side
3-103
Port Neighbors
Information
Displays settings and operational state for
the remote side
3-106
Port Broadcast Control
Sets the broadcast storm threshold for each
port
3-108
Trunk Broadcast
Control
Sets the broadcast storm threshold for each
trunk
3-108
Mirror Port
Configuration
Sets the source and target ports for mirroring
3-110
Rate Limit
3-112
Granularity
Enables or disables the rate limit feature
3-112
Input
Port Configuration
Sets the input rate limit for each port
3-113
Input
Trunk Configuration
Sets the input rate limit for each trunk
3-113
3-7
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
Table 3-2 Main Menu (Continued)
Menu
Description
Page
Output
Port Configuration
Sets the output rate limit for each port
3-113
Output
Trunk Configuration
Sets the output rate limit for each trunk
3-113
Lists Ethernet and RMON port statistics
3-114
Port Statistics
Address Table
3-121
Static Addresses
Displays entries for interface, address or
VLAN
3-121
Dynamic Addresses
Displays or edits static entries in the Address
Table
3-122
Address Aging
Sets timeout for dynamically learned entries
Spanning Tree
3-124
3-124
STA
Information
Displays STA values used for the bridge
3-126
Configuration
Configures global bridge settings for STA
and RSTP
3-130
Port Information
Displays individual port settings for STA
3-134
Trunk Information
Displays individual trunk settings for STA
3-134
Port Configuration
Configures individual port settings for STA
3-138
Trunk Configuration
Configures individual trunk settings for STA
3-138
VLAN
3-141
802.1Q VLAN
3-8
GVRP Status
Enables GVRP VLAN registration protocol
3-146
Basic Information
Displays information on the VLAN type
supported by this switch
3-146
Current Table
Shows the current port members of each
VLAN and whether or not the port is tagged
or untagged
3-147
Static List
Used to create or remove VLAN groups
3-149
Static Table
Modifies the settings for an existing VLAN
3-151
MAIN MENU
Table 3-2 Main Menu (Continued)
Menu
Description
Page
Static Membership by Configures membership type for interfaces,
Port
including tagged, untagged or forbidden
3-153
Port Configuration
Specifies default PVID and VLAN attributes
3-155
Trunk Configuration
Specifies default trunk VID and VLAN
attributes
3-155
Private VLAN
3-158
Information
Displays Private VLAN feature information
3-159
Configuration
This page is used to create/remove primary
or community VLANs
3-161
Association
Each community VLAN must be associated
with a primary VLAN
3-162
Port Information
Shows VLAN port type, and associated
primary or secondary VLANs
3-163
Port Configuration
Sets the private VLAN interface type, and
associates the interfaces with a private
VLAN
3-165
Trunk Information
Shows VLAN port type, and associated
primary or secondary VLANs
3-163
Trunk Configuration
Sets the private VLAN interface type, and
associates the interfaces with a private
VLAN
3-165
Priority
3-167
Default Port Priority
Sets the default priority for each port
3-167
Default Trunk Priority
Sets the default priority for each trunk
3-167
Traffic Classes
Maps IEEE 802.1p priority tags to output
queues
3-169
Traffic Classes Status
Enables/disables traffic class priorities (not
implemented)
Queue Mode
Sets queue mode to strict priority or
Weighted Round-Robin
NA
3-172
3-9
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
Table 3-2 Main Menu (Continued)
Menu
Description
Queue Scheduling
Configures Weighted Round Robin
queueing
3-173
IP Precedence/
DSCP Priority Status
Globally selects IP Precedence or DSCP
Priority, or disables both.
3-175
IP Precedence Priority
Sets IP Type of Service priority, mapping the
precedence tag to a class-of-service value
3-175
IP DSCP Priority
Sets IP Differentiated Services Code Point
priority, mapping a DSCP tag to a
class-of-service value
3-177
IP Port Priority Status
Globally enables or disables IP Port Priority
3-175
IP Port Priority
Sets TCP/UDP port priority, defining the
socket number and associated
class-of-service value
3-179
ACL CoS Priority
Sets the CoS value and corresponding output
queue for packets matching an ACL rule
3-181
IGMP Snooping
3-10
Page
3-183
IGMP Configuration
Enables multicast filtering; configures
parameters for multicast query
3-184
Multicast Router
Port Information
Displays the ports that are attached to a
neighboring multicast router for each VLAN
ID
3-187
Static Multicast Router
Port Configuration
Assigns ports that are attached to a
neighboring multicast router
3-188
IP Multicast Registration Displays all multicast groups active on this
Table
switch, including multicast IP addresses and
VLAN ID
3-189
IGMP Member
Port Table
3-191
Indicates multicast addresses associated with
the selected VLAN
BASIC CONFIGURATION
Basic Configuration
Displaying System Information
You can easily identify the system by displaying the device name, location
and contact information.
Field Attributes
•
System Name – Name assigned to the switch system.
•
Object ID – MIB II object ID for switch’s network management
subsystem.
•
Location – Specifies the system location.
•
Contact – Administrator responsible for the system.
•
System Up Time – Length of time the management agent has been
up.
These additional parameters are displayed for the CLI.
•
MAC Address – The physical layer address for this switch.
•
Web server – Shows if management access via HTTP is enabled.
•
Web server port – Shows the TCP port number used by the web
interface.
•
Web secure server – Shows if management access via HTTPS is
enabled.
•
Web secure server port – Shows the TCP port used by the HTTPS
interface.
•
Telnet server – Shows if management access via Telnet is enabled.
•
Telnet port – Shows the TCP port used by the Telnet interface.
•
Jumbo Frame – Shows if jumbo frames are enabled.
•
POST result – Shows results of the power-on self-test.
3-11
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
Web – Click System, System Information. Specify the system name,
location, and contact information for the system administrator, then click
Apply. (This page also includes a Telnet button that allows access to the
Command Line Interface via Telnet.)
Figure 3-3 System Information
3-12
BASIC CONFIGURATION
CLI – Specify the hostname, location and contact information.
Console(config)#hostname R&D 5
Console(config)#snmp-server location WC 9
Console(config)#snmp-server contact Ted
Console(config)#exit
Console#show system
System description: TigerSwitch 10/100 6752AL2
System OID string: 1.3.6.1.4.1.202.20.44
System information
System Up time:
0 days, 2 hours, 4 minutes, and 7.13
seconds
System Name:
R&D 5
System Location:
WC 9
System Contact
Ted
MAC address
00-30-F1-12-34-56
Web server:
enabled
Web server port:
80
Web secure server:
enabled
Web secure server port: 443
Telnet server:
enabled
Telnet port:
23
Jumbo Frame:
Disabled
POST result
DUMMY Test 1.................PASS
UART LOOP BACK Test..........PASS
DRAM Test....................PASS
Timer Test...................PASS
RTC Initialization...........PASS
Switch Int Loopback test.....PASS
4-34
4-138
4-138
4-83
Done All Pass.
Console#
Displaying Switch Hardware/Software Versions
Use the Switch Information page to display hardware/firmware version
numbers for the main board and management software, as well as the
power status of the system.
Field Attributes
Main Board
• Serial Number – The serial number of the switch.
•
Number of Ports – Number of built-in RJ-45 ports.
•
Hardware Version – Hardware version of the main board.
•
Internal Power Status – Displays the status of the internal power
supply.
3-13
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
Management Software
• Loader Version – Version number of loader code.
•
Boot-ROM Version – Version of Power-On Self-Test (POST) and
boot code.
•
Operation Code Version – Version number of runtime code.
•
Role – Shows that this switch is operating as Master or Slave.
Expansion Slot
• Expansion Slot 1/2 – Combination RJ-45/SFP ports.
These additional parameters are displayed for the CLI.
•
Unit ID – Unit number in stack.
•
Redundant Power Status – Displays the status of the redundant
power supply.
Web – Click System, Switch Information.
Figure 3-4 Switch Information
3-14
BASIC CONFIGURATION
CLI – Use the following command to display version information.
Console#show version
Unit 1
Serial number:
Service tag:
Hardware version:
Module A type:
Module B type:
Number of ports:
Main power status:
Redundant power status
Agent (master)
Unit ID:
Loader version:
Boot ROM version:
Operation code version:
4-84
A419048860
R0B
1000BaseT
1000BaseT
52
up
:not present
1
2.2.1.1
2.2.1.3
2.2.2.2
Console#
Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities
The Bridge MIB includes extensions for managed devices that support
Multicast Filtering, Traffic Classes, and Virtual LANs. You can access these
extensions to display default settings for the key variables.
Field Attributes
•
Extended Multicast Filtering Services – This switch does not
support the filtering of individual multicast addresses based on GMRP
(GARP Multicast Registration Protocol).
•
Traffic Classes – This switch provides mapping of user priorities to
multiple traffic classes. (Refer to “Class of Service Configuration” on
page 3-167.)
•
Static Entry Individual Port – This switch allows static filtering for
unicast and multicast addresses. (Refer to “Setting Static Addresses”
on page 3-121.)
•
VLAN Learning – This switch uses Independent VLAN Learning
(IVL), where each port maintains its own filtering database.
3-15
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
•
Configurable PVID Tagging – This switch allows you to override
the default Port VLAN ID (PVID used in frame tags) and egress status
(VLAN-Tagged or Untagged) on each port. (Refer to “VLAN
Configuration” on page 3-141.)
•
Local VLAN Capable – This switch does not support multiple local
bridges outside of the scope of 802.1Q defined VLANs.
•
GMRP – GARP Multicast Registration Protocol (GMRP) allows
network devices to register endstations with multicast groups. This
switch does not support GMRP; it uses the Internet Group
Management Protocol (IGMP) to provide automatic multicast
filtering.
Web – Click System, Bridge Extension Configuration.
Figure 3-5 Bridge Extension Configuration
3-16
BASIC CONFIGURATION
CLI – Enter the following command.
Console#show bridge-ext
Max support VLAN numbers:
Max support VLAN ID:
Extended multicast filtering services:
Static entry individual port:
VLAN learning:
Configurable PVID tagging:
Local VLAN capable:
Traffic classes:
Global GVRP status:
GMRP:
Console#
4-218
255
4094
No
Yes
IVL
Yes
No
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Setting the Switch’s IP Address
This section describes how to configure an IP interface for management
access over the network. The IP address for this switch is obtained via
DHCP by default. To manually configure an address, you need to change
the switch’s default settings (IP address 0.0.0.0 and netmask 255.0.0.0) to
values that are compatible with your network. You may also need to a
establish a default gateway between the switch and management stations
that exist on another network segment.
You can manually configure a specific IP address, or direct the device to
obtain an address from a BOOTP or DHCP server. Valid IP addresses
consist of four decimal numbers, 0 to 255, separated by periods. Anything
outside this format will not be accepted by the CLI program.
Command Attributes
•
Management VLAN – ID of the configured VLAN (1-4094, no
leading zeroes). By default, all ports on the switch are members of
VLAN 1. However, the management station can be attached to a port
belonging to any VLAN, as long as that VLAN has been assigned an
IP address.
•
IP Address Mode – Specifies whether IP functionality is enabled via
manual configuration (Static), Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
(DHCP), or Boot Protocol (BOOTP). If DHCP/BOOTP is enabled,
IP will not function until a reply has been received from the server.
3-17
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
Requests will be broadcast periodically by the switch for an IP address.
(DHCP/BOOTP values can include the IP address, subnet mask, and
default gateway.)
•
IP Address – Address of the VLAN interface that is allowed
management access. Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers, 0 to
255, separated by periods. (Default: 0.0.0.0)
•
Subnet Mask – This mask identifies the host address bits used for
routing to specific subnets. (Default: 255.0.0.0)
•
Gateway IP address – IP address of the gateway router between this
device and management stations that exist on other network segments.
(Default: 0.0.0.0)
•
•
MAC Address – The physical layer address for this switch.
Restart DHCP – Requests a new IP address from the DHCP server.
Manual Configuration
Web – Click System, IP Configuration. Select the VLAN through which
the management station is attached, set the IP Address Mode to “Static,”
enter the IP address, subnet mask and gateway, then click Apply.
Figure 3-6 Manual IP Configuration
3-18
BASIC CONFIGURATION
CLI – Specify the management interface, IP address and default gateway.
Console#config
Console(config)#interface vlan 1
Console(config-if)#ip address 10.1.0.254 255.255.255.0
Console(config-if)#exit
Console(config)#ip default-gateway 192.168.1.254
Console(config)#
4-145
4-249
4-252
Using DHCP/BOOTP
If your network provides DHCP/BOOTP services, you can configure the
switch to be dynamically configured by these services.
Web – Click System, IP Configuration. Specify the VLAN to which the
management station is attached, set the IP Address Mode to DHCP or
BOOTP. Click Apply to save your changes. Then click Restart DHCP to
immediately request a new address. Note that the switch will also broadcast
a request for IP configuration settings on each power reset.
Figure 3-7 DHCP IP Configuration
Note: If you lose your management connection, use a console
connection and enter “show ip interface” to determine the new
switch address.
3-19
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
CLI – Specify the management interface, and set the IP address mode to
DHCP or BOOTP, and then enter the “ip dhcp restart” command.
Console#config
Console(config)#interface vlan 1
4-145
Console(config-if)#ip address dhcp
4-249
Console(config-if)#end
Console#ip dhcp restart
4-251
Console#show ip interface
4-252
IP address and netmask: 192.168.1.54 255.255.255.0 on VLAN 1,
and address mode: dhcp.
Console#
Renewing DCHP – DHCP may lease addresses to clients indefinitely or
for a specific period of time. If the address expires or the switch is moved
to another network segment, you will lose management access to the
switch. In this case, you can reboot the switch or submit a client request to
restart DHCP service via the CLI.
Web – If the address assigned by DHCP is no longer functioning, you will
not be able to renew the IP settings via the web interface. You can only
restart DHCP service via the web interface if the current address is still
available.
CLI – Enter the following command to restart DHCP service.
Console#ip dhcp restart
Console#
3-20
4-251
BASIC CONFIGURATION
Managing Firmware
You can upload/download firmware to or from a TFTP server, or copy
files to and from switch units in a stack. By saving runtime code to a file on
a TFTP server, that file can later be downloaded to the switch to restore
operation. You can also set the switch to use new firmware without
overwriting the previous version. You must specify the method of file
transfer, along with the file type and file names as required.
Command Attributes
•
File Transfer Method – The firmware copy operation includes these
options:
- file to file – Copies a file within the switch directory, assigning it a
new name.
- file to tftp – Copies a file from the switch to a TFTP server.
- tftp to file – Copies a file from a TFTP server to the switch.
- file to unit1 – Copies a file from this switch to another unit in the
stack.
- unit to file3 – Copies a file from another unit in the stack to this
switch.
•
TFTP Server IP Address – The IP address of a TFTP server.
•
File Type – Specify opcode (operational code) to copy firmware.
•
File Name – The file name should not contain slashes (\ or /), the
leading letter of the file name should not be a period (.), and the
maximum length for file names on the TFTP server is 127 characters
or 31 characters for files on the switch. (Valid characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9,
“.”, “-”, “_”)
Note: Up to two copies of the system software (i.e., the runtime
firmware) can be stored in the file directory on the switch. The
currently designated startup version of this file cannot be deleted.
1. These operations are not supported for this switch.
3-21
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
Downloading System Software from a Server
When downloading runtime code, you can specify the destination file
name to replace the current image, or first download the file using a
different name from the current runtime code file, and then set the new
file as the startup file.
Web –Click System, File Management, Copy Operation. Select “tftp to
file” as the file transfer method, enter the IP address of the TFTP server,
set the file type to “opcode,” enter the file name of the software to
download, select a file on the switch to overwrite or specify a new file
name, then click Apply. If you replaced the current firmware used for
startup and want to start using the new operation code, reboot the system
via the System/Reset menu.
Figure 3-8 Operation Code Image File Transfer
3-22
BASIC CONFIGURATION
If you download to a new destination file, go to the System/File/Set
Start-Up menu, mark the operation code file used at startup, and click
Apply. To start the new firmware, reboot the system via the System/Reset
menu.
Figure 3-9 Select Start-Up Operation File
To delete a file select System, File, Delete. Select the file name from the
given list by checking the tick box and click Apply. Note that the file
currently designated as the startup code cannot be deleted
Figure 3-10 Deleting Files
3-23
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
CLI – To download new firmware form a TFTP server, enter the IP
address of the TFTP server, select “opcode” as the file type, then enter the
source and destination file names. When the file has finished downloading,
set the new file to start up the system, and then restart the switch.
To start the new firmware, enter the “reload” command or reboot the
system.
Console#copy tftp file
TFTP server ip address: 10.1.0.19
Choose file type:
1. config: 2. opcode: <1-2>: 2
Source file name: V2.2.2.2.bix
Destination file name: V2.2.2.2.bix
\Write to FLASH Programming.
-Write to FLASH finish.
Success.
Console#config
Console(config)#boot system opcode:V2.2.2.2
Console(config)#exit
Console#reload
4-87
4-93
4-30
Saving or Restoring Configuration Settings
You can upload/download configuration settings to/from a TFTP server
or copy files to and from switch units in a stack. The configuration files
can be later downloaded to restore the switch’s settings.
Command Attributes
•
File Transfer Method – The configuration copy operation includes
these options:
- file to file – Copies a file within the switch directory, assigning it a
new name.
- file to running-config – Copies a file in the switch to the running
configuration.
- file to startup-config – Copies a file in the switch to the startup
configuration.
- file to tftp – Copies a file from the switch to a TFTP server.
- running-config to file – Copies the running configuration to a file.
- running-config to startup-config – Copies the running config to the
startup config.
3-24
BASIC CONFIGURATION
- running-config to tftp – Copies the running configuration to a TFTP
server.
- startup-config to file – Copies the startup configuration to a file on
the switch.
- startup-config to running-config – Copies the startup config to the
running config.
- startup-config to tftp – Copies the startup configuration to a TFTP
server.
- tftp to file – Copies a file from a TFTP server to the switch.
- tftp to running-config – Copies a file from a TFTP server to the
running config.
- tftp to startup-config – Copies a file from a TFTP server to the
startup config.
- file to unit2 – Copies a file from this switch to another unit in the
stack.
- unit to file2 – Copies a file from another unit in the stack to this
switch.
•
TFTP Server IP Address – The IP address of a TFTP server.
•
File Type – Specify config (configuration) to copy configuration
settings.
•
File Name — The file name should not contain slashes (\ or /), the
leading letter of the file name should not be a period (.), and the
maximum length for file names on the TFTP server is 127 characters
or 31 characters for files on the switch. (Valid characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9,
“.”, “-”, “_”)
Note: The maximum number of user-defined configuration files is
limited only by available flash memory space.
2. These operations are not supported for this switch.
3-25
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
Downloading Configuration Settings from a Server
You can download the configuration file under a new file name and then
set it as the startup file, or you can specify the current startup
configuration file as the destination file to directly replace it. Note that the
file “Factory_Default_Config.cfg” can be copied to the TFTP server, but
cannot be used as the destination on the switch.
Web – Click System, File, Copy. Select “tftp to startup-config” or “tftp to
file” and enter the IP address of the TFTP server. Specify the name of the
file to download and select a file on the switch to overwrite or specify a
new file name, then click Apply.
Figure 3-11 Copy Configuration Settings
3-26
BASIC CONFIGURATION
If you download to a new file name using “tftp to startup-config” or “tftp
to file,” the file is automatically set as the start-up configuration file. To use
the new settings, reboot the system via the System/Reset menu.
Note that you can also select any configuration file as the start-up
configuration by using the System/File/Set Start-Up page.
Figure 3-12 Setting the Startup Configuration Settings
CLI – Enter the IP address of the TFTP server, specify the source file on
the server, set the startup file name on the switch, and then restart the
switch.
Console#copy tftp startup-config
TFTP server ip address: 192.168.1.19
Source configuration file name: config-1
Startup configuration file name [] : startup
\Write to FLASH Programming.
-Write to FLASH finish.
Success.
4-87
Console#reload
To select another configuration file as the start-up configuration, use the
boot system command and then restart the switch.
Console#config
Console(config)#boot system config: startup-new
Console(config)#exit
Console#reload
4-93
4-30
3-27
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
Console Port Settings
You can access the onboard configuration program by attaching a VT100
compatible device to the switch’s serial console port. Management access
through the console port is controlled by various parameters, including a
password, timeouts, and basic communication settings. These parameters
can be configured via the web or CLI interface.
Command Attributes
3-28
•
Login Timeout – Sets the interval that the system waits for a user to
log into the CLI. If a login attempt is not detected within the timeout
interval, the connection is terminated for the session.
(Range: 0-300 seconds; Default: 0)
•
Exec Timeout – Sets the interval that the system waits until user input
is detected. If user input is not detected within the timeout interval, the
current session is terminated. (Range: 0-65535 seconds; Default: 0)
•
Password Threshold – Sets the password intrusion threshold, which
limits the number of failed logon attempts. When the logon attempt
threshold is reached, the system interface becomes silent for a specified
amount of time (set by the Silent Time parameter) before allowing the
next logon attempt. (Range: 0-120; Default: 3 attempts)
•
Silent Time – Sets the amount of time the management console is
inaccessible after the number of unsuccessful logon attempts has been
exceeded. (Range: 0-65535; Default: 0)
•
Data Bits – Sets the number of data bits per character that are
interpreted and generated by the console port. If parity is being
generated, specify 7 data bits per character. If no parity is required,
specify 8 data bits per character. (Default: 8 bits)
•
Parity – Defines the generation of a parity bit. Communication
protocols provided by some terminals can require a specific parity bit
setting. Specify Even, Odd, or None. (Default: None)
BASIC CONFIGURATION
•
Speed – Sets the terminal line’s baud rate for transmit (to terminal) and
receive (from terminal). Set the speed to match the baud rate of the
device connected to the serial port. (Range: 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600,
or 115200 baud; Default: 9600 bps)
•
Stop Bits – Sets the number of the stop bits transmitted per byte.
(Range: 1-2; Default: 1 stop bit)
•
Password3 – Specifies a password for the line connection. When a
connection is started on a line with password protection, the system
prompts for the password. If you enter the correct password, the
system shows a prompt. (Default: No password)
•
Login3 – Enables password checking at login. You can select
authentication by a single global password as configured for the
Password parameter, or by passwords set up for specific user-name
accounts. (Default: Local)
Web – Click System, Line, Console. Specify the console port connection
parameters as required, then click Apply.
Figure 3-13 Console Port Settings
3. CLI only.
3-29
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
CLI – Enter Line Configuration mode for the console, then specify the
connection parameters as required. To display the current console port
settings, use the show line command from the Normal Exec level.
Console(config)#line console
Console(config-line)#login local
Console(config-line)#password 0 secret
Console(config-line)#timeout login response 0
Console(config-line)#exec-timeout 0
Console(config-line)#password-thresh 3
Console(config-line)#silent-time 60
Console(config-line)#databits 8
Console(config-line)#parity none
Console(config-line)#speed 115200
Console(config-line)#stopbits 1
Console(config-line)#end
Console#show line
Console configuration:
Password threshold: 3 times
Interactive timeout: Disabled
Login timeout:
Disabled
Silent time:
60
Baudrate:
115200
Databits:
8
Parity:
none
Stopbits:
1
4-15
4-16
4-17
4-18
4-19
4-20
4-21
4-22
4-23
4-23
4-24
4-25
VTY configuration:
Password threshold: 3 times
Interactive timeout: 600 sec
Login timeout:
300 sec
Console#
Telnet Settings
You can access the onboard configuration program over the network using
Telnet (i.e., a virtual terminal). Management access via Telnet can be
enabled/disabled and other various parameters set, including the TCP port
number, timeouts, and a password. These parameters can be configured
via the web or CLI interface.
Command Attributes
3-30
•
Telnet Status – Enables or disables Telnet access to the switch.
(Default: Enabled)
•
Telnet Port Number – Sets the TCP port number for Telnet on the
switch. (Default: 23)
BASIC CONFIGURATION
•
Login Timeout – Sets the interval that the system waits for a user to
log into the CLI. If a login attempt is not detected within the timeout
interval, the connection is terminated for the session.
(Range: 0-300 seconds; Default: 300 seconds)
•
Exec Timeout – Sets the interval that the system waits until user input
is detected. If user input is not detected within the timeout interval, the
current session is terminated. (Range: 0-65535 seconds; Default: 600
seconds)
•
Password Threshold – Sets the password intrusion threshold, which
limits the number of failed logon attempts. When the logon attempt
threshold is reached, the system interface becomes silent for a specified
amount of time (set by the Silent Time parameter) before allowing the
next logon attempt. (Range: 0-120; Default: 3 attempts)
•
Password4 – Specifies a password for the line connection. When a
connection is started on a line with password protection, the system
prompts for the password. If you enter the correct password, the
system shows a prompt. (Default: No password)
•
Login4 – Enables password checking at login. You can select
authentication by a single global password as configured for the
Password parameter, or by passwords set up for specific user-name
accounts. (Default: Local)
4. CLI only.
3-31
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
Web – Click System, Line, Telnet. Specify the connection parameters for
Telnet access, then click Apply.
Figure 3-14 Enabling Telnet
CLI – Enter Line Configuration mode for a virtual terminal, then specify
the connection parameters as required. To display the current virtual
terminal settings, use the show line command from the Normal Exec
level.
Console(config)#line vty
Console(config-line)#login local
Console(config-line)#password 0 secret
Console(config-line)#timeout login response 300
Console(config-line)#exec-timeout 600
Console(config-line)#password-thresh 3
Console(config-line)#end
Console#show line
Console configuration:
Password threshold: 3 times
Interactive timeout: Disabled
Login timeout:
Disabled
Silent time:
Disabled
Baudrate:
9600
Databits:
8
Parity:
none
Stopbits:
1
VTY configuration:
Password threshold: 3 times
Interactive timeout: 600 sec
Login timeout: 300 sec
Console#
3-32
4-15
4-16
4-17
4-18
4-19
4-20
4-25
BASIC CONFIGURATION
Configuring Event Logging
The switch allows you to control the logging of error messages, including
the type of events that are recorded in switch memory, logging to a remote
System Log (syslog) server, and displays a list of recent event messages.
System Log Configuration
The system allows you to enable or disable event logging, and specify
which levels are logged to RAM or flash memory.
Severe error messages that are logged to flash memory are permanently
stored in the switch to assist in troubleshooting network problems. Up to
4096 log entries can be stored in the flash memory, with the oldest entries
being overwritten first when the available log memory (256 kilobytes) has
been exceeded.
The System Logs page allows you to configure and limit system messages
that are logged to flash or RAM memory. The default is for event levels 0
to 3 to be logged to flash and levels 0 to 6 to be logged to RAM.
Command Attributes
•
System Log Status – Enables/disables the logging of debug or error
messages to the logging process. (Default: Enabled)
•
Flash Level – Limits log messages saved to the switch’s permanent
flash memory for all levels up to the specified level. For example, if
level 3 is specified, all messages from level 0 to level 3 will be logged to
flash. (Range: 0-7, Default: 3)
3-33
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
Table 3-3 Logging Levels
Level Severity Name
Description
7
Debug
Debugging messages
6
Informational
Informational messages only
5
Notice
Normal but significant condition, such as cold
start
4
Warning
Warning conditions (e.g., return false,
unexpected return)
3
Error
Error conditions (e.g., invalid input, default
used)
2
Critical
Critical conditions (e.g., memory allocation, or
free memory error - resource exhausted)
1
Alert
Immediate action needed
0
Emergency
System unusable
* There are only Level 2, 5 and 6 error messages for the current firmware
release.
•
RAM Level – Limits log messages saved to the switch’s temporary
RAM memory for all levels up to the specified level. For example, if
level 7 is specified, all messages from level 0 to level 7 will be logged to
RAM. (Range: 0-7, Default: 6)
Note: The Flash Level must be equal to or less than the RAM Level.
3-34
BASIC CONFIGURATION
Web – Click System, Log, System Logs. Specify System Log Status, set the
level of event messages to be logged to RAM and flash memory, then click
Apply.
Figure 3-15 System Logs
CLI – Enable system logging and then specify the level of messages to be
logged to RAM and flash memory. Use the show logging command to
display the current settings.
Console(config)#logging on
Console(config)#logging history ram 0
Console(config)#end
Console#show logging flash
Syslog logging: Enabled
History logging in FLASH: level emergencies
Console#
4-59
4-60
4-64
Remote Log Configuration
The Remote Logs page allows you to configure the logging of messages
that are sent to syslog servers or other management stations. You can also
limit the error messages sent to only those messages below a specified
level.
3-35
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
Command Attributes
•
Remote Log Status – Enables/disables the logging of debug or error
messages to the remote logging process. (Default: Enabled)
•
Logging Facility – Sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog
messages. There are eight facility types specified by values of 16 to 23.
The facility type is used by the syslog server to dispatch log messages
to an appropriate service.
The attribute specifies the facility type tag sent in syslog messages. (See
RFC 3164.) This type has no effect on the kind of messages reported
by the switch. However, it may be used by the syslog server to process
messages, such as sorting or storing messages in the corresponding
database. (Range: 16-23, Default: 23)
3-36
•
Logging Trap – Limits log messages that are sent to the remote syslog
server for all levels up to the specified level. For example, if level 3 is
specified, all messages from level 0 to level 3 will be sent to the remote
server. (Range: 0-7, Default: 6)
•
Host IP List – Displays the list of remote server IP addresses that
receive the syslog messages. The maximum number of host IP
addresses allowed is five.
•
Host IP Address – Specifies a new server IP address to add to the
Host IP List.
BASIC CONFIGURATION
Web – Click System, Log, Remote Logs. To add an IP address to the Host
IP List, type the new IP address in the Host IP Address box, and then click
Add. To delete an IP address, click the entry in the Host IP List, and then
click Remove.
Figure 3-16 Remote Logs
CLI – Enter the syslog server host IP address, choose the facility type and
set the logging trap.
Console(config)#logging host 192.168.1.15
Console(config)#logging facility 23
Console(config)#logging trap 4
Console(config)#end
Console#show logging trap
Syslog logging:
Enabled
REMOTELOG status:
Enabled
REMOTELOG facility type:
local use 7
REMOTELOG level type:
Informational messages only
REMOTELOG server ip address: 192.168.1.15
REMOTELOG server ip address: 0.0.0.0
REMOTELOG server ip address: 0.0.0.0
REMOTELOG server ip address: 0.0.0.0
REMOTELOG server ip address: 0.0.0.0
Console#
4-61
4-62
4-63
4-63
3-37
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
Displaying Log Messages
The Logs page allows you to scroll through the logged system and event
messages. The switch can store up to 2048 log entries in temporary
random access memory (RAM; i.e., memory flushed on power reset) and
up to 4096 entries in permanent flash memory.
Web – Click System, Log, Logs.
Figure 3-17 Displaying Logs
CLI – This example shows the event message stored in RAM.
Console#show log ram
[1] 00:01:37 2001-01-01
"DHCP request failed - will retry later."
level: 4, module: 9, function: 0, and event no.: 10
[0] 00:00:35 2001-01-01
"System coldStart notification."
level: 6, module: 6, function: 1, and event no.: 1
Console#
3-38
4-64
BASIC CONFIGURATION
Sending Simple Mail Transfer Protocol Alerts
To alert system administrators of problems, the switch can use SMTP
(Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) to send email messages when triggered by
logging events of a specified level. The messages are sent to specified
SMTP servers on the network and can be retrieved using POP or IMAP
clients.
Command Attributes
•
Admin Status – Enables/disables the SMTP function.
(Default: Enabled)
•
Email Source Address – Sets the email address used for the “From”
field in alert messages. You may use a symbolic email address that
identifies the switch, or the address of an administrator responsible for
the switch.
•
Severity – Sets the syslog severity threshold level (see table on
page 3-34) used to trigger alert messages. All events at this level or
higher will be sent to the configured email recipients. For example,
using Level 7 will report all events from level 7 to level 0.
(Default: Level 7)
•
SMTP Server List – Specifies a list of up to three recipient SMTP
servers. The switch attempts to connect to the other listed servers if the
first fails. Use the New SMTP Server text field and the Add/Remove
buttons to configure the list.
•
Email Destination Address List – Specifies the email recipients of
alert messages. You can specify up to five recipients. Use the New
Email Destination Address text field and the Add/Remove buttons to
configure the list.
3-39
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
Web – Click System, Log, SMTP. Enable SMTP, specify a source email
address, and select the minimum severity level. To add an IP address to the
SMTP Server List, type the new IP address in the SMTP Server field and
click Add. To delete an IP address, click the entry in the SMTP Server List
and click Remove. Specify up to five email addresses to receive the alert
messages, and click Apply.
Figure 3-18 Enabling and Configuring SMTP Alerts
3-40
BASIC CONFIGURATION
CLI – Enter the IP address of at least one SMTP server, set the syslog
severity level to trigger an email message, and specify the switch (source)
and up to five recipient (destination) email addresses. Enable SMTP with
the logging sendmail command to complete the configuration. Use the
show logging sendmail command to display the current SMTP
configuration.
Console(config)#logging sendmail host 192.168.1.200
Console(config)#logging sendmail level 4
Console(config)#logging sendmail source-email
[email protected]
Console(config)##logging sendmail destination-email
[email protected]
Console(config)#logging sendmail
Console(config)#exit
Console#show logging sendmail
SMTP servers
----------------------------------------------1. 192.168.1.200
4-68
4-69
4-70
4-70
4-71
4-71
SMTP minimum severity level: 4
SMTP destination email addresses
----------------------------------------------1. [email protected]
SMTP source email address:
SMTP status:
Console#
[email protected]
Enabled
Resetting the System
Web – Click System, Reset to reboot the switch. When prompted, confirm
that you want reset the switch.
Figure 3-19 Resetting the System
3-41
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
CLI – Use the reload command to restart the switch. When prompted,
confirm that you want to reset the switch.
Console#reload
System will be restarted, continue <y/n>? y
4-30
Note: When restarting the system, it will always run the Power-On
Self-Test.
Setting the System Clock
Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) allows the switch to set its internal
clock based on periodic updates from a time server (SNTP or NTP).
Maintaining an accurate time on the switch enables the system log to
record meaningful dates and times for event entries. You can also manually
set the clock using the CLI. (See “calendar set” on page 4-77.) If the clock
is not set, the switch will only record the time from the factory default set
at the last bootup.
When the SNTP client is enabled, the switch periodically sends a request
for a time update to a configured time server. You can configure up to
three time server IP addresses. The switch will attempt to poll each server
in the configured sequence.
Configuring SNTP
You can configure the switch to send time synchronization requests to
time servers.
Command Attributes
3-42
•
SNTP Client – Configures the switch to operate as an SNTP client.
This requires at least one time server to be specified in the SNTP
Server field. (Default: Disabled)
•
SNTP Poll Interval – Sets the interval between sending requests for
a time update from a time server.
(Range: 16-16284 seconds; Default: 16)
BASIC CONFIGURATION
•
SNTP Server – Sets the IP address for up to three time servers. The
switch attempts to update the time from the first server, if this fails it
attempts an update from the next server in the sequence.
Web – Select SNTP, Configuration. Modify any of the required
parameters, and click Apply.
Figure 3-20 SNTP Configuration
CLI – This example configures the switch to operate as an SNTP unicast
client and then displays the current time and settings.
Console(config)#sntp server 10.1.0.19 137.82.140.80 128.250.36.2
Console(config)#sntp poll 60
Console(config)#sntp client
Console(config)#exit
Console#show sntp
Current time: Jan 6 14:56:05 2004
Poll interval: 60
Current mode: unicast
SNTP status : Enabled
SNTP server 10.1.0.19 137.82.140.80 128.250.36.2
Current server: 128.250.36.2
Console#
4-74
4-75
4-73
3-43
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
Setting the Time Zone
SNTP uses Coordinated Universal Time (or UTC, formerly Greenwich
Mean Time, or GMT) based on the time at the Earth’s prime meridian,
zero degrees longitude. To display a time corresponding to your local time,
you must indicate the number of hours and minutes your time zone is east
(before) or west (after) of UTC.
Command Attributes
•
Current Time – Displays the current time.
•
Name – Assigns a name to the time zone. (Range: 1-29 characters)
•
Hours (0-12) – The number of hours before/after UTC.
•
Minutes (0-59) – The number of minutes before/after UTC.
•
Direction – Configures the time zone to be before (east) or after
(west) UTC.
Web – Select SNTP, Clock Time Zone. Set the offset for your time zone
relative to the UTC, and click Apply.
Figure 3-21 Setting the System Clock
CLI - This example shows how to set the time zone for the system clock.
Console(config)#clock timezone Dhaka hours 6 minute 0 after-UTC
Console(config)#
3-44
4-76
SIMPLE NETWORK MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL
Simple Network Management Protocol
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a communication
protocol designed specifically for managing devices on a network.
Equipment commonly managed with SNMP includes switches, routers
and host computers. SNMP is typically used to configure these devices for
proper operation in a network environment, as well as to monitor them to
evaluate performance or detect potential problems.
The switch includes an onboard SNMP agent that continuously monitors
the status of its hardware, as well as the traffic passing through its ports. A
network management station can access this information using software
such as SMC EliteView. Access rights to the onboard agent are controlled
by community strings. To communicate with the switch, the management
station must first submit a valid community string for authentication. The
options for configuring community strings, trap functions, and restricting
access to clients with specified IP addresses are described in the following
sections.
Setting Community Access Strings
You may configure up to five community strings authorized for
management access. All community strings used for IP Trap Managers
should be listed in this table. For security reasons, you should consider
removing the default strings.
Command Attributes
•
SNMP Community Capability – Indicates that the switch supports
up to five community strings.
•
Community String – A community string that acts like a password
and permits access to the SNMP protocol.
Default strings: “public” (read-only), “private” (read/write)
Range: 1-32 characters, case sensitive
3-45
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
•
Access Mode
- Read-Only – Specifies read-only access. Authorized management
stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects.
- Read/Write – Specifies read-write access. Authorized management
stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects.
Web – Click SNMP, Configuration. Add new community strings as
required, select the access rights from the Access Mode drop-down list,
then click Add.
Figure 3-22 Configuring SNMP Community Strings
CLI – The following example adds the string “spiderman” with read/write
access.
Console(config)#snmp-server community spiderman rw
Console(config)#
4-137
Specifying Trap Managers and Trap Types
Traps indicating status changes are issued by the switch to specified trap
managers. You must specify trap managers so that key events are reported
by this switch to your management station (using network management
platforms such as SMC EliteView). You can specify up to five
management stations that will receive authentication failure messages and
other trap messages from the switch.
3-46
SIMPLE NETWORK MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL
Command Attributes
•
Trap Manager Capability – This switch supports up to five trap
managers.
•
Current – Displays a list of the trap managers currently configured.
•
Trap Manager IP Address – IP address of the host (the targeted
recipient).
•
Trap Manager Community String – Community string sent with the
notification operation. (Range: 1-32 characters, case sensitive)
•
Trap Version – Specifies whether to send notifications as SNMP v1
or v2c traps. (The default is version 1.)
•
Enable Authentication Traps – Issues a trap message whenever an
invalid community string is submitted during the SNMP access
authentication process. (Default: Enabled.)
•
Enable Link-up and Link-down Traps – Issues a trap message
whenever a port link is established or broken. (Default: Enabled)
Web – Click SNMP, Configuration. Fill in the IP address and community
string for each trap manager that will receive trap messages, and then click
Add. Select the trap types required using the check boxes for
Authentication and Link-up/down traps, and then click Apply.
Figure 3-23 Configuring IP Trap Managers
3-47
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
CLI – This example adds a trap manager and enables both authentication
and link-up, link-down traps.
Console(config)#snmp-server host 192.168.1.19 private
version 2c
Console(config)#snmp-server enable traps authentication
4-139
4-141
User Authentication
You can restrict management access to this switch using the following
options:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
User Accounts – Manually configure access rights on the switch for
specified users.
Authentication Settings – Use remote authentication to configure
access rights.
HTTPS Settings – Provide a secure web connection.
SSH Settings – Provide a secure shell (for secure Telnet access).
Port Security – Configure secure addresses for individual ports.
802.1X – Use IEEE 802.1X port authentication to control access to
specific ports.
IP Filter – Filters management access to the web, SNMP or Telnet
interface.
Configuring User Accounts
The guest only has read access for most configuration parameters.
However, the administrator has write access for all parameters governing
the onboard agent. You should therefore assign a new administrator
password as soon as possible, and store it in a safe place.
The default guest name is “guest” with the password “guest.” The default
administrator name is “admin” with the password “admin.”
3-48
USER AUTHENTICATION
Command Attributes
•
•
Account List – Displays the current list of user accounts and
associated access levels. (Defaults: admin, and guest)
New Account – Displays configuration settings for a new account.
•
- User Name – The name of the user.
(Maximum length: 8 characters; maximum number of users: 16)
- Access Level – Specifies the user level.
(Options: Normal and Privileged)
- Password – Specifies the user password.
(Range: 0-8 characters plain text, case sensitive)
Change Password – Sets a new password for the specified user name.
•
Add/Remove – Adds or removes an account from the list.
Web – Click Security, User Accounts. To configure a new user account,
specify a user name, select the user’s access level, then enter a password
and confirm it. Click Add to save the new user account and add it to the
Account List. To change the password for a specific user, enter the user
name and new password, confirm the password by entering it again, then
click Apply.
Figure 3-24 Access Levels
3-49
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
CLI – Assign a user name to access-level 15 (i.e., administrator), then
specify the password.
Console(config)#username bob access-level 15
Console(config)#username bob password 0 smith
Console(config)#
4-35
Configuring Local/Remote Logon Authentication
Use the Authentication Settings menu to restrict management access based
on specified user names and passwords. You can manually configure access
rights on the switch, or you can use a remote access authentication server
based on RADIUS or TACACS+ protocols.
Remote
Authentication Dial-in
User Service
console
Web
(RADIUS) and
Telnet
Terminal Access
Controller Access
1. Client attempts management access.
2. Switch contacts authentication server.
Control System Plus
3. Authentication server challenges client.
RADIUS/
4. Client responds with proper password or key.
TACACS+
(TACACS+) are logon
5. Authentication server approves access.
server
6. Switch grants management access.
authentication
protocols that use
software running on a central server to control access to RADIUS-aware
or TACACS-aware devices on the network. An authentication server
contains a database of multiple user name/password pairs with associated
privilege levels for each user that requires management access to the
switch.
RADIUS uses UDP while TACACS+ uses TCP. UDP only offers best
effort delivery, while TCP offers a connection-oriented transport. Also,
note that RADIUS encrypts only the password in the access-request
packet from the client to the server, while TACACS+ encrypts the entire
body of the packet.
3-50
USER AUTHENTICATION
Command Usage
•
By default, management access is always checked against the
authentication database stored on the local switch. If a remote
authentication server is used, you must specify the authentication
sequence and the corresponding parameters for the remote
authentication protocol. Local and remote logon authentication
control management access via the console port, web browser, or
Telnet.
•
RADIUS and TACACS+ logon authentication assign a specific
privilege level for each user name/password pair. The user name,
password, and privilege level must be configured on the authentication
server.
•
You can specify up to three authentication methods for any user to
indicate the authentication sequence. For example, if you select (1)
RADIUS, (2) TACACS and (3) Local, the user name and password on
the RADIUS server is verified first. If the RADIUS server is not
available, then authentication is attempted using the TACACS+ server,
and finally the local user name and password is checked.
Command Attributes
•
Authentication – Select the authentication, or authentication
sequence required:
- Local – User authentication is performed only locally by the switch.
- Radius – User authentication is performed using a RADIUS server
only.
- TACACS – User authentication is performed using a TACACS+
server only.
- [authentication sequence] – User authentication is performed by up
to three authentication methods in the indicated sequence.
3-51
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
•
RADIUS Settings
- Global – Provides globally applicable RADIUS settings.
- ServerIndex – Specifies one of five RADIUS servers that may be
configured. The switch attempts authentication using the listed
sequence of servers. The process ends when a server either approves
or denies access to a user.
- Server IP Address – Address of authentication server. (Default:
10.1.0.1)
- Server Port Number – Network (UDP) port of authentication
server used for authentication messages. (Range: 1-65535; Default:
1812)
- Secret Text String – Encryption key used to authenticate logon
access for client. Do not use blank spaces in the string. (Maximum
length: 20 characters)
- Number of Server Transmits – Number of times the switch tries
to authenticate logon access via the authentication server.
(Range: 1-30; Default: 2)
- Timeout for a reply – The number of seconds the switch waits for
a reply from the RADIUS server before it resends the request.
(Range: 1-65535; Default: 5)
•
TACACS Settings
- Server IP Address – Address of the TACACS+ server. (Default:
10.11.12.13)
- Server Port Number – Network (TCP) port of TACACS+ server
used for authentication messages. (Range: 1-65535; Default: 49)
- Secret Text String – Encryption key used to authenticate logon
access for client. Do not use blank spaces in the string. (Maximum
length: 20 characters)
Note: The local switch user database has to be set up by manually
entering user names and passwords using the CLI. (See
“username” on page 4-35.)
3-52
USER AUTHENTICATION
Web – Click Security, Authentication Settings. To configure local or
remote authentication preferences, specify the authentication sequence
(i.e., one to three methods), fill in the parameters for RADIUS or
TACACS+ authentication if selected, and click Apply.
Figure 3-25 Authentication Settings
3-53
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
CLI – Specify all the required parameters to enable logon authentication.
Console(config)#authentication login radius
Console(config)#radius-server port 181
Console(config)#radius-server key green
Console(config)#radius-server retransmit 5
Console(config)#radius-server timeout 10
Console(config)#radius-server 1 host 192.168.1.25
Console(config)#end
Console#show radius-server
4-95
4-99
4-99
4-100
4-100
4-98
4-101
Remote RADIUS server configuration:
Global settings:
Communication key with RADIUS server: *****
Server port number:
181
Retransmit times:
5
Request timeout:
10
Server 1:
Server IP address: 192.168.1.25
Communication key with RADIUS server: *****
Server port number: 1812
Retransmit times: 2
Request timeout: 5
Console#configure
Console(config)#authentication login tacacs
Console(config)#tacacs-server host 10.20.30.40
Console(config)#tacacs-server port 200
Console(config)#tacacs-server key green
Console#show tacacs-server
Server IP address: 10.20.30.40
Communication key with tacacs server: *****
Server port number: 200
Console#
4-95
4-102
4-103
4-103
4-104
Configuring HTTPS
You can configure the switch to enable the Secure Hypertext Transfer
Protocol (HTTPS) over the Secure Socket Layer (SSL), providing secure
access (i.e., an encrypted connection) to the switch’s web interface.
Command Usage
•
3-54
Both the HTTP and HTTPS service can be enabled independently on
the switch. However, you cannot configure both services to use the
same UDP port.
USER AUTHENTICATION
•
If you enable HTTPS, you must indicate this in the URL that you
specify in your browser: https://device[:port_number]
•
When you start HTTPS, the connection is established in this way:
- The client authenticates the server using the server’s digital
certificate.
- The client and server negotiate a set of security protocols to use for
the connection.
- The client and server generate session keys for encrypting and
decrypting data.
•
The client and server establish a secure encrypted connection.
A padlock icon should appear in the status bar for Internet Explorer
5.x or above and Netscape Navigator 6.2 or above.
•
The following web browsers and operating systems currently support
HTTPS:
Table 3-4 HTTPS System Support
•
Web Browser
Operating System
Internet Explorer 5.0 or later
Windows 98,Windows NT (with
service pack 6a), Windows 2000,
Windows XP
Netscape Navigator 6.2 or later
Windows 98,Windows NT (with
service pack 6a), Windows 2000,
Windows XP, Solaris 2.6
To specify a secure-site certificate, see “Replacing the Default
Secure-site Certificate” on page 3-56.
Command Attributes
•
HTTPS Status – Allows you to enable/disable the HTTPS server
feature on the switch. (Default: Enabled)
•
Change HTTPS Port Number – Specifies the UDP port number
used for HTTPS/SSL connection to the switch’s web interface.
(Default: Port 443)
3-55
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
Web – Click Security, HTTPS Settings. Enable HTTPS and specify the
port number, then click Apply.
Figure 3-26 HTTPS Settings
CLI – This example enables the HTTP secure server and modifies the
port number.
Console(config)#ip http secure-server
Console(config)#ip http secure-port 441
Console(config)#
4-42
4-43
Replacing the Default Secure-site Certificate
When you log onto the web interface using HTTPS (for secure access), a
Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) certificate appears for the switch. By default,
the certificate that Netscape and Internet Explorer display will be
associated with a warning that the site is not recognized as a secure site.
This is because the certificate has not been signed by an approved
certification authority. If you want this warning to be replaced by a
message confirming that the connection to the switch is secure, you must
obtain a unique certificate and a private key and password from a
recognized certification authority.
Note: For maximum security, we recommend you obtain a unique Secure
Sockets Layer certificate at the earliest opportunity. This is because
the default certificate for the switch is not unique to the hardware
you have purchased.
3-56
USER AUTHENTICATION
When you have obtained these, place them on your TFTP server, and use
the following command at the switch's command-line interface to replace
the default (unrecognized) certificate with an authorized one:
Console#copy tftp https-certificate
TFTP server ip address: <server ip-address>
Source certificate file name: <certificate file name>
Source private file name: <private key file name>
Private password: <password for private key>
4-87
Note: The switch must be reset for the new certificate to be activated. To
reset the switch, type: Console#reload
Configuring the Secure Shell
The Berkley-standard includes remote access tools originally designed for
Unix systems. Some of these tools have also been implemented for
Microsoft Windows and other environments. These tools, including
commands such as rlogin (remote login), rsh (remote shell), and rcp (remote
copy), are not secure from hostile attacks.
The Secure Shell (SSH) includes server/client applications intended as a
secure replacement for the older Berkley remote access tools. SSH can also
provide remote management access to this switch as a secure replacement
for Telnet. When the client contacts the switch via the SSH protocol, the
switch generates a public-key that the client uses along with a local user
name and password for access authentication. SSH also encrypts all data
transfers passing between the switch and SSH-enabled management
station clients, and ensures that data traveling over the network arrives
unaltered.
Note that you need to install an SSH client on the management station to
access the switch for management via the SSH protocol.
Note: The switch supports both SSH Version 1.5 and 2.0 clients.
3-57
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
Command Usage
The SSH server on this switch supports both password and public key
authentication. If password authentication is specified by the SSH client,
then the password can be authenticated either locally or via a RADIUS or
TACACS+ remote authentication server, as specified on the
Authentication Settings page (page 3-50). If public key authentication is
specified by the client, then you must configure authentication keys on
both the client and the switch as described in the following section. Note
that regardless of whether you use public key or password authentication,
you still have to generate authentication keys on the switch (SSH Host Key
Settings) and enable the SSH server (Authentication Settings).
To use the SSH server, complete these steps:
1. Generate a Host Key Pair – On the SSH Host Key Settings page, create a
host public/private key pair.
2. Provide Host Public Key to Clients – Many SSH client programs
automatically import the host public key during the initial connection
setup with the switch. Otherwise, you need to manually create a known
hosts file on the management station and place the host public key in it.
An entry for a public key in the known hosts file would appear similar
to the following example:
10.1.0.54 1024 35 15684995401867669259333946775054617325313674890836547254
15020245593199868544358361651999923329781766065830956 10825913212890233
76546801726272571413428762941301196195566782 59566410486957427888146206
519417467729848654686157177393901647793559423035774130980227370877945452408397
1752646358058176716709574804776117
3-58
USER AUTHENTICATION
3. Import Client’s Public Key to the Switch – Use the copy tftp public-key
command (page 4-87) to copy a file containing the public key for all the
SSH client’s granted management access to the switch. (Note that these
clients must be configured locally on the switch via the User Accounts
page as described on page 3-48.) The clients are subsequently
authenticated using these keys. The current firmware only accepts
public key files based on standard UNIX format as shown in the
following example for an RSA Version 1 key:
1024 35 1341081685609893921040944920155425347631641921872958921143173880
055536161631051775940838686311092912322268285192543746031009371877211996963178
136627741416898513204911720483033925432410163799759237144901193800609025394840
848271781943722884025331159521348610229029789827213532671316294325328189150453
06393916643 [email protected]
4. Set the Optional Parameters – On the SSH Settings page, configure the
optional parameters, including the authentication timeout, the number
of retries, and the server key size.
5. Enable SSH Service – On the SSH Settings page, enable the SSH server
on the switch.
6. Challenge-Response Authentication – When an SSH client attempts to
contact the switch, the SSH server uses the host key pair to negotiate a
session key and encryption method. Only clients that have a private key
corresponding to the public keys stored on the switch can access. The
following exchanges take place during this process:
a. The client sends its public key to the switch.
b. The switch compares the client's public key to those stored in
memory.
c. If a match is found, the switch uses the public key to encrypt a
random sequence of bytes, and sends this string to the client.
d. The client uses its private key to decrypt the bytes, and sends the
decrypted bytes back to the switch.
3-59
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
e. The switch compares the decrypted bytes to the original bytes it
sent. If the two sets match, this means that the client's private key
corresponds to an authorized public key, and the client is
authenticated.
Notes: 1. To use SSH with only password authentication, the host public
key must still be given to the client, either during initial
connection or manually entered into the known host file.
However, you do not need to configure the client’s keys.
2. The SSH server supports up to four client sessions. The
maximum number of client sessions includes both current
Telnet sessions and SSH sessions.
Generating the Host Key Pair
A host public/private key pair is used to provide secure communications
between an SSH client and the switch. After generating this key pair, you
must provide the host public key to SSH clients and import the client’s
public key to the switch as described in the proceeding section (Command
Usage).
Field Attributes
•
Public-Key of Host-Key – The public key for the host.
- RSA (Version 1): The first field indicates the size of the host key
(e.g., 1024), the second field is the encoded public exponent (e.g.,
65537), and the last string is the encoded modulus.
- DSA (Version 2): The first field indicates that the encryption
method used by SSH is based on the Digital Signature Standard
(DSS). The last string is the encoded modulus.
3-60
USER AUTHENTICATION
•
Host-Key Type – The key type used to generate the host key pair (i.e.,
public and private keys). (Range: RSA (Version 1), DSA (Version 2),
Both; Default: RSA)
The SSH server uses RSA or DSA for key exchange when the client
first establishes a connection with the switch, and then negotiates with
the client to select either DES (56-bit) or 3DES (168-bit) for data
encryption.
•
Save Host-Key from Memory to Flash – Saves the host key from
RAM (i.e., volatile memory to flash memory. Otherwise, the host key
pair is stored to RAM by default. Note that you must select this item
prior to generating the host-key pair.
•
Generate – This button is used to generate the host key pair. Note that
you must first generate the host key pair before you can enable the SSH
server on the SSH Server Settings page.
•
Clear – This button clears the host key from both volatile memory
(RAM) and non-volatile memory (Flash).
3-61
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
Web – Click Security, SSH, Host-Key Settings. Select the host-key type
from the drop-down box, select the option to save the host key from
memory to flash (if required) prior to generating the key, and then click
Generate.
Figure 3-27 SSH Host-Key Settings
3-62
USER AUTHENTICATION
CLI – This example generates a host-key pair using both the RSA and
DSA algorithms, stores the keys to flash memory, and then displays the
host’s public keys.
Console#ip ssh crypto host-key generate
4-49
Console#ip ssh save host-key
4-49
Console#show public-key host
4-49
Host:
RSA:
1024 65537
127250922544926402131336514546131189679055192360076028653006761
8240969094744832010252487896597759216832222558465238779154647980739
6314033869257931051057652122430528078658854857892726029378660892368
4142327591212760325919683697053439336438445223335188287173896894511
729290510813919642025190932104328579045764891
DSA:
ssh-dss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Console#
Configuring the SSH Server
The SSH server includes basic settings for authentication.
Field Attributes
•
SSH Server Status – Allows you to enable/disable the SSH server on
the switch. (Default: Disabled)
•
Version – The Secure Shell version number. Version 2.0 is displayed,
but the switch supports management access via either SSH Version 1.5
or 2.0 clients.
•
SSH Authentication Timeout – Specifies the time interval in
seconds that the SSH server waits for a response from a client during
an authentication attempt. (Range: 1-120 seconds; Default: 120)
3-63
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
•
SSH Authentication Retries – Specifies the number of
authentication attempts that a client is allowed before authentication
fails and the client has to restart the authentication process.
(Range: 1-5 times; Default: 3)
•
SSH Server-Key Size – Specifies the SSH server key size.
(Range: 512-896 bits; Default:768)
- The server key is a private key that is never shared outside the switch.
- The host key is shared with the SSH client, and is fixed at 1024 bits.
Web – Click Security, SSH, Settings. Enable SSH and adjust the
authentication parameters as required, then click Apply. Note that you
must first generate the host key pair on the SSH Host-Key Settings page
before you can enable the SSH server.
Figure 3-28 SSH Server Settings
3-64
USER AUTHENTICATION
CLI – This example enables SSH, sets the authentication parameters, and
displays the current configuration. It shows that the administrator has
made a connection via SHH, and then disables this connection.
Console(config)#ip ssh server
4-49
Console(config)#ip ssh timeout 100
4-50
Console(config)#ip ssh authentication-retries 5
4-51
Console(config)#ip ssh server-key size 512
4-51
Console(config)#end
Console#show ip ssh
4-55
SSH Enabled - version 2.0
Negotiation timeout: 120 secs; Authentication retries: 5
Server key size: 512 bits
Console#show ssh
4-55
Connection Version State
Username Encryption
0
2.0
Session-Started
admin
ctos aes128-cbc-hmac-md5
stoc aes128-cbc-hmac-md5
Console#disconnect 0
4-25
Console#
Configuring Port Security
Port security is a feature that allows you to configure a switch port with
one or more device MAC addresses that are authorized to access the
network through that port.
When port security is enabled on a port, the switch stops learning new
MAC addresses on the specified port when it has reached a configured
maximum number. Only incoming traffic with source addresses already
stored in the dynamic or static address table will be accepted as authorized
to access the network through that port. If a device with an unauthorized
MAC address attempts to use the switch port, the intrusion will be
detected and the switch can automatically take action by disabling the port
and sending a trap message.
To use port security, specify a maximum number of addresses to allow on
the port and then let the switch dynamically learn the <source MAC
address, VLAN> pair for frames received on the port. Note that you can
also manually add secure addresses to the port using the Static Address
Table (page 3-121). When the port has reached the maximum number of
MAC addresses the selected port will stop learning. The MAC addresses
3-65
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
already in the address table will be retained and will not age out. Any other
device that attempts to use the port will be prevented from accessing the
switch.
Command Usage
•
A secure port has the following restrictions:
-
It cannot use port monitoring.
It cannot be a multi-VLAN port.
It cannot be used as a member of a static or dynamic trunk.
It should not be connected to a network interconnection device.
•
The default maximum number of MAC addresses allowed on a secure
port is zero. You must configure a maximum address count from
1 - 1024 for the port to allow access.
•
If a port is disabled (shut down) due to a security violation, it must be
manually re-enabled from the Port/Port Configuration page
(page 3-90).
Command Attributes
•
•
•
Port – Port number.
Name – Descriptive text (page 4-145).
Action – Indicates the action to be taken when a port security violation
is detected:
-
•
•
•
3-66
None: No action should be taken. (This is the default.)
Trap: Send an SNMP trap message.
Shutdown: Disable the port.
Trap and Shutdown: Send an SNMP trap message and disable the
port.
Security Status – Enables or disables port security on the port.
(Default: Disabled)
Max MAC Count – The maximum number of MAC addresses that
can be learned on a port. (Range: 0 - 1024)
Trunk – Trunk number if port is a member (page 3-94 and 3-96).
USER AUTHENTICATION
Web – Click Security, Port Security. Set the action to take when an invalid
address is detected on a port, mark the checkbox in the Status column to
enable security for a port, set the maximum number of MAC addresses
allowed on a port, and click Apply.
Figure 3-29 Configuring Port Security
CLI – This example selects the target port, sets the port security action to
send a trap and disable the port and sets the maximum MAC addresses
allowed on the port, and then enables port security for the port.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5
Console(config-if)#port security action trap-and-shutdown
Console(config-if)#port security max-mac-count 20
Console(config-if)#port security
Console(config-if)#
4-105
Configuring 802.1X Port Authentication
Network switches can provide open and easy access to network resources
by simply attaching a client PC. Although this automatic configuration and
access is a desirable feature, it also allows unauthorized personnel to easily
intrude and possibly gain access to sensitive network data.
The IEEE 802.1X (dot1X) standard defines a port-based access control
procedure that prevents unauthorized access to a network by requiring
users to first submit credentials for authentication. Access to all switch
ports in a network can be centrally controlled from a server, which means
that authorized users can use the same credentials for authentication from
any point within the network.
3-67
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
This switch uses
the Extensible
802.1x
Authentication
client
Protocol over LANs
(EAPOL) to
1. Client attempts to access a switch port.
2. Switch sends client an identity request.
exchange
3. Client sends back identity information.
RADIUS
4. Switch forwards this to authentication server.
server
authentication
5. Authentication server challenges client.
6. Client responds with proper credentials.
protocol messages
7. Authentication server approves access.
8. Switch grants client access to this port.
with the client, and a
remote RADIUS authentication server to verify user identity and access
rights. When a client (i.e., Supplicant) connects to a switch port, the switch
(i.e., Authenticator) responds with an EAPOL identity request. The client
provides its identity (such as a user name) in an EAPOL response to the
switch, which it forwards to the RADIUS server. The RADIUS server
verifies the client identity and sends an access challenge back to the client.
The EAP packet from the RADIUS server contains not only the challenge,
but the authentication method to be used. The client can reject the
authentication method and request another, depending on the
configuration of the client software and the RADIUS server. The
authentication method must be MD5. The client responds to the
appropriate method with its credentials, such as a password or certificate.
The RADIUS server verifies the client credentials and responds with an
accept or reject packet. If authentication is successful, the switch allows the
client to access the network. Otherwise, network access is denied and the
port remains blocked.
The operation of 802.1X on the switch requires the following:
3-68
•
The switch must have an IP address assigned.
•
RADIUS authentication must be enabled on the switch and the IP
address of the RADIUS server specified.
•
802.1X must be enabled globally for the switch.
•
Each switch port that will be used must be set to dot1X “Auto” mode.
•
Each client that needs to be authenticated must have dot1X client
software installed and properly configured.
USER AUTHENTICATION
•
The RADIUS server and 802.1X client support EAP. (The switch only
supports EAPOL in order to pass the EAP packets from the server to
the client.)
•
The RADIUS server and client also have to support the same EAP
authentication type – MD5. (Some clients have native support in
Windows, otherwise the dot1x client must support it.)
Displaying 802.1X Global Settings
The 802.1X protocol provides port authentication.
Command Attributes
802.1X System Authentication Control – The global setting for 802.1X.
Web – Click Security, 802.1X, Information.
Figure 3-30 802.1X Global Information
3-69
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
CLI – This example shows the default global setting for 802.1X.
Console#show dot1x
Global 802.1X Parameters
system-auth-control: enable
4-114
802.1X Port Summary
Port Name Status
1/1
disabled
1/2
disabled
.
.
.
802.1X Port Details
Operation Mode
Mode
Single-Host
ForceAuthorized
Single-Host
ForceAuthorized
Authorized
n/a
n/a
802.1X is disabled on port 1/1
802.1X
is disabled on port 1/52
.
.
.
Console#
Configuring 802.1X Global Settings
The 802.1X protocol includes port authentication. The 802.1X protocol
must be enabled globally for the switch system before port settings are
active.
Command Attributes
•
802.1X System Authentication Control – Sets the global setting for
802.1X. (Default: Disabled)
Web – Select Security, 802.1X, Configuration. Enable 802.1X globally for
the switch, and click Apply.
Figure 3-31 802.1X Configuration
CLI – This example enables 802.1X globally for the switch.
Console(config)#dot1x system-auth-control
Console(config)#
3-70
4-108
USER AUTHENTICATION
Configuring Port Settings for 802.1X
When 802.1X is enabled, you need to configure the parameters for the
authentication process that runs between the client and the switch (i.e.,
authenticator), as well as the client identity lookup process that runs
between the switch and authentication server. These parameters are
described in this section.
Command Attributes
•
Port – Port number.
•
Status – Indicates if authentication is enabled or disabled on the port.
(Default: Disabled)
•
Operation Mode – Allows single or multiple hosts (clients) to connect
to an 802.1X-authorized port. (Options: Single-Host, Multi-Host;
Default: Single-Host)
•
Max Count – The maximum number of hosts that can connect to a
port when the Multi-Host operation mode is selected. (Range: 1-1024;
Default: 5)
•
Mode – Sets the authentication mode to one of the following options:
- Auto – Requires a dot1x-aware client to be authorized by the
authentication server. Clients that are not dot1x-aware will be denied
access.
- Force-Authorized – Forces the port to grant access to all clients,
either dot1x-aware or otherwise. (This is the default setting.)
- Force-Unauthorized – Forces the port to deny access to all clients,
either dot1x-aware or otherwise.
•
Re-authen – Sets the client to be re-authenticated after the interval
specified by the Re-authentication Period. Re-authentication can be
used to detect if a new device is plugged into a switch port.
(Default: Disabled)
•
Max-Req – Sets the maximum number of times the switch port will
retransmit an EAP request packet to the client before it times out the
authentication session. (Range: 1-10; Default 2)
3-71
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
•
Quiet Period – Sets the time that a switch port waits after the Max
Request Count has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new
client. (Range: 1-65535 seconds; Default: 60)
•
Re-authen Period – Sets the time period after which a connected
client must be re-authenticated. (Range: 1-65535 seconds;
Default: 3600)
•
Tx Period – Sets the time period during an authentication session that
the switch waits before re-transmitting an EAP packet.
(Range: 1-65535; Default: 30)
•
Authorized –
- Yes – Connected client is authorized.
- No – Connected client is not authorized.
- Blank – Displays nothing when dot1x is disabled on a port.
•
Supplicant – Indicates the MAC address of a connected client.
•
Trunk – Indicates if the port is configured as a trunk port.
Web – Click Security, 802.1X, Port Configuration. Modify the parameters
required, and click Apply.
Figure 3-32 802.1X Port Configuration
3-72
USER AUTHENTICATION
CLI – This example sets the 802.1X parameters on port 2. For a
description of the additional fields displayed in this example, see “show
dot1x” on page 4-114.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/2
Console(config-if)#dot1x port-control auto
Console(config-if)#dot1x re-authentication
Console(config-if)#dot1x max-req 5
Console(config-if)#dot1x timeout quiet-period 30
Console(config-if)#dot1x timeout re-authperiod 1800
Console(config-if)#dot1x timeout tx-period 40
Console(config-if)#end
Console#show dot1x
Global 802.1X Parameters
system-auth-control: enable
802.1X Port Summary
Port Name Status
1/1
disabled
1/2
enabled
.
.
.
1/52
disabled
Operation Mode
Single-Host
Single-Host
Single-Host
4-145
4-109
4-111
4-109
4-112
4-112
4-113
4-114
Mode
Authorized
ForceAuthorized
n/a
auto
yes
ForceAuthorized
n/a
802.1X Port Details
802.1X is disabled on port 1/1
802.1X is enabled on port 1/2
reauth-enabled: Enable
reauth-period: 1800
quiet-period:
30
tx-period:
40
supplicant-timeout:
30
server-timeout: 10
reauth-max:
2
max-req:
5
Status
Authorized
Operation mode
Single-Host
Max count
5
Port-control
Auto
Supplicant
00-00-e8-49-5e-dc
Current Identifier 3
Authenticator State Machine
State
Authenticated
Reauth Count
0
Backend State Machine
State
Idle
Request Count
0
Identifier(Server) 2
Reauthentication State Machine
State
Initialize
.
.
.
802.1X is disabled on port 1/52
Console#
3-73
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
Displaying 802.1X Statistics
This switch can display statistics for dot1x protocol exchanges for any
port.
Table 3-5 802.1X Statistics
3-74
Parameter
Description
Rx EAPOL Start
The number of EAPOL Start frames that have been
received by this Authenticator.
Rx EAPOL Logoff
The number of EAPOL Logoff frames that have been
received by this Authenticator.
Rx EAPOL Invalid
The number of EAPOL frames that have been received
by this Authenticator in which the frame type is not
recognized.
Rx EAPOL Total
The number of valid EAPOL frames of any type that
have been received by this Authenticator.
Rx EAP Resp/Id
The number of EAP Resp/Id frames that have been
received by this Authenticator.
Rx EAP Resp/Oth
The number of valid EAP Response frames (other than
Resp/Id frames) that have been received by this
Authenticator.
Rx EAP LenError
The number of EAPOL frames that have been received
by this Authenticator in which the Packet Body Length
field is invalid.
Rx Last EAPOLVer
The protocol version number carried in the most
recently received EAPOL frame.
Rx Last EAPOLSrc
The source MAC address carried in the most recently
received EAPOL frame.
Tx EAPOL Total
The number of EAPOL frames of any type that have
been transmitted by this Authenticator.
Tx EAP Req/Id
The number of EAP Req/Id frames that have been
transmitted by this Authenticator.
Tx EAP Req/Oth
The number of EAP Request frames (other than Rq/Id
frames) that have been transmitted by this
Authenticator.
USER AUTHENTICATION
Web – Select Security, 802.1X, Statistics. Select the required port and then
click Query. Click Refresh to update the statistics.
Figure 3-33 Displaying 802.1X Port Statistics
CLI – This example displays the 802.1X statistics for port 4.
Console#show dot1x statistics interface ethernet 1/4
Eth 1/4
Rx: EAPOL
Start
2
Last
EAPOLVer
1
Tx: EAPOL
Total
2017
Console#
EAPOL
Logoff
0
EAPOL
Invalid
0
EAPOL
Total
1007
EAP
Resp/Id
672
4-114
EAP
EAP
Resp/Oth LenError
0
0
Last
EAPOLSrc
00-00-E8-98-73-21
EAP
Req/Id
1005
EAP
Req/Oth
0
3-75
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
Filtering Addresses for Management Access
You create a list of up to 16 IP addresses or IP address groups that are
allowed management access to the switch through the web interface,
SNMP, or Telnet.
Command Usage
•
•
•
•
•
•
The management interfaces are open to all IP addresses by default.
Once you add an entry to a filter list, access to that interface is
restricted to the specified addresses.
If anyone tries to access a management interface on the switch from an
invalid address, the switch will reject the connection, enter an event
message in the system log, and send a trap message to the trap
manager.
IP address can be configured for SNMP, web and Telnet access
respectively. Each of these groups can include up to five different sets
of addresses, either individual addresses or address ranges.
When entering addresses for the same group (i.e., SNMP, web or
Telnet), the switch will not accept overlapping address ranges. When
entering addresses for different groups, the switch will accept
overlapping address ranges.
You cannot delete an individual address from a specified range. You
must delete the entire range, and reenter the addresses.
You can delete an address range just by specifying the start address, or
by specifying both the start address and end address.
Command Attributes
3-76
•
Web IP Filter – Configures IP address(es) for the web group.
•
SNMP IP Filter – Configures IP address(es) for the SNMP group.
•
Telnet IP Filter – Configures IP address(es) for the Telnet group.
•
IP Filter List – IP address which are allowed management access to
this interface.
•
Start IP Address – A single IP address, or the starting address of a
range.
USER AUTHENTICATION
•
End IP Address – The end address of a range.
•
Add/Remove Filtering Entry – Adds/removes an IP address from
the list.
Web – Click Security, IP Filter. Enter the IP addresses or range of
addresses that are allowed management access to an interface, and click
Add IP Filtering Entry to update the filter list.
Figure 3-34 Creating a Web IP Filter List
3-77
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
CLI – This example allows SNMP access for a specific client.
Console(config)#management snmp-client 10.1.2.3
Console(config)#end
Console#show management all-client
Management IP Filter
HTTP-Client:
Start IP address End IP address
----------------------------------------------1. 10.1.2.1
10.1.2.254
4-38
SNMP-Client:
Start IP address End IP address
----------------------------------------------1. 10.1.2.3
10.1.2.3
TELNET-Client:
Start IP address End IP address
----------------------------------------------Console#
Access Control Lists
Access Control Lists (ACL) provide packet filtering for IP frames (based
on address, protocol, Layer 4 protocol port number or TCP control code)
or any frames (based on MAC address or Ethernet type). To filter
incoming packets, first create an access list, add the required rules and then
bind the list to a specific port.
Configuring Access Control Lists
An ACL is a sequential list of permit or deny conditions that apply to IP
addresses, MAC addresses, or other more specific criteria. This switch tests
ingress or egress packets against the conditions in an ACL one by one. A
packet will be accepted as soon as it matches a permit rule, or dropped as
soon as it matches a deny rule. If no rules match for a list of all permit
rules, the packet is dropped; and if no rules match for a list of all deny
rules, the packet is accepted.
3-78
ACCESS CONTROL LISTS
Command Usage
The following restrictions apply to ACLs:
• Each ACL can have up to 32 rules.
• The maximum number of ACLs is 88.
• However, due to resource restrictions, the average number of rules
bound to the ports should not exceed 20.
• This switch supports ACLs for ingress filtering only. However, you can
only bind one IP ACL to any port and one MAC ACL globally for
ingress filtering. In other words, only two ACLs can be bound to an
interface - Ingress IP ACL and Ingress MAC ACL.
The order in which active ACLs are checked is as follows:
1. User-defined rules in the Ingress MAC ACL for ingress ports.
2. User-defined rules in the Ingress IP ACL for ingress ports.
3. Explicit default rule (permit any any) in the ingress IP ACL for ingress
ports.
4. Explicit default rule (permit any any) in the ingress MAC ACL for
ingress ports.
5. If no explicit rule is matched, the implicit default is permit all.
Setting the ACL Name and Type
Use the ACL Configuration page to designate the name and type of an
ACL.
Command Attributes
•
Name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters)
•
Type – There are three filtering modes:
-
Standard: IP ACL mode that filters packets based on the source
IP address.
-
Extended: IP ACL mode that filters packets based on source or
destination IP address, as well as protocol type and protocol port
number. If the “TCP” protocol is specified, then you can also
filter packets based on the TCP control code.
3-79
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
-
MAC: MAC ACL mode that filters packets based on the source
or destination MAC address and the Ethernet frame type (RFC
1060).
Web – Click Security, ACL, Configuration. Enter an ACL name in the
Name field, select the list type (IP Standard, IP Extended, or MAC), and
click Add to open the configuration page for the new list.
Figure 3-35 Selecting ACL Type
CLI – This example creates a standard IP ACL named david.
Console(config)#access-list ip standard david
Console(config-std-acl)#
4-119
Configuring a Standard IP ACL
Command Attributes
3-80
•
Action – An ACL can contain any combination of permit or deny
rules.
•
Address Type – Specifies the source IP address. Use “Any” to include
all possible addresses, “Host” to specify a specific host address in the
Address field, or “IP” to specify a range of addresses with the Address
and SubMask fields. (Options: Any, Host, IP; Default: Any)
•
IP Address – Source IP address.
ACCESS CONTROL LISTS
•
Subnet Mask – A subnet mask containing four integers from 0 to 255,
each separated by a period. The mask uses 1 bits to indicate “match”
and 0 bits to indicate “ignore.” The mask is bitwise ANDed with the
specified source IP address, and compared with the address for each
IP packet entering the port(s) to which this ACL has been assigned.
Web – Specify the action (i.e., Permit or Deny). Select the address type
(Any, Host, or IP). If you select “Host,” enter a specific address. If you
select “IP,” enter a subnet address and the mask for an address range. Then
click Add.
Figure 3-36 ACL Configuration - Standard IP
CLI – This example configures one permit rule for the specific address
10.1.1.21 and another rule for the address range 168.92.16.x – 168.92.31.x
using a bitmask.
Console(config-std-acl)#permit host 10.1.1.21
Console(config-std-acl)#permit 168.92.16.0 255.255.240.0
Console(config-std-acl)#
4-120
3-81
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
Configuring an Extended IP ACL
Command Attributes
•
Action – An ACL can contain any combination of permit or deny
rules.
•
Source/Destination Address Type – Specifies the source or
destination IP address. Use “Any” to include all possible addresses,
“Host” to specify a specific host address in the Address field, or “IP”
to specify a range of addresses with the Address and SubMask fields.
(Options: Any, Host, IP; Default: Any)
•
Source/Destination Address – Source or destination IP address.
•
Source/Destination Subnet Mask – Subnet mask for source or
destination address. (See the description for Subnet Mask on
page 3-80.)
•
Service Type – Packet priority settings based on the following criteria:
- Precedence – IP precedence level. (Range: 0-7)
- TOS – Type of Service level. (Range: 0-15)
- DSCP – DSCP priority level. (Range: 0-63)
•
Protocol – Specifies the protocol type to match as TCP, UDP or
Others, where others indicates a specific protocol number (0-255).
(Options: TCP, UDP, Others; Default: TCP)
•
Source/Destination Port – Source/destination port number for the
specified protocol type. (Range: 0-65535)
•
Control Code – Decimal number (representing a bit string) that
specifies flag bits in byte 14 of the TCP header. (Range: 0-63)
•
Control Code Bitmask – Decimal number representing the code bits
to match. The control bitmask is a decimal number (for an equivalent
binary bit mask) that is applied to the control code. Enter a decimal
number, where the equivalent binary bit “1” means to match a bit and
“0” means to ignore a bit. The following bits may be specified:
- 1 (fin) – Finish
- 2 (syn) – Synchronize
3-82
ACCESS CONTROL LISTS
- 4 (rst) – Reset
- 8 (psh) – Push
- 16 (ack) – Acknowledgement
- 32 (urg) – Urgent pointer
For example, use the code value and mask below to catch packets with
the following flags set:
- SYN flag valid, use control-code 2, control bitmask 2
- Both SYN and ACK valid, use control-code 18, control bitmask 18
- SYN valid and ACK invalid, use control-code 2, control bitmask 18
Web – Specify the action (i.e., Permit or Deny). Specify the source and/or
destination addresses. Select the address type (Any, Host, or IP). If you
select “Host,” enter a specific address. If you select “IP,” enter a subnet
address and the mask for an address range. Set any other required criteria,
such as service type, protocol type, or TCP control code. Then click Add.
Figure 3-37 ACL Configuration - Extended IP
3-83
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
CLI – This example adds two rules:
1. Accept any incoming packets if the source address is in subnet 10.7.1.x.
For example, if the rule is matched; i.e., the rule (10.7.1.0 &
255.255.255.0) equals the masked address (10.7.1.2 & 255.255.255.0),
the packet passes through.
2. Allow TCP packets from class C addresses 192.168.1.0 to any
destination address when set for destination TCP port 80 (i.e., HTTP).
3. Permit all TCP packets from class C addresses 192.168.1.0 with the
TCP control code set to “SYN.”
Console(config-ext-acl)#permit 10.7.1.1 255.255.255.0 any
4-122
Console(config-ext-acl)#permit tcp 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 any
destination-port 80
Console(config-ext-acl)#permit tcp 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 any
control-flag 2 2
Console(config-std-acl)#
Configuring a MAC ACL
Command Attributes
3-84
•
Action – An ACL can contain any combination of permit or deny
rules.
•
Source/Destination Address Type – Use “Any” to include all
possible addresses, “Host” to indicate a specific MAC address, or
“MAC” to specify an address range with the Address and Bitmask
fields. (Options: Any, Host, MAC; Default: Any)
•
Source/Destination MAC Address – Source or destination MAC
address.
•
Source/Destination Bitmask – Hexidecimal mask for source or
destination MAC address.
•
VID – VLAN ID. (Range: 1-4094)
ACCESS CONTROL LISTS
•
Ethernet Type – This option can only be used to filter Ethernet II
formatted packets. (Range: 0-65535)
A detailed listing of Ethernet protocol types can be found in RFC
1060. A few of the more common types include 0800 (IP), 0806 (ARP),
8137 (IPX).
Web – Specify the action (i.e., Permit or Deny). Specify the source and/or
destination addresses. Select the address type (Any, Host, or MAC). If you
select “Host,” enter a specific address (e.g., 11-22-33-44-55-66). If you
select “MAC,” enter a base address and a hexidecimal bitmask for an
address range. Set any other required criteria, such as VID or Ethernet
type. Then click Add.
Figure 3-38 ACL Configuration - MAC
CLI – This rule permits packets from any source MAC address to the
destination address 00-e0-29-94-34-de where the Ethernet type is 0800.
Console(config-mac-acl)#permit any host 00-e0-29-94-34-de
ethertype 0800
Console(config-mac-acl)#
4-130
3-85
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
Binding a Port to an Access Control List
After configuring Access Control Lists (ACL), you should bind them to
the ports that need to filter traffic. You can assign one IP access list to any
port, but you can only assign one MAC access list to all the ports on the
switch.
Command Usage
This switch only supports ACLs for ingress filtering. You can only bind
one IP ACL to any port, and one MAC ACL globally, for ingress filtering.
Command Attributes
•
Port – Fixed port or SFP module. (Range: 1-52)
•
IP – Specifies the IP Access List to enable for a port.
•
MAC – Specifies the MAC Access List to enable globally.
•
IN – ACL for ingress packets.
•
ACL Name – Name of the ACL.
Web – Click Security, ACL, Port Binding. Mark the Enabled field for the
port you want to bind to an ACL, select the required ACL from the
drop-down list, then click Apply.
Figure 3-39 Binding a Port to an ACL
3-86
PORT CONFIGURATION
CLI – This example assigns an IP and MAC access list to port 1, and an IP
access list to port 3.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#ip access-group david in
Console(config-if)#mac access-group jerry in
Console(config-if)#exit
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/3
Console(config-if)#ip access-group david in
Console(config-if)#
4-145
4-125
4-132
Port Configuration
Displaying Connection Status
You can use the Port Information or Trunk Information pages to display
the current connection status, including link state, speed/duplex mode,
flow control, and auto-negotiation.
Field Attributes (Web)
•
Name – Interface label.
•
Type – Indicates the port type. (100BASE-TX, 1000BASE-T, or SFP)
•
Admin Status – Shows if the interface is enabled or disabled.
•
Oper Status – Indicates if the link is Up or Down.
•
Speed Duplex Status – Shows the current speed and duplex mode.
(Auto, or fixed choice)
•
Flow Control Status – Indicates the type of flow control currently in
use. (IEEE 802.3x, Back-Pressure or None)
•
Autonegotiation – Shows if auto-negotiation is enabled or disabled.
•
Trunk Member5 – Shows if port is a trunk member.
•
Creation6 – Shows if a trunk is manually configured or dynamically set
via LACP.
5. Port Information only.
6. Trunk Information only.
3-87
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
Web – Click Port, Port Information or Trunk Information.
Figure 3-40 Displaying Port/Trunk Information
Field Attributes (CLI)
Basic Information:
•
Port type – Indicates the port type. (100BASE-TX, 1000BASE-T, or
SFP)
•
MAC address – The physical layer address for this port. (To access
this item on the web, see “Setting the Switch’s IP Address” on
page 3-17.)
Configuration:
3-88
•
Name – Interface label.
•
Port admin – Shows if the interface is enabled or disabled (i.e., up or
down).
•
Speed-duplex – Shows the current speed and duplex mode. (Auto, or
fixed choice)
PORT CONFIGURATION
•
Capabilities – Specifies the capabilities to be advertised for a port
during auto-negotiation. (To access this item on the web, see
“Configuring Interface Connections” on page 3-48.) The following
capabilities are supported.
- 10half - Supports 10 Mbps half-duplex operation
- 10full - Supports 10 Mbps full-duplex operation
- 100half - Supports 100 Mbps half-duplex operation
- 100full - Supports 100 Mbps full-duplex operation
- 1000full - Supports 1000 Mbps full-duplex operation
- Sym - Transmits and receives pause frames for flow control
- FC - Supports flow control
•
Broadcast storm – Shows if broadcast storm control is enabled or
disabled.
•
Broadcast storm limit – Shows the broadcast storm threshold.
(64-95232000 octets per second)
•
Flow control – Shows if flow control is enabled or disabled.
•
LACP – Shows if LACP is enabled or disabled.
•
Port Security – Shows if port security is enabled or disabled.
•
Max MAC count – Shows the maximum number of MAC address
that can be learned by a port. (0 - 1024 addresses)
•
Port security action – Shows the response to take when a security
violation is detected. (shutdown, trap, trap-and-shutdown, or none)
Current Status:
•
Link Status – Indicates if the link is up or down.
•
Port Operation Status – Provides detailed information on port state.
(Displayed only when the link is up.)
•
Operation speed-duplex – Shows the current speed and duplex
mode.
•
Flow control type – Indicates the type of flow control currently in use.
(IEEE 802.3x, Back-Pressure or none)
3-89
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
CLI – This example shows the connection status for Port 5.
Console#show interfaces status ethernet 1/5
Information of Eth 1/5
Basic information:
Port type:
100TX
Mac address:
00-30-f1-47-58-46
Configuration:
Name:
Port admin:
Up
Speed-duplex:
Auto
Capabilities:
10half, 10full, 100half, 100full
Broadcast storm:
Enabled
Broadcast storm limit: 32000 octets/second
Flow control:
Disabled
Lacp:
Disabled
Port security:
Disabled
Max MAC count:
0
Port security action:
None
Current status:
Link status:
Down
Operation speed-duplex: 100full
Flow control type:
None
Console#
4-153
Configuring Interface Connections
You can use the Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration page to
enable/disable an interface, set auto-negotiation and the interface
capabilities to advertise, or manually fix the speed, duplex mode, and flow
control.
Command Attributes
3-90
•
Name – Allows you to label an interface. (Range: 1-64 characters)
•
Admin – Allows you to manually disable an interface. You can disable
an interface due to abnormal behavior (e.g., excessive collisions), and
then reenable it after the problem has been resolved. You may also
disable an interface for security reasons.
•
Speed/Duplex – Allows you to manually set the port speed and
duplex mode. (i.e., with auto-negotiation disabled)
•
Flow Control – Allows automatic or manual selection of flow control.
PORT CONFIGURATION
•
Autonegotiation (Port Capabilities) – Allows auto-negotiation to be
enabled/disabled. When auto-negotiation is enabled, you need to
specify the capabilities to be advertised. When auto-negotiation is
disabled, you can force the settings for speed, mode, and flow
control.The following capabilities are supported.
- 10half - Supports 10 Mbps half-duplex operation
- 10full - Supports 10 Mbps full-duplex operation
- 100half - Supports 100 Mbps half-duplex operation
- 100full - Supports 100 Mbps full-duplex operation
- 1000full - Supports 1000 Mbps full-duplex operation
- Sym (Gigabit only) - Check this item to transmit and receive pause
frames, or clear it to auto-negotiate the sender and receiver for
asymmetric pause frames. (The current switch chip only supports symmetric
pause frames.)
- FC - Supports flow control
Flow control can eliminate frame loss by “blocking” traffic from end
stations or segments connected directly to the switch when its
buffers fill. When enabled, back pressure is used for half-duplex
operation and IEEE 802.3x for full-duplex operation. (Avoid using
flow control on a port connected to a hub unless it is actually
required to solve a problem. Otherwise back pressure jamming
signals may degrade overall performance for the segment attached to
the hub.)
(Default: Autonegotiation enabled; Advertised capabilities for
100BASE-TX – 10half, 10full, 100half, 100full; 1000BASE-T –
10half, 10full, 100half, 100full, 1000full; 1000BASE-SX/LX/LH –
1000full)
•
Trunk – Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk. To create trunks
and select port members, see “Creating Trunk Groups” on page 3-92.
Note: Auto-negotiation must be disabled before you can configure or
force the interface to use the Speed/Duplex Mode or Flow
Control options.
3-91
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
Web – Click Port, Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration. Modify the
required interface settings, and click Apply.
Figure 3-41 Port/Trunk Configuration
CLI – Select the interface, and then enter the required settings.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/13
Console(config-if)#description RD SW#13
Console(config-if)#shutdown
.
Console(config-if)#no shutdown
Console(config-if)#no negotiation
Console(config-if)#speed-duplex 100half
Console(config-if)#flowcontrol
.
Console(config-if)#negotiation
Console(config-if)#capabilities 100half
Console(config-if)#capabilities 100full
Console(config-if)#capabilities flowcontrol
4-145
4-145
4-150
4-147
4-146
4-149
4-148
Creating Trunk Groups
You can create multiple links between devices that work as one virtual,
aggregate link. A port trunk offers a dramatic increase in bandwidth for
network segments where bottlenecks exist, as well as providing a
fault-tolerant link between two devices. You can create up to four trunks at
a time.
The switch supports both static trunking and dynamic Link Aggregation
Control Protocol (LACP). Static trunks have to be manually configured at
both ends of the link, and the switches must comply with the Cisco
EtherChannel standard. On the other hand, LACP configured ports can
3-92
PORT CONFIGURATION
automatically negotiate a trunked link with LACP-configured ports on
another device. You can configure any number of ports on the switch as
LACP, as long as they are not already configured as part of a static trunk. If
ports on another device are also configured as LACP, the switch and the
other device will negotiate a trunk link between them. If an LACP trunk
consists of more than four ports, all other ports will be placed in a standby
mode. Should one link in the trunk fail, one of the standby ports will
automatically be activated to replace it.
Command Usage
Besides balancing the load across each port in the trunk, the other ports
provide redundancy by taking over the load if a port in the trunk fails.
However, before making any physical connections between devices, use
the web interface or CLI to specify the trunk on the devices at both ends.
When using a port trunk, take note of the following points:
•
Finish configuring port trunks before you connect the corresponding
network cables between switches to avoid creating a loop.
•
You can create up to four trunks on the switch, with up to four ports
per trunk.
•
The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as trunk
ports.
•
When configuring static trunks on switches of different types, they
must be compatible with the Cisco EtherChannel standard.
•
The ports at both ends of a trunk must be configured in an identical
manner, including communication mode (i.e., speed, duplex mode and
flow control), VLAN assignments, and CoS settings.
•
Any of the Gigabit ports on the front panel can be trunked together,
including ports of different media types.
•
All the ports in a trunk have to be treated as a whole when moved
from/to, added or deleted from a VLAN.
•
STP, VLAN, and IGMP settings can only be made for the entire trunk.
3-93
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
Statically Configuring a Trunk
Command Usage
•
When configuring static trunks, you
may not be able to link switches of
different types, depending on the
manufacturer’s implementation.
However, note that the static trunks
on this switch are Cisco
EtherChannel compatible.
statically
configured
}
•
active
links
To avoid creating a loop in the
network, be sure you add a static
trunk via the configuration interface
before connecting the ports, and also disconnect the ports before
removing a static trunk via the configuration interface.
Command Attributes
•
Member List (Current) – Shows configured trunks (Trunk ID, Unit,
Port).
•
New – Includes entry fields for creating new trunks.
- Trunk – Trunk identifier. (Range: 1-4)
- Port – Port identifier. (Range: 1-52)
3-94
PORT CONFIGURATION
Web – Click Port, Trunk Membership. Enter a trunk ID of 1-4 in the
Trunk field, select any of the switch ports from the scroll-down port list,
and click Add. After you have completed adding ports to the member list,
click Apply.
Figure 3-42 Static Trunk Configuration
3-95
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
CLI – This example creates trunk 2 with ports 1 and 2. Just connect these
ports to two static trunk ports on another switch to form a trunk.
Console(config)#interface port-channel 2
Console(config-if)#exit
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#channel-group 2
Console(config-if)#exit
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/2
Console(config-if)#channel-group 2
Console(config-if)#end
Console#show interfaces status port-channel 2
Information of Trunk 2
Basic information:
Port type:
100TX
Mac address:
00-00-E8-AA-AA-01
Configuration:
Name:
Port admin:
Up
Speed-duplex:
Auto
Capabilities:
10half, 10full, 100half, 100full
Flow control:
Disabled
Port security:
Disabled
Max MAC count:
0
Current status:
Created by:
User
Link status:
Up
Port operation status: Up
Operation speed-duplex: 100full
Flow control type:
None
Member Ports: Eth1/1, Eth1/2,
Console#
4-145
4-145
4-166
4-153
Enabling LACP on Selected Ports
Command Usage
•
3-96
If the target switch has also enabled
LACP on the connected ports, the
trunk will be activated automatically.
dynamically
enabled
}
To avoid creating a loop in the
network, be sure you enable LACP
before connecting the ports, and also
disconnect the ports before disabling
LACP.
active
links
backup
link
}
•
configured
members
PORT CONFIGURATION
•
A trunk formed with another switch using LACP will automatically be
assigned the next available trunk ID.
•
If more than four ports attached to the same target switch have LACP
enabled, the additional ports will be placed in standby mode, and will
only be enabled if one of the active links fails.
•
All ports on both ends of an LACP trunk must be configured for full
duplex, either by forced mode or auto-negotiation.
•
Trunks dynamically established through LACP will also be shown in
the Member List on the Trunk Membership menu (see page 3-95).
Command Attributes
•
Member List (Current) – Shows configured trunks (Unit, Port).
•
New – Includes entry fields for creating new trunks.
- Port – Port identifier. (Range: 1-52)
Web – Click Port, LACP, Configuration. Select any of the switch ports
from the scroll-down port list and click Add. After you have completed
adding ports to the member list, click Apply.
Figure 3-43 LACP Trunk Configuration
3-97
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
CLI – The following example enables LACP for ports 1 to 6. Just connect
these ports to LACP-enabled trunk ports on another switch to form a
trunk.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
4-145
Console(config-if)#lacp
4-166
Console(config-if)#exit
.
.
.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/6
Console(config-if)#lacp
Console(config-if)#end
Console#show interfaces status port-channel 1
4-153
Information of Trunk 1
Basic information:
Port type:
100TX
Mac address:
22-22-22-22-22-2d
Configuration:
Name:
Port admin:
Up
Speed-duplex:
Auto
Capabilities:
10half, 10full, 100half, 100full
Flow control status:
Disabled
Port security:
Disabled
Max MAC count:
0
Current status:
Created by:
Lacp
Link status:
Up
Port operation status: Up
Operation speed-duplex: 100full
Flow control type:
None
Member Ports: Eth1/1, Eth1/2, Eth1/3, Eth1/4, Eth1/5, Eth1/6,
Console#
Configuring LACP Parameters
Dynamically Creating a Port Channel –
Ports assigned to a common port channel must meet the following criteria:
3-98
•
Ports must have the same LACP System Priority.
•
Ports must have the same LACP port Admin Key.
•
However, if the “port channel” Admin Key is set (page 4-142), then the
port Admin Key must be set to the same value for a port to be allowed
to join a channel group.
PORT CONFIGURATION
Note: If the port channel admin key (lacp admin key, page 4-171) is not
set (through the CLI) when a channel group is formed (i.e., it has a
null value of 0), this key is set to the same value as the port admin
key used by the interfaces that joined the group (lacp admin key, as
described in this section and on page 4-170).
Command Attributes
Set Port Actor – This menu sets the local side of an aggregate link; i.e., the
ports on this switch.
•
Port – Port number. (Range: 1-52)
•
System Priority – LACP system priority is used to determine link
aggregation group (LAG) membership, and to identify this device to
other switches during LAG negotiations.
(Range: 0-65535; Default: 32768)
- Ports must be configured with the same system priority to join the
same LAG.
- System priority is combined with the switch’s MAC address to form
the LAG identifier. This identifier is used to indicate a specific LAG
during LACP negotiations with other systems.
•
Admin Key – The LACP administration key must be set to the same
value for ports that belong to the same LAG.
(Range: 0-65535; Default: 1)
•
Port Priority – If a link goes down, LACP port priority is used to select
a backup link. (Range: 0-65535; Default: 32768)
Set Port Partner – This menu sets the remote side of an aggregate link; i.e.,
the ports on the attached device. The command attributes have the same
meaning as those used for the port actor. However, configuring LACP
settings for the partner only applies to its administrative state, not its
operational state, and will only take effect the next time an aggregate link is
established with the partner.
3-99
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
Web – Click Port, LACP, Aggregation Port. Set the System Priority, Admin
Key, and Port Priority for the Port Actor. You can optionally configure
these settings for the Port Partner. (Be aware that these settings only affect
the administrative state of the partner, and will not take effect until the
next time an aggregate link is formed with this device.) After you have
completed setting the port LACP parameters, click Apply.
Figure 3-44 LACP - Aggregation Port
3-100
PORT CONFIGURATION
CLI – The following example configures LACP parameters for ports 1-4.
Ports 1-4 are used as active members of the LAG.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
4-145
Console(config-if)#lacp actor system-priority 3
4-169
Console(config-if)#lacp actor admin-key 120
4-170
Console(config-if)#lacp actor port-priority 128
4-172
Console(config-if)#exit
.
.
.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/4
Console(config-if)#lacp actor system-priority 3
Console(config-if)#lacp actor admin-key 120
Console(config-if)#lacp actor port-priority 512
Console(config-if)#end
Console#show lacp sysid
4-173
Port Channel
System Priority
System MAC Address
------------------------------------------------------------------1
3
00-00-E9-31-31-31
2
32768
00-00-E9-31-31-31
3
32768
00-00-E9-31-31-31
4
32768
00-00-E9-31-31-31
Console#show lacp 1 internal
4-173
Port channel : 1
------------------------------------------------------------------Oper Key : 120
Admin Key : 0
Eth 1/1
------------------------------------------------------------------LACPDUs Internal:
30 sec
LACP System Priority: 3
LACP Port Priority:
128
Admin Key:
120
Oper Key:
120
Admin State : defaulted, aggregation, long timeout, LACP-activity
Oper State:
distributing, collecting, synchronization,
aggregation, long timeout, LACP-activity
.
.
.
3-101
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
Displaying LACP Port Counters
You can display statistics for LACP protocol messages.
Table 3-6 LACP Port Counters
Field
Description
LACPDUs Sent
Number of valid LACPDUs transmitted from this
channel group.
LACPDUs Received
Number of valid LACPDUs received on this channel
group.
Marker Sent
Number of valid Marker PDUs transmitted from this
channel group.
Marker Received
Number of valid Marker PDUs received by this channel
group.
LACPDUs Unknown
Pkts
Number of frames received that either (1) Carry the
Slow Protocols Ethernet Type value, but contain an
unknown PDU, or (2) are addressed to the Slow
Protocols group MAC Address, but do not carry the
Slow Protocols Ethernet Type.
LACPDUs Illegal Pkts
Number of frames that carry the Slow Protocols
Ethernet Type value, but contain a badly formed PDU
or an illegal value of Protocol Subtype.
Web – Click Port, LACP, Port Counters Information. Select a member
port to display the corresponding information.
Figure 3-45 LACP - Port Counters Information
3-102
PORT CONFIGURATION
CLI – The following example displays LACP counters.
Console#show lacp counters
4-173
Port channel : 1
------------------------------------------------------------------Eth 1/ 1
------------------------------------------------------------------LACPDUs Sent:
91
LACPDUs Receive:
43
Marker Sent:
0
Marker Receive:
0
LACPDUs Unknown Pkts: 0
LACPDUs Illegal Pkts: 0
.
.
.
Displaying LACP Settings and Status for the Local Side
You can display configuration settings and the operational state for the
local side of an link aggregation.
Table 3-7 LACP Internal Configuration Information
Field
Description
Oper Key
Current operational value of the key for the aggregation port.
Admin Key
Current administrative value of the key for the aggregation port.
LACPDUs
Internal
Number of seconds before invalidating received LACPDU
information.
LACP System
Priority
LACP system priority assigned to this port channel.
3-103
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
Table 3-7 LACP Internal Configuration Information (Continued)
Field
Description
LACP Port
Priority
LACP port priority assigned to this interface within the channel
group.
Admin State,
Oper State
Administrative or operational values of the actor’s state
parameters:
• Expired – The actor’s receive machine is in the expired state;
• Defaulted – The actor’s receive machine is using defaulted
operational partner information, administratively configured
for the partner.
• Distributing – If false, distribution of outgoing frames on this
link is disabled; i.e., distribution is currently disabled and is
not expected to be enabled in the absence of administrative
changes or changes in received protocol information.
• Collecting – Collection of incoming frames on this link is
enabled; i.e., collection is currently enabled and is not
expected to be disabled in the absence of administrative
changes or changes in received protocol information.
• Synchronization – The System considers this link to be
IN_SYNC; i.e., it has been allocated to the correct Link
Aggregation Group, the group has been associated with a
compatible Aggregator, and the identity of the Link
Aggregation Group is consistent with the System ID and
operational Key information transmitted.
• Aggregation – The system considers this link to be
aggregatable; i.e., a potential candidate for aggregation.
• Long timeout – Periodic transmission of LACPDUs uses a
slow transmission rate.
• LACP-Activity – Activity control value with regard to this
link. (0: Passive; 1: Active)
3-104
PORT CONFIGURATION
Web – Click Port, LACP, Port Internal Information. Select a port channel
to display the corresponding information.
Figure 3-46 LACP - Port Internal Information
CLI – The following example displays the LACP configuration settings
and operational state for the local side of port channel 1.
Console#show lacp 1 internal
4-173
Port channel : 1
------------------------------------------------------------------Oper Key : 120
Admin Key : 0
Eth 1/1
------------------------------------------------------------------LACPDUs Internal:
30 sec
LACP System Priority: 3
LACP Port Priority:
128
Admin Key:
120
Oper Key:
120
Admin State : defaulted, aggregation, long timeout, LACP-activity
Oper State:
distributing, collecting, synchronization,
aggregation, long timeout, LACP-activity
.
.
.
3-105
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
Displaying LACP Settings and Status for the Remote Side
You can display configuration settings and the operational state for the
remote side of an link aggregation.
Table 3-8 LACP Neighbor Configuration Information
Field
Description
Partner Admin
System ID
LAG partner’s system ID assigned by the user.
Partner Oper System LAG partner’s system ID assigned by the LACP protocol.
ID
3-106
Partner Admin
Port Number
Current administrative value of the port number for the
protocol Partner.
Partner Oper
Port Number
Operational port number assigned to this aggregation port
by the port’s protocol partner.
Port Admin Priority
Current administrative value of the port priority for the
protocol partner.
Port Oper Priority
Priority value assigned to this aggregation port by the
partner.
Admin Key
Current administrative value of the Key for the protocol
partner.
Oper Key
Current operational value of the Key for the protocol
partner.
Admin State
Administrative values of the partner’s state parameters.
(See preceding table.)
Oper State
Operational values of the partner’s state parameters.
(See preceding table.)
PORT CONFIGURATION
Web – Click Port, LACP, Port Neighbors Information. Select a port
channel to display the corresponding information.
Figure 3-47 LACP - Port Neighbors Information
CLI – The following example displays the LACP configuration settings
and operational state for the remote side of port channel 1.
Console#show lacp 1 neighbors
4-173
Port channel 1 neighbors
------------------------------------------------------------------Eth 1/1
------------------------------------------------------------------Partner Admin System ID:
32768, 00-00-00-00-00-00
Partner Oper System ID:
3, 00-30-F1-CE-2A-20
Partner Admin Port Number: 5
Partner Oper Port Number: 3
Port Admin Priority:
32768
Port Oper Priority:
128
Admin Key:
0
Oper Key:
120
Admin State:
defaulted, distributing, collecting,
synchronization, long timeout,
Oper State:
distributing, collecting, synchronization,
aggregation, long timeout, LACP-activity
.
.
.
3-107
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
Setting Broadcast Storm Thresholds
Broadcast storms may occur when a device on your network is
malfunctioning, or if application programs are not well designed or
properly configured. If there is too much broadcast traffic on your
network, performance can be severely degraded or everything can come to
complete halt.
You can protect your network from broadcast storms by setting a
threshold for broadcast traffic. Any broadcast packets exceeding the
specified threshold will then be dropped.
Command Usage
•
Broadcast Storm Control is enabled by default.
•
Broadcast control does not effect IP multicast traffic.
•
The specified threshold applies to all ports on the switch.
Command Attributes
•
Port7 – Port number.
•
Trunk8 – Trunk number.
•
Type – Indicates the port type. (100BASE-TX, 1000BASE-T, or SFP)
•
Threshold – Threshold as percentage of port bandwidth.
(Range: 64-95232000 octets per second; Default: 32000)
•
Protect Status – Shows whether or not broadcast storm control has
been enabled. (Default: Enabled)
•
Trunk7 – Shows if a port is a trunk member.
7. Port Broadcast Control.
8. Trunk Broadcast Control.
3-108
PORT CONFIGURATION
Web – Click Port, Port/Trunk Broadcast Control. Set the threshold, mark
the Enabled field for the desired interface and click Apply.
Figure 3-48 Port Broadcast Control
3-109
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
CLI – Specify any interface, and then enter the threshold. The following
disables broadcast storm control for port 1, and then sets broadcast
suppression at 600 octets per second for port 2 (which applies to all ports).
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#no switchport broadcast
Console(config-if)#exit
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/2
Console(config-if)#switchport broadcast octet-rate 600
Console(config-if)#end
Console#show interfaces switchport ethernet 1/2
Information of Eth 1/2
Broadcast threshold:
Enabled, 600 octets/second
Lacp status:
Enabled
Ingress rate limit: disable, Level: 30
Egress rate limit: disable, Level: 30
VLAN membership mode:
Hybrid
Ingress rule:
Disabled
Acceptable frame type:
All frames
Native VLAN:
1
Priority for untagged traffic: 0
Gvrp status:
Disabled
Allowed Vlan:
1(u),
Forbidden Vlan:
Private-VLAN mode:
NONE
Private-VLAN host-association: NONE
Private-VLAN mapping:
NONE
Console#
4-145
4-151
4-151
4-156
Configuring Port Mirroring
You can mirror traffic from any source
port to a target port for real-time analysis.
You can then attach a logic analyzer or
RMON probe to the target port and
study the traffic crossing the source port
in a completely unobtrusive manner.
Source
port(s)
Single
target
port
Command Usage
3-110
•
Monitor port speed should match or exceed source port speed,
otherwise traffic may be dropped from the monitor port.
•
All mirror sessions have to share the same destination port.
•
When mirroring port traffic, the target port must be included in the
same VLAN as the source port.
PORT CONFIGURATION
Command Attributes
•
Mirror Sessions – Displays a list of current mirror sessions.
•
Source Unit – The unit whose port traffic will be monitored.
•
Source Port – The port whose traffic will be monitored.
•
Type – Allows you to select which traffic to mirror to the target port,
Rx (receive), or Tx (transmit). (Default: Rx)
•
Target Unit – The unit whose port will “duplicate” or “mirror” the
traffic on the source port.
•
Target Port – The port that will mirror the traffic on the source port.
Web – Click Port, Mirror Port Configuration. Specify the source port/
unit, the traffic type to be mirrored, and the monitor port/unit, then click
Add.
Figure 3-49 Mirror Port Configuration
CLI – Use the interface command to select the monitor port, then use the
port monitor command to specify the source port and traffic type.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/10
Console(config-if)#port monitor ethernet 1/13 tx
Console(config-if)#
4-145
4-158
3-111
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
Configuring Rate Limits
This function allows the network manager to control the maximum rate
for traffic transmitted or received on a port. Rate limiting is configured on
ports at the edge of a network to limit traffic coming into or out of the
network. Traffic that falls within the rate limit is transmitted, while packets
that exceed the acceptable amount of traffic are dropped.
Rate limiting can be applied to individual ports or trunks. When an
interface is configured with this feature, the traffic rate will be monitored
by the hardware to verify conformity. Non-conforming traffic is dropped,
conforming traffic is forwarded without any changes.
Rate Limit Granularity
Rate limit granularity is an additional feature enabling the network manager
greater control over traffic on the network. The “rate limit granularity” is
multiplied by the “rate limit level” (page 3-113) to set the actual rate limit
for an interface. Granularity is a global setting that applies to Fast Ethernet
or Gigabit Ethernet interfaces.
Command Usage
•
•
For Fast Ethernet interfaces, the rate limit granularity can be set to
512 Kbps, 1 Mbps, or 3.3 Mbps
For Gigabit Ethernet interfaces, the rate limit granularity is 33.3 Mbps.
Web – Click Port, Rate Limit, Granularity. Select the required rate limit
granularity for Fast Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet, and click apply.
Figure 3-50 Rate Limit Granularity Configuration
3-112
PORT CONFIGURATION
CLI - This example sets and displays Fast Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet
granularity.
Console(config)#rate-limit fastethernet granularity 512
4-162
Console(config)#rate-limit gigabitethernet granularity 33300 4-162
console#show rate-limit
4-163
Fast ethernet granularity:
512
Gigabit ethernet granularity:
Console#
33300
Rate Limit Configuration
Use the rate limit configuration pages to apply rate limiting.
Command Usage
•
Input and output rate limit can be enabled or disabled for individual
interfaces.
Command Attributes
•
•
•
Port/Trunk – Displays the port number.
Rate Limit Status – Enables or disables the rate limit.
(Default: Disabled)
Rate Limit Level – Sets the rate limit level. (Range: 1-30: Default: 30)
Note: Actual rate limit = Rate Limit Level * Granularity
3-113
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
Web – Click Port, Rate Limit, Input/Output Port/Trunk Configuration.
Enable the Rate Limit Status for the required interfaces, set the Rate Limit
Level, and click Apply.
Figure 3-51 Output Rate Limit Port Configuration
CLI - This example sets the rate limit level for input and output traffic
passing through port 3.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/3
Console(config-if)#rate-limit input level 25
Console(config-if)#rate-limit output level 25
Console(config-if)#
4-145
4-161
4-161
Showing Port Statistics
You can display standard statistics on network traffic from the Interfaces
Group and Ethernet-like MIBs, as well as a detailed breakdown of traffic
based on the RMON MIB. Interfaces and Ethernet-like statistics display
errors on the traffic passing through each port. This information can be
used to identify potential problems with the switch (such as a faulty port or
unusually heavy loading). RMON statistics provide access to a broad range
of statistics, including a total count of different frame types and sizes
passing through each port. All values displayed have been accumulated
since the last system reboot, and are shown as counts per second. Statistics
are refreshed every 60 seconds by default.
3-114
PORT CONFIGURATION
Note: RMON groups 2, 3 and 9 can only be accessed using SNMP
management software such as SMC EliteView.
Table 3-9 Port Statistics
Parameter
Description
Interface Statistics
Received Octets
The total number of octets received on the interface,
including framing characters.
Received Unicast
Packets
The number of subnetwork-unicast packets delivered
to a higher-layer protocol.
Received Multicast
Packets
The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a
higher (sub-)layer, which were addressed to a multicast
address at this sub-layer.
Received Broadcast
Packets
The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a
higher (sub-)layer, which were addressed to a broadcast
address at this sub-layer.
Received Discarded
Packets
The number of inbound packets which were chosen to
be discarded even though no errors had been detected
to prevent their being deliverable to a higher-layer
protocol. One possible reason for discarding such a
packet could be to free up buffer space.
Received Unknown
Packets
The number of packets received via the interface which
were discarded because of an unknown or unsupported
protocol.
Received Errors
The number of inbound packets that contained errors
preventing them from being deliverable to a
higher-layer protocol.
Transmit Octets
The total number of octets transmitted out of the
interface, including framing characters.
Transmit Unicast
Packets
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols
requested be transmitted to a subnetwork-unicast
address, including those that were discarded or not sent.
3-115
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
Table 3-9 Port Statistics (Continued)
Parameter
Description
Transmit Multicast
Packets
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols
requested be transmitted, and which were addressed to
a multicast address at this sub-layer, including those that
were discarded or not sent.
Transmit Broadcast
Packets
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols
requested be transmitted, and which were addressed to
a broadcast address at this sub-layer, including those
that were discarded or not sent.
Transmit Discarded
Packets
The number of outbound packets which were chosen
to be discarded even though no errors had been
detected to prevent their being transmitted. One
possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to
free up buffer space.
Transmit Errors
The number of outbound packets that could not be
transmitted because of errors.
Etherlike Statistics
Alignment Errors
The number of alignment errors (missynchronized data
packets).
Late Collisions
The number of times that a collision is detected later
than 512 bit-times into the transmission of a packet.
FCS Errors
A count of frames received on a particular interface that
are an integral number of octets in length but do not
pass the FCS check. This count does not include frames
received with frame-too-long or frame-too-short error.
Excessive Collisions
A count of frames for which transmission on a
particular interface fails due to excessive collisions. This
counter does not increment when the interface is
operating in full-duplex mode.
Single Collision Frames The number of successfully transmitted frames for
which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision.
Internal MAC Transmit A count of frames for which transmission on a
Errors
particular interface fails due to an internal MAC
sublayer transmit error.
3-116
PORT CONFIGURATION
Table 3-9 Port Statistics (Continued)
Parameter
Description
Multiple Collision
Frames
A count of successfully transmitted frames for which
transmission is inhibited by more than one collision.
Carrier Sense Errors
The number of times that the carrier sense condition
was lost or never asserted when attempting to transmit
a frame.
SQE Test Errors
A count of times that the SQE TEST ERROR message
is generated by the PLS sublayer for a particular
interface.
Frames Too Long
A count of frames received on a particular interface that
exceed the maximum permitted frame size.
Deferred Transmissions A count of frames for which the first transmission
attempt on a particular interface is delayed because the
medium was busy.
Internal MAC Receive
Errors
A count of frames for which reception on a particular
interface fails due to an internal MAC sublayer receive
error.
RMON Statistics
Drop Events
The total number of events in which packets were
dropped due to lack of resources.
Jabbers
The total number of frames received that were longer
than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits, but including
FCS octets), and had either an FCS or alignment error.
Received Bytes
Total number of bytes of data received on the network.
This statistic can be used as a reasonable indication of
Ethernet utilization.
Collisions
The best estimate of the total number of collisions on
this Ethernet segment.
Received Frames
The total number of frames (bad, broadcast and
multicast) received.
Broadcast Frames
The total number of good frames received that were
directed to the broadcast address. Note that this does
not include multicast packets.
3-117
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
Table 3-9 Port Statistics (Continued)
Parameter
Description
Multicast Frames
The total number of good frames received that were
directed to this multicast address.
CRC/Alignment Errors The number of CRC/alignment errors (FCS or
alignment errors).
3-118
Undersize Frames
The total number of frames received that were less than
64 octets long (excluding framing bits, but including
FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed.
Oversize Frames
The total number of frames received that were longer
than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits, but including
FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed.
Fragments
The total number of frames received that were less than
64 octets in length (excluding framing bits, but
including FCS octets) and had either an FCS or
alignment error.
64 Bytes Frames
The total number of frames (including bad packets)
received and transmitted that were 64 octets in length
(excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
65-127 Byte Frames
128-255 Byte Frames
256-511 Byte Frames
512-1023 Byte Frames
1024-1518 Byte Frames
1519-1536 Byte Frames
The total number of frames (including bad packets)
received and transmitted where the number of octets
fall within the specified range (excluding framing bits
but including FCS octets).
PORT CONFIGURATION
Web – Click Port, Port Statistics. Select the required interface, and click
Query. You can also use the Refresh button at the bottom of the page to
update the screen.
Figure 3-52 Port Statistics
3-119
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
CLI – This example shows statistics for port 13.
Console#show interfaces counters ethernet 1/13
4-154
Ethernet 1/13
Iftable stats:
Octets input: 868453, Octets output: 3492122
Unicast input: 7315, Unitcast output: 6658
Discard input: 0, Discard output: 0
Error input: 0, Error output: 0
Unknown protos input: 0, QLen output: 0
Extended iftable stats:
Multi-cast input: 0, Multi-cast output: 17027
Broadcast input: 231, Broadcast output: 7
Ether-like stats:
Alignment errors: 0, FCS errors: 0
Single Collision frames: 0, Multiple collision frames: 0
SQE Test errors: 0, Deferred transmissions: 0
Late collisions: 0, Excessive collisions: 0
Internal mac transmit errors: 0, Internal mac receive errors: 0
Frame too longs: 0, Carrier sense errors: 0
Symbol errors: 0
RMON stats:
Drop events: 0, Octets: 4422579, Packets: 31552
Broadcast pkts: 238, Multi-cast pkts: 17033
Undersize pkts: 0, Oversize pkts: 0
Fragments: 0, Jabbers: 0
CRC align errors: 0, Collisions: 0
Packet size <= 64 octets: 25568, Packet size 65 to 127 octets: 1616
Packet size 128 to 255 octets: 1249, Packet size 256 to 511 octets: 1449
Packet size 512 to 1023 octets: 802, Packet size 1024 to 1518 octets: 871
Console#
3-120
ADDRESS TABLE SETTINGS
Address Table Settings
Switches store the addresses for all known devices. This information is
used to pass traffic directly between the inbound and outbound ports. All
the addresses learned by monitoring traffic are stored in the dynamic
address table. You can also manually configure static addresses that are
bound to a specific port.
Setting Static Addresses
A static address can be assigned to a specific interface on this switch. Static
addresses are bound to the assigned interface and will not be moved.
When a static address is seen on another interface, the address will be
ignored and will not be written to the address table.
Command Attributes
•
Static Address Counts9 – The number of manually configured
addresses.
•
Current Static Address Table – Lists all the static addresses.
•
Interface – Port or trunk associated with the device assigned a static
address.
•
MAC Address – Physical address of a device mapped to this interface.
•
VLAN – ID of configured VLAN (1-4094).
9. Web Only.
3-121
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
Web – Click Address Table, Static Addresses. Specify the interface, the
MAC address and VLAN, then click Add Static Address.
Figure 3-53 Configuring a Static Address Table
CLI – This example adds an address to the static address table, but sets it
to be deleted when the switch is reset.
Console(config)#mac-address-table static 00-e0-29-94-34-de
interface ethernet 1/1 vlan 1 delete-on-reset
Console(config)#
4-179
Displaying the Address Table
The Dynamic Address Table contains the MAC addresses learned by
monitoring the source address for traffic entering the switch. When the
destination address for inbound traffic is found in the database, the
packets intended for that address are forwarded directly to the associated
port. Otherwise, the traffic is flooded to all ports.
Command Attributes
3-122
•
Interface – Indicates a port or trunk.
•
MAC Address – Physical address associated with this interface.
ADDRESS TABLE SETTINGS
•
VLAN – ID of configured VLAN (1-4094).
•
Address Table Sort Key – You can sort the information displayed
based on MAC address, VLAN or interface (port or trunk).
•
Dynamic Address Counts – The number of addresses dynamically
learned.
•
Current Dynamic Address Table – Lists all the dynamic addresses.
Web – Click Address Table, Dynamic Addresses. Specify the search type
(i.e., mark the Interface, MAC Address, or VLAN checkbox), select the
method of sorting the displayed addresses, and then click Query.
Figure 3-54 Configuring a Dynamic Address Table
CLI – This example also displays the address table entries for port 1.
Console#show mac-address-table interface ethernet 1/1
Interface Mac Address
Vlan Type
--------- ----------------- ---- ----------------Eth 1/ 1 00-E0-29-94-34-DE
1 Delete-on-reset
Eth 1/ 1 00-20-9C-23-CD-60
2 Learned
Console#
4-180
3-123
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
Changing the Aging Time
You can set the aging time for entries in the dynamic address table.
Command Attributes
•
Aging Status – Enables/disables the function.
•
Aging Time – The time after which a learned entry is discarded.
(Range: 10-30000 seconds; Default: 300)
Web – Click Address Table, Address Aging. Specify the new aging time,
click Apply.
Figure 3-55 Setting the Address Aging Time
CLI – This example sets the aging time to 400 seconds.
Console(config)#mac-address-table aging-time 400
Console(config)#
4-181
Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration
The Spanning Tree Algorithm (STA) can be used to detect and disable
network loops, and to provide backup links between switches, bridges or
routers. This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices (that
is, an STA-compliant switch, bridge or router) in your network to ensure
that only one route exists between any two stations on the network, and
provide backup links which automatically take over when a primary link
goes down.
3-124
SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION
The spanning tree algorithms supported by this switch include these
versions:
•
STP – Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1D)
•
RSTP – Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1w)
STA uses a distributed algorithm to select a bridging device
(STA-compliant switch, bridge or router) that serves as the root of the
spanning tree network. It selects a root port on each bridging device
(except for the root device) which incurs the lowest path cost when
forwarding a packet from that device to the root device. Then it selects a
designated bridging device from each LAN which incurs the lowest path
cost when forwarding a packet from that LAN to the root device. All ports
connected to designated bridging devices are assigned as designated ports.
After determining the lowest cost spanning tree, it enables all root ports
and designated ports, and disables all other ports. Network packets are
therefore only forwarded between root ports and designated ports,
eliminating any possible network loops.
Designated
Root
x
x
x
Designated
Bridge
x
Designated
Port
Root
Port
x
Once a stable network topology has been established, all bridges listen for
Hello BPDUs (Bridge Protocol Data Units) transmitted from the Root
Bridge. If a bridge does not get a Hello BPDU after a predefined interval
(Maximum Age), the bridge assumes that the link to the Root Bridge is
down. This bridge will then initiate negotiations with other bridges to
reconfigure the network to reestablish a valid network topology.
RSTP is designed as a general replacement for the slower, legacy STP.
RSTP achieves must faster reconfiguration (i.e., around 1 to 3 seconds,
compared to 30 seconds or more for STP) by reducing the number of state
changes before active ports start learning, predefining an alternate route
3-125
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
that can be used when a node or port fails, and retaining the forwarding
database for ports insensitive to changes in the tree structure when
reconfiguration occurs.
Displaying Global Settings
You can display a summary of the current bridge STA information that
applies to the entire switch using the STA Information screen.
Field Attributes
3-126
•
Spanning Tree State – Shows if the switch is enabled to participate
in an STA-compliant network.
•
Bridge ID – A unique identifier for this bridge, consisting of the
bridge priority and MAC address (where the address is taken from the
switch system).
•
Max Age – The maximum time (in seconds) a device can wait without
receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure.
All device ports (except for designated ports) should receive
configuration messages at regular intervals. Any port that ages out STA
information (provided in the last configuration message) becomes the
designated port for the attached LAN. If it is a root port, a new root
port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network.
(References to “ports” in this section mean “interfaces,” which
includes both ports and trunks.)
•
Hello Time – Interval (in seconds) at which the root device transmits
a configuration message.
•
Forward Delay – The maximum time (in seconds) the root device will
wait before changing states (i.e., discarding to learning to forwarding).
This delay is required because every device must receive information
about topology changes before it starts to forward frames. In addition,
each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would
make it return to a discarding state; otherwise, temporary data loops
might result.
SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION
•
Designated Root – The priority and MAC address of the device in the
Spanning Tree that this switch has accepted as the root device.
- Root Port – The number of the port on this switch that is closest to
the root. This switch communicates with the root device through
this port. If there is no root port, then this switch has been accepted
as the root device of the Spanning Tree network.
- Root Path Cost – The path cost from the root port on this switch
to the root device.
•
Configuration Changes – The number of times the Spanning Tree
has been reconfigured.
•
Last Topology Change – Time since the Spanning Tree was last
reconfigured.
These additional parameters are only displayed for the CLI:
•
Spanning tree mode – Specifies the type of spanning tree used on this
switch:
- STP: Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1D)
- RSTP: Rapid Spanning Tree (IEEE 802.1w)
•
Priority – Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device, root port,
and designated port. The device with the highest priority becomes the
STA root device. However, if all devices have the same priority, the
device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device.
•
Root Hello Time – Interval (in seconds) at which this device
transmits a configuration message.
•
Root Maximum Age – The maximum time (in seconds) this device
can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting
to reconfigure. All device ports (except for designated ports) should
receive configuration messages at regular intervals. If the root port ages
out STA information (provided in the last configuration message), a
new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the
network. (References to “ports” in this section means “interfaces,”
which includes both ports and trunks.)
3-127
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
•
Root Forward Delay – The maximum time (in seconds) this device
will wait before changing states (i.e., discarding to learning to
forwarding). This delay is required because every device must receive
information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames.
In addition, each port needs time to listen for conflicting information
that would make it return to a discarding state; otherwise, temporary
data loops might result.
•
Transmission limit – The minimum interval between the
transmission of consecutive RSTP BPDUs.
•
Path Cost Method – The path cost is used to determine the best path
between devices. The path cost method is used to determine the range
of values that can be assigned to each interface.
Web – Click Spanning Tree, STA, Information.
Figure 3-56 STA Information
3-128
SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION
CLI – This command displays global STA settings, followed by settings for
each port.
Console#show spanning-tree
4-196
Spanning-tree information
--------------------------------------------------------------Spanning tree mode
:RSTP
Spanning tree enable/disable
:enabled
Priority
:32768
Bridge Hello Time (sec.)
:2
Bridge Max Age (sec.)
:20
Bridge Forward Delay (sec.)
:15
Root Hello Time (sec.)
:2
Root Max Age (sec.)
:20
Root Forward Delay (sec.)
:15
Designated Root
:32768.0.0000ABCD0000
Current root port
:1
Current root cost
:200000
Number of topology changes
:1
Last topology changes time (sec.):13380
Transmission limit
:3
Path Cost Method
:long
.
.
.
Note: The current root port and current root cost display as zero when
this device is not connected to the network.
3-129
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
Configuring Global Settings
Global settings apply to the entire switch.
Command Usage
•
Spanning Tree Protocol10
Uses RSTP for the internal state machine, but sends only 802.1D
BPDUs.
•
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol10
RSTP supports connections to either STP or RSTP nodes by
monitoring the incoming protocol messages and dynamically adjusting
the type of protocol messages the RSTP node transmits, as described
below:
- STP Mode – If the switch receives an 802.1D BPDU (i.e., STP
BPDU) after a port’s migration delay timer expires, the switch
assumes it is connected to an 802.1D bridge and starts using only
802.1D BPDUs.
- RSTP Mode – If RSTP is using 802.1D BPDUs on a port and
receives an RSTP BPDU after the migration delay expires, RSTP
restarts the migration delay timer and begins using RSTP BPDUs on
that port.
Command Attributes
Basic Configuration of Global Settings
•
Spanning Tree State – Enables/disables STA on this switch.
(Default: Enabled)
•
Spanning Tree Type – Specifies the type of spanning tree used on
this switch:
- STP: Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1D); (i.e., when this option
is selected, the switch will use RSTP set to STP forced compatibility
mode).
- RSTP: Rapid Spanning Tree (IEEE 802.1w); RSTP is the default.
10. STP and RSTP BPDUs are transmitted as untagged frames, and will cross any VLAN boundaries.
3-130
SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION
•
Priority – Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device, root port,
and designated port. The device with the highest priority becomes the
STA root device. However, if all devices have the same priority, the
device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device.
(Note that lower numeric values indicate higher priority.)
- Default: 32768
- Range: 0-61440, in steps of 4096
- Options: 0, 4096, 8192, 12288, 16384, 20480, 24576, 28672, 32768,
36864, 40960, 45056, 49152, 53248, 57344, 61440
Root Device Configuration
•
Hello Time – Interval (in seconds) at which the root device transmits
a configuration message.
- Default: 2
- Minimum: 1
- Maximum: The lower of 10 or [(Max. Message Age / 2) -1]
•
Maximum Age – The maximum time (in seconds) a device can wait
without receiving a configuration message before attempting to
reconfigure. All device ports (except for designated ports) should
receive configuration messages at regular intervals. Any port that ages
out STA information (provided in the last configuration message)
becomes the designated port for the attached LAN. If it is a root port,
a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the
network. (References to “ports” in this section mean “interfaces,”
which includes both ports and trunks.)
- Default: 20
- Minimum: The higher of 6 or [2 x (Hello Time + 1)].
- Maximum: The lower of 40 or [2 x (Forward Delay - 1)]
3-131
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
•
Forward Delay – The maximum time (in seconds) this device will wait
before changing states (i.e., discarding to learning to forwarding). This
delay is required because every device must receive information about
topology changes before it starts to forward frames. In addition, each
port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make
it return to a discarding state; otherwise, temporary data loops might
result.
- Default: 15
- Minimum: The higher of 4 or [(Max. Message Age / 2) + 1]
- Maximum: 30
Configuration Settings for RSTP
•
Path Cost Method – The path cost is used to determine the best path
between devices. The path cost method is used to determine the range
of values that can be assigned to each interface.
- Long: Specifies 32-bit based values that range from 1-200,000,000.
(This is the default.)
- Short: Specifies 16-bit based values that range from 1-65535.
•
3-132
Transmission Limit – The maximum transmission rate for BPDUs
is specified by setting the minimum interval between the transmission
of consecutive protocol messages. (Range: 1-10; Default: 3)
SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION
Web – Click Spanning Tree, STA, Configuration. Modify the required
attributes, and click Apply.
Figure 3-57 STA Configuration
CLI – This example enables Spanning Tree Protocol, sets the mode to
RSTP, and then configures the STA and RSTP parameters.
Console(config)#spanning-tree
Console(config)#spanning-tree
Console(config)#spanning-tree
Console(config)#spanning-tree
Console(config)#spanning-tree
Console(config)#spanning-tree
Console(config)#spanning-tree
Console(config)#spanning-tree
Console(config)#
mode rstp
priority 45056
hello-time 5
max-age 38
forward-time 20
pathcost method long
transmission-limit 4
4-184
4-185
4-188
4-186
4-187
4-186
4-189
4-189
3-133
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
Displaying Interface Settings
The STA Port Information and STA Trunk Information pages display the
current status of ports and trunks in the Spanning Tree.
Field Attributes
•
Spanning Tree – Shows if STA has been enabled on this interface.
•
STA Status – Displays current state of this port within the Spanning
Tree:
- Discarding - Port receives STA configuration messages, but does
not forward packets.
- Learning - Port has transmitted configuration messages for an
interval set by the Forward Delay parameter without receiving
contradictory information. Port address table is cleared, and the port
begins learning addresses.
- Forwarding - Port forwards packets, and continues learning
addresses.
The rules defining port status are:
- A port on a network segment with no other STA compliant bridging
device is always forwarding.
- If two ports of a switch are connected to the same segment and there
is no other STA device attached to this segment, the port with the
smaller ID forwards packets and the other is discarding.
- All ports are discarding when the switch is booted, then some of
them change state to learning, and then to forwarding.
3-134
•
Forward Transitions – The number of times this port has
transitioned from the Learning state to the Forwarding state.
•
Designated Cost – The cost for a packet to travel from this port to
the root in the current Spanning Tree configuration. The slower the
media, the higher the cost.
SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION
•
Designated Bridge – The bridge priority and MAC address of the
device through which this port must communicate to reach the root of
the Spanning Tree.
•
Designated Port – The port priority and number of the port on the
designated bridging device through which this switch must
communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree.
•
Oper Link Type – The operational point-to-point status of the LAN
segment attached to this interface. This parameter is determined by
manual configuration or by auto-detection, as described for Admin
Link Type in STA Port Configuration on page 3-138.
•
Oper Edge Port – This parameter is initialized to the setting for
Admin Edge Port in STA Port Configuration on page 3-138 (i.e., true
or false), but will be set to false if a BPDU is received, indicating that
another bridge is attached to this port.
•
Port Role – Roles are assigned according to whether the port is part
of the active topology connecting the bridge to the root bridge (i.e.,
root port), connecting a LAN through the bridge to the root bridge
(i.e., designated port), or is an alternate or backup port that may
provide connectivity if other bridges, bridge ports, or LANs fail or are
removed. The role is set to disabled (i.e., disabled port) if a port has
no role within the spanning tree.
R: Root Port
A: Alternate Port
D: Designated Port
B: Backup Port
Alternate port receives more
useful BPDUs from another
bridge and is therefore not
selected as the designated
R
port.
A
x
R
D
B
3-135
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
R
A
x
•
Backup port receives more
useful BPDUs from the same
bridge and is therefore not
selected as the designated
port.
R
D
B
Trunk Member – Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk.
(STA Port Information only)
These additional parameters are only displayed for the CLI:
3-136
•
Admin status – Shows if this interface is enabled.
•
Path cost – This parameter is used by the STA to determine the best
path between devices. Therefore, lower values should be assigned to
ports attached to faster media, and higher values assigned to ports with
slower media. (Path cost takes precedence over port priority.)
•
Priority – Defines the priority used for this port in the Spanning Tree
Algorithm. If the path cost for all ports on a switch is the same, the
port with the highest priority (i.e., lowest value) will be configured as
an active link in the Spanning Tree. This makes a port with higher
priority less likely to be blocked if the Spanning Tree Algorithm is
detecting network loops. Where more than one port is assigned the
highest priority, the port with the lowest numeric identifier will be
enabled.
•
Designated root – The priority and MAC address of the device in the
Spanning Tree that this switch has accepted as the root device.
•
Fast forwarding – This field provides the same information as Admin
Edge port, and is only included for backward compatibility with earlier
products.
SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION
•
Admin Edge Port – You can enable this option if an interface is
attached to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or to
an end node. Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding loops, they can
pass directly through to the spanning tree forwarding state. Specifying
Edge Ports provides quicker convergence for devices such as
workstations or servers, retains the current forwarding database to
reduce the amount of frame flooding required to rebuild address tables
during reconfiguration events, does not cause the spanning tree to
reconfigure when the interface changes state, and also overcomes
other STA-related timeout problems. However, remember that Edge
Port should only be enabled for ports connected to an end-node
device.
•
Admin Link Type – The link type attached to this interface.
- Point-to-Point – A connection to exactly one other bridge.
- Shared – A connection to two or more bridges.
- Auto – The switch automatically determines if the interface is
attached to a point-to-point link or to shared media.
Web – Click Spanning Tree, STA, Port Information or STA Trunk
Information.
Figure 3-58 STA Port Information
3-137
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
CLI – This example shows the STA attributes for port 5.
Console#show spanning-tree ethernet 1/5
4-196
Eth 1/ 5 information
-------------------------------------------------------------Admin status:
enabled
Role:
disable
State:
discarding
Path cost:
100000
Priority:
128
Designated cost:
0
Designated port
: 128.5
Designated root:
32768.0030F1D32600
Designated bridge:
32768.0030F1D32600
Fast forwarding:
disabled
Forward transitions:
0
Admin edge port:
disabled
Oper edge port:
disabled
Admin Link type:
auto
Oper Link type:
point-to-point
Spanning Tree Status: enabled
Console#
Configuring Interface Settings
You can configure RSTP attributes for specific interfaces, including port
priority, path cost, link type, and edge port. You may use a different
priority or path cost for ports of the same media type to indicate the
preferred path, link type to indicate a point-to-point connection or
shared-media connection, and edge port to indicate if the attached device
can support fast forwarding. (References to “ports” in this section means
“interfaces,” which includes both ports and trunks.)
Command Attributes
The following attributes are read-only and cannot be changed:
•
STA State – Displays current state of this port within the Spanning
Tree. (See Displaying Interface Settings on page 3-134 for additional
information.)
- Discarding - Port receives STA configuration messages, but does
not forward packets.
3-138
SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION
- Learning - Port has transmitted configuration messages for an
interval set by the Forward Delay parameter without receiving
contradictory information. Port address table is cleared, and the port
begins learning addresses.
- Forwarding - Port forwards packets, and continues learning
addresses.
•
Trunk – Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk.
(STA Port Configuration only)
The following interface attributes can be configured:
•
Spanning Tree – Enables/disables STA on this interface.
(Default: Enabled).
•
Priority – Defines the priority used for this port in the Spanning Tree
Protocol. If the path cost for all ports on a switch are the same, the port
with the highest priority (i.e., lowest value) will be configured as an
active link in the Spanning Tree. This makes a port with higher priority
less likely to be blocked if the Spanning Tree Protocol is detecting
network loops. Where more than one port is assigned the highest
priority, the port with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled.
- Default: 128
- Range: 0-240, in steps of 16
•
Path Cost – This parameter is used by the STP to determine the best
path between devices. Therefore, lower values should be assigned to
ports attached to faster media, and higher values assigned to ports with
slower media. (Path cost takes precedence over port priority.) Note
that when the Path Cost Method is set to short (page 3-63), the
maximum path cost is 65,535.
- Range:
- Ethernet: 200,000-20,000,000
- Fast Ethernet: 20,000-2,000,000
- Gigabit Ethernet: 2,000-200,000
3-139
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
-Default:
- Ethernet – Half duplex: 2,000,000; full duplex: 1,000,000;
trunk: 500,000
- Fast Ethernet – Half duplex: 200,000; full duplex: 100,000;
trunk: 50,000
- Gigabit Ethernet – Full duplex: 10,000; trunk: 5,000
•
Admin Link Type – The link type attached to this interface.
- Point-to-Point – A connection to exactly one other bridge.
- Shared – A connection to two or more bridges.
- Auto – The switch automatically determines if the interface is
attached to a point-to-point link or to shared media. (This is the
default setting)
3-140
•
Admin Edge Port (Fast Forwarding) – You can enable this option if
an interface is attached to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged
LAN or to an end node. Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding
loops, they can pass directly through to the spanning tree forwarding
state. Specifying Edge Ports provides quicker convergence for devices
such as workstations or servers, retains the current forwarding
database to reduce the amount of frame flooding required to rebuild
address tables during reconfiguration events, does not cause the
spanning tree to initiate reconfiguration when the interface changes
state, and also overcomes other STA-related timeout problems.
However, remember that Edge Port should only be enabled for ports
connected to an end-node device. (Default: Disabled)
•
Migration – If at any time the switch detects STP BPDUs, including
Configuration or Topology Change Notification BPDUs, it will
automatically set the selected interface to forced STP-compatible
mode. However, you can also use the Protocol Migration button to
manually re-check the appropriate BPDU format (RSTP or
STP-compatible) to send on the selected interfaces.
(Default: Disabled)
VLAN CONFIGURATION
Web – Click Spanning Tree, STA, Port Configuration or Trunk
Configuration. Modify the required attributes, then click Apply.
Figure 3-59 STA Port Configuration
CLI – This example sets STA attributes for port 7.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/7
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree port-priority 0
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree cost 50
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree link-type auto
Console(config-if)#no spanning-tree edge-port
Console(config-if)#
4-145
4-192
4-191
4-194
4-192
VLAN Configuration
IEEE 802.1Q VLANs
In large networks, routers are used to isolate broadcast traffic for each
subnet into separate domains. This switch provides a similar service at
Layer 2 by using VLANs to organize any group of network nodes into
separate broadcast domains. VLANs confine broadcast traffic to the
originating group, and can eliminate broadcast storms in large networks.
This also provides a more secure and cleaner network environment.
An IEEE 802.1Q VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere
in the network, but communicate as though they belong to the same
physical segment.
3-141
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
VLANs help to simplify network management by allowing you to move
devices to a new VLAN without having to change any physical
connections. VLANs can be easily organized to reflect departmental
groups (such as Marketing or R&D), usage groups (such as e-mail), or
multicast groups (used for multimedia applications such as
videoconferencing).
VLANs provide greater network efficiency by reducing broadcast traffic,
and allow you to make network changes without having to update IP
addresses or IP subnets. VLANs inherently provide a high level of network
security since traffic must pass through a configured Layer 3 link to reach a
different VLAN.
This switch supports the following VLAN features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Up to 255 VLANs based on the IEEE 802.1Q standard
Distributed VLAN learning across multiple switches using explicit or
implicit tagging and GVRP protocol
Port overlapping, allowing a port to participate in multiple VLANs
End stations can belong to multiple VLANs
Passing traffic between VLAN-aware and VLAN-unaware devices
Priority tagging
Assigning Ports to VLANs
Before enabling VLANs for the switch, you must first assign each port to
the VLAN group(s) in which it will participate. By default all ports are
assigned to VLAN 1 as untagged ports. Add a port as a tagged port if you
want it to carry traffic for one or more VLANs, and any intermediate
network devices or the host at the other end of the connection supports
VLANs. Then assign ports on the other VLAN-aware network devices
along the path that will carry this traffic to the same VLAN(s), either
manually or dynamically using GVRP. However, if you want a port on this
switch to participate in one or more VLANs, but none of the intermediate
network devices nor the host at the other end of the connection supports
VLANs, then you should add this port to the VLAN as an untagged port.
3-142
VLAN CONFIGURATION
Note: VLAN-tagged frames can pass through VLAN-aware or
VLAN-unaware network interconnection devices, but the VLAN
tags should be stripped off before passing it on to any end-node
host that does not support VLAN tagging.
tagged frames
VA
VA
VA: VLAN Aware
VU: VLAN Unaware
tagged
frames
VA
untagged
frames
VA
VU
VLAN Classification – When the switch receives a frame, it classifies the
frame in one of two ways. If the frame is untagged, the switch assigns the
frame to an associated VLAN (based on the default VLAN ID of the
receiving port). But if the frame is tagged, the switch uses the tagged
VLAN ID to identify the port broadcast domain of the frame.
Port Overlapping – Port overlapping can be used to allow access to
commonly shared network resources among different VLAN groups, such
as file servers or printers. Note that if you implement VLANs which do
not overlap, but still need to communicate, you can connect them by
enabled routing on this switch.
Untagged VLANs – Untagged (or static) VLANs are typically used to
reduce broadcast traffic and to increase security. A group of network users
assigned to a VLAN form a broadcast domain that is separate from other
VLANs configured on the switch. Packets are forwarded only between
ports that are designated for the same VLAN. Untagged VLANs can be
used to manually isolate user groups or subnets. However, you should use
IEEE 802.3 tagged VLANs with GVRP whenever possible to fully
automate VLAN registration.
3-143
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
Automatic VLAN Registration – GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration
Protocol) defines a system whereby the switch can automatically learn the
VLANs to which each end station should be assigned. If an end station (or
its network adapter) supports the IEEE 802.1Q VLAN protocol, it can be
configured to broadcast a message to your network indicating the VLAN
groups it wants to join. When this switch receives these messages, it will
automatically place the receiving port in the specified VLANs, and then
forward the message to all other ports. When the message arrives at
another switch that supports GVRP, it will also place the receiving port in
the specified VLANs, and pass the message on to all other ports. VLAN
requirements are propagated in this way throughout the network. This
allows GVRP-compliant devices to be automatically configured for VLAN
groups based solely on endstation requests.
To implement GVRP in a network, first add the host devices to the
required VLANs (using the operating system or other application
software), so that these VLANs can be propagated onto the network. For
both the edge switches attached directly to these hosts, and core switches
in the network, enable GVRP on the links between these devices. You
should also determine security boundaries in the network and disable
GVRP on the boundary ports to prevent advertisements from being
propagated, or forbid those ports from joining restricted VLANs.
Note: If you have host devices that do not support GVRP, you should
configure static or untagged VLANs for the switch ports
connected to these devices (as described in “Adding Static
Members to VLANs (VLAN Index)” on page 3-151). But you can
still enable GVRP on these edge switches, as well as on the core
switches in the network.
3-144
VLAN CONFIGURATION
Port-based VLAN
2
1
9
10 11
3
4
5
13
12
6
15 16
14
7
8
18
19
Forwarding Tagged/Untagged Frames
If you want to create a small port-based VLAN for devices attached
directly to a single switch, you can assign ports to the same untagged
VLAN. However, to participate in a VLAN group that crosses several
switches, you should create a VLAN for that group and enable tagging on
all ports.
Ports can be assigned to multiple tagged or untagged VLANs. Each port
on the switch is therefore capable of passing tagged or untagged frames.
When forwarding a frame from this switch along a path that contains any
VLAN-aware devices, the switch should include VLAN tags. When
forwarding a frame from this switch along a path that does not contain any
VLAN-aware devices (including the destination host), the switch must first
strip off the VLAN tag before forwarding the frame. When the switch
receives a tagged frame, it will pass this frame onto the VLAN(s) indicated
by the frame tag. However, when this switch receives an untagged frame
from a VLAN-unaware device, it first decides where to forward the frame,
and then inserts a VLAN tag reflecting the ingress port’s default VID.
3-145
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
Enabling or Disabling GVRP (Global Setting)
GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP) defines a way for switches to
exchange VLAN information in order to register VLAN members on
ports across the network. VLANs are dynamically configured based on
join messages issued by host devices and propagated throughout the
network. GVRP must be enabled to permit automatic VLAN registration,
and to support VLANs which extend beyond the local switch.
(Default: Disabled)
Web – Click VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, GVRP Status. Enable or disable
GVRP, and click Apply.
Figure 3-60 Enabling GVRP
CLI – This example enables GVRP for the switch.
Console(config)#bridge-ext gvrp
Console(config)#
4-217
Displaying Basic VLAN Information
The VLAN Basic Information page displays basic information on the
VLAN type supported by the switch.
Field Attributes
•
VLAN Version Number11 – The VLAN version used by this switch
as specified in the IEEE 802.1Q standard.
•
Maximum VLAN ID – Maximum VLAN ID recognized by this
switch.
•
Maximum Number of Supported VLANs – Maximum number of
VLANs that can be configured on this switch.
11. Web Only.
3-146
VLAN CONFIGURATION
Web – Click VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, Basic Information.
Figure 3-61 VLAN Basic Information
CLI – Enter the following command.
Console#show bridge-ext
Max support vlan numbers:
Max support vlan ID:
Extended multicast filtering services:
Static entry individual port:
VLAN learning:
Configurable PVID tagging:
Local VLAN capable:
Traffic classes:
Global GVRP status:
GMRP:
Console#
4-218
255
4094
No
Yes
IVL
Yes
No
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Displaying Current VLANs
The VLAN Current Table shows the current port members of each
VLAN and whether or not the port supports VLAN tagging. Ports
assigned to a large VLAN group that crosses several switches should use
VLAN tagging. However, if you just want to create a small port-based
VLAN for one or two switches, you can disable tagging.
Command Attributes (Web)
•
VLAN ID – ID of configured VLAN (1-4094).
•
Up Time at Creation – Time this VLAN was created (i.e., System Up
Time).
•
Status – Shows how this VLAN was added to the switch.
- Dynamic GVRP: Automatically learned via GVRP.
- Permanent: Added as a static entry.
3-147
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
•
Egress Ports – Shows all the VLAN port members.
•
Untagged Ports – Shows the untagged VLAN port members.
Web – Click VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, Current Table. Select any ID from
the scroll-down list.
Figure 3-62 Displaying Current VLANs
Command Attributes (CLI)
3-148
•
VLAN – ID of configured VLAN (1-4094).
•
Type – Shows how this VLAN was added to the switch.
- Dynamic: Automatically learned via GVRP.
- Static: Added as a static entry.
•
Name – Name of the VLAN (1 to 32 characters).
•
Status – Shows if this VLAN is enabled or disabled.
- Active: VLAN is operational.
- Suspend: VLAN is suspended; i.e., does not pass packets.
•
Ports / Channel groups – Shows the VLAN interface members.
VLAN CONFIGURATION
CLI – Current VLAN information can be displayed with the following
command.
Console#show vlan id 1
Vlan ID:
1
Type:
Static
Name:
DefaultVlan
Status:
Active
Ports/Port Channel:
Eth1/ 1(S) Eth1/ 2(S)
Eth1/ 6(S) Eth1/ 7(S)
Eth1/11(S) Eth1/12(S)
Eth1/16(S) Eth1/17(S)
Eth1/21(S) Eth1/22(S)
Eth1/26(S) Eth1/27(S)
Eth1/31(S) Eth1/32(S)
Eth1/36(S) Eth1/37(S)
Eth1/41(S) Eth1/42(S)
Eth1/46(S) Eth1/47(S)
Eth1/51(S) Eth1/52(S)
Console#
4-208
Eth1/ 3(S)
Eth1/ 8(S)
Eth1/13(S)
Eth1/18(S)
Eth1/23(S)
Eth1/28(S)
Eth1/33(S)
Eth1/38(S)
Eth1/43(S)
Eth1/48(S)
Eth1/ 4(S)
Eth1/ 9(S)
Eth1/14(S)
Eth1/19(S)
Eth1/24(S)
Eth1/29(S)
Eth1/34(S)
Eth1/39(S)
Eth1/44(S)
Eth1/49(S)
Eth1/ 5(S)
Eth1/10(S)
Eth1/15(S)
Eth1/20(S)
Eth1/25(S)
Eth1/30(S)
Eth1/35(S)
Eth1/40(S)
Eth1/45(S)
Eth1/50(S)
Creating VLANs
Use the VLAN Static List to create or remove VLAN groups. To
propagate information about VLAN groups used on this switch to
external network devices, you must specify a VLAN ID for each of these
groups.
Command Attributes
•
Current – Lists all the current VLAN groups created for this system.
Up to 255 VLAN groups can be defined. VLAN 1 is the default
untagged VLAN.
•
New – Allows you to specify the name and numeric identifier for a
new VLAN group. (The VLAN name is only used for management on
this system; it is not added to the VLAN tag.)
•
VLAN ID – ID of configured VLAN (1-4094, no leading zeroes).
•
VLAN Name – Name of the VLAN (1 to 32 characters).
•
Status (Web) – Enables or disables the specified VLAN.
- Enabled: VLAN is operational.
- Disabled: VLAN is suspended; i.e., does not pass packets.
3-149
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
•
State (CLI) – Enables or disables the specified VLAN.
- Active: VLAN is operational.
- Suspend: VLAN is suspended; i.e., does not pass packets.
•
Add – Adds a new VLAN group to the current list.
•
Remove – Removes a VLAN group from the current list. If any port
is assigned to this group as untagged, it will be reassigned to VLAN
group 1 as untagged.
Web – Click VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, Static List. To create a new VLAN,
enter the VLAN ID and VLAN name, mark the Enable checkbox to
activate the VLAN, and then click Add.
Figure 3-63 Configuring a VLAN Static List
3-150
VLAN CONFIGURATION
CLI – This example creates a new VLAN.
Console(config)#vlan database
Console(config-vlan)#vlan 2 name R&D media ethernet state active
Console(config-vlan)#end
Console#show vlan
Vlan ID:
1
Type:
Static
Name:
DefaultVlan
Status:
Active
Ports/Channel groups: Eth1/ 1(S) Eth1/ 2(S) Eth1/ 3(S) Eth1/ 4(S)
Eth1/ 6(S) Eth1/ 7(S) Eth1/ 8(S) Eth1/ 9(S)
Eth1/11(S) Eth1/12(S) Eth1/13(S) Eth1/14(S)
Eth1/16(S) Eth1/17(S) Eth1/18(S) Eth1/19(S)
Eth1/21(S) Eth1/22(S) Eth1/23(S) Eth1/24(S)
Eth1/26(S) Eth1/27(S) Eth1/28(S) Eth1/29(S)
Eth1/31(S) Eth1/32(S) Eth1/33(S) Eth1/34(S)
Eth1/36(S) Eth1/37(S) Eth1/38(S) Eth1/39(S)
Eth1/41(S) Eth1/42(S) Eth1/43(S) Eth1/44(S)
Eth1/46(S) Eth1/47(S) Eth1/48(S) Eth1/49(S)
Eth1/51(S) Eth1/52(S)
Vlan ID:
Type:
Name:
Status:
Ports/Port Channel:
4-198
4-199
4-208
Eth1/ 5(S)
Eth1/10(S)
Eth1/15(S)
Eth1/20(S)
Eth1/25(S)
Eth1/30(S)
Eth1/35(S)
Eth1/40(S)
Eth1/45(S)
Eth1/50(S)
2
Static
R&D
Active
Console(config-vlan)#
Adding Static Members to VLANs (VLAN Index)
Use the VLAN Static Table to configure port members for the selected
VLAN index. Assign ports as tagged if they are connected to 802.1Q
VLAN compliant devices, or untagged they are not connected to any
VLAN-aware devices. Or configure a port as forbidden to prevent the
switch from automatically adding it to a VLAN via the GVRP protocol.
Notes: 1. You can also use the VLAN Static Membership by Port page
to configure VLAN groups based on the port index
(page 3-153). However, note that this configuration page can
only add ports to a VLAN as tagged members.
2. VLAN 1 is the default untagged VLAN containing all ports on
the switch, and can only be modified by first reassigning the
default port VLAN ID as described under “Configuring
VLAN Behavior for Interfaces” on page 3-155.
3-151
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
Command Attributes
•
VLAN – ID of configured VLAN (1-4094).
•
Name – Name of the VLAN (1 to 32 characters).
•
Status – Enables or disables the specified VLAN.
- Enable: VLAN is operational.
- Disable: VLAN is suspended; i.e., does not pass packets.
•
Port – Port identifier.
•
Membership Type – Select VLAN membership for each interface by
marking the appropriate radio button for a port or trunk:
- Tagged: Interface is a member of the VLAN. All packets
transmitted by the port will be tagged, that is, carry a tag and
therefore carry VLAN or CoS information.
- Untagged: Interface is a member of the VLAN. All packets
transmitted by the port will be untagged, that is, not carry a tag and
therefore not carry VLAN or CoS information. Note that an
interface must be assigned to at least one group as an untagged port.
- Forbidden: Interface is forbidden from automatically joining the
VLAN via GVRP. For more information, see “Automatic VLAN
Registration” on page 3-144.
- None: Interface is not a member of the VLAN. Packets associated
with this VLAN will not be transmitted by the interface.
•
3-152
Trunk Member – Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk. To add a
trunk to the selected VLAN, use the last table on the VLAN Static
Table page.
VLAN CONFIGURATION
Web – Click VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, Static Table. Select a VLAN ID from
the scroll-down list. Modify the VLAN name and status if required. Select
the membership type by marking the appropriate radio button in the list of
ports or trunks. Click Apply.
Figure 3-64 Configuring a VLAN Static Table
CLI – The following example adds tagged and untagged ports to
VLAN 2.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#switchport allowed vlan add 2 tagged
Console(config-if)#exit
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/2
Console(config-if)#switchport allowed vlan add 2 untagged
Console(config-if)#exit
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/13
Console(config-if)#switchport allowed vlan add 2 tagged
4-145
4-206
Adding Static Members to VLANs (Port Index)
Use the VLAN Static Membership by Port menu to assign VLAN groups
to the selected interface as a tagged member.
Command Attributes
•
Interface – Port or trunk identifier.
•
Member – VLANs for which the selected interface is a tagged
member.
3-153
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
•
Non-Member – VLANs for which the selected interface is not a
tagged member.
Web – Open VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, Static Membership by Port. Select an
interface from the scroll-down box (Port or Trunk). Click Query to display
membership information for the interface. Select a VLAN ID, and then
click Add to add the interface as a tagged member, or click Remove to
remove the interface. After configuring VLAN membership for each
interface, click Apply.
Figure 3-65 VLAN Static Membership by Port
CLI – This example adds Port 3 to VLAN 1 as a tagged port, and removes
Port 3 from VLAN 2.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/3
Console(config-if)#switchport allowed vlan add 1 tagged
Console(config-if)#switchport allowed vlan remove 2
3-154
4-145
4-206
VLAN CONFIGURATION
Configuring VLAN Behavior for Interfaces
You can configure VLAN behavior for specific interfaces, including the
default VLAN identifier (PVID), accepted frame types, ingress filtering,
GVRP status, and GARP timers.
Command Usage
•
GVRP – GARP VLAN Registration Protocol defines a way for
switches to exchange VLAN information in order to automatically
register VLAN members on interfaces across the network.
•
GARP – Group Address Registration Protocol is used by GVRP to
register or deregister client attributes for client services within a
bridged LAN. The default values for the GARP timers are
independent of the media access method or data rate. These values
should not be changed unless you are experiencing difficulties with
GVRP registration/deregistration.
Command Attributes
•
PVID – VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames received on the
interface. (Default: 1)
If an interface is not a member of VLAN 1 and you assign its PVID to
this VLAN, the interface will automatically be added to VLAN 1 as an
untagged member. For all other VLANs, an interface must first be
configured as an untagged member before you can assign its PVID to
that group.
•
•
Acceptable Frame Type – Sets the interface to accept all frame types,
including tagged or untagged frames, or only tagged frames. When set
to receive all frame types, any received frames that are untagged are
assigned to the default VLAN. (Options: All, Tagged; Default: All)
Ingress Filtering – Determines how to process frames tagged for
VLANs for which the ingress port is not a member. (Default:
Disabled)
- Ingress filtering only affects tagged frames.
3-155
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
- If ingress filtering is disabled and a port receives frames tagged for
VLANs for which it is not a member, these frames will be flooded
to all other ports (except for those VLANs explicitly forbidden on
this port).
- If ingress filtering is enabled and a port receives frames tagged for
VLANs for which it is not a member, these frames will be discarded.
- Ingress filtering does not affect VLAN independent BPDU frames,
such as GVRP or STP. However, they do affect VLAN dependent
BPDU frames, such as GMRP.
•
GVRP Status – Enables/disables GVRP for the interface. GVRP
must be globally enabled for the switch before this setting can take
effect. (See “Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities” on page 3-15.)
When disabled, any GVRP packets received on this port will be
discarded and no GVRP registrations will be propagated from other
ports. (Default: Disabled)
•
GARP Join Timer12 – The interval between transmitting requests/
queries to participate in a VLAN group.
(Range: 20-1000 centiseconds; Default: 20)
•
GARP Leave Timer12 – The interval a port waits before leaving a
VLAN group. This time should be set to more than twice the join time.
This ensures that after a Leave or LeaveAll message has been issued,
the applicants can rejoin before the port actually leaves the group.
(Range: 60-3000 centiseconds; Default: 60)
•
GARP LeaveAll Timer12 – The interval between sending out a
LeaveAll query message for VLAN group participants and the port
leaving the group. This interval should be considerably larger than the
Leave Time to minimize the amount of traffic generated by nodes
rejoining the group.
(Range: 500-18000 centiseconds; Default: 1000)
12. Timer settings must follow this rule: 2 x (join timer) < leave timer < leaveAll timer
3-156
VLAN CONFIGURATION
•
Mode – Indicates VLAN membership mode for an interface.
(Default: Hybrid)
- 1Q Trunk – Specifies a port as an end-point for a VLAN trunk. A
trunk is a direct link between two switches, so the port transmits
tagged frames that identify the source VLAN. Note that frames
belonging to the port’s default VLAN (i.e., associated with the
PVID) are also transmitted as tagged frames.
- Hybrid – Specifies a hybrid VLAN interface. The port may transmit
tagged or untagged frames.
•
Trunk Member – Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk. To add a
trunk to the selected VLAN, use the last table on the VLAN Static
Table page.
Web – Click VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, Port Configuration or VLAN Trunk
Configuration. Fill in the required settings for each interface, click Apply.
Figure 3-66 VLAN Port Configuration
3-157
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
CLI – This example sets port 3 to accept only tagged frames, assigns
PVID 3 as the native VLAN ID, enables GVRP, sets the GARP timers,
and then sets the switchport mode to hybrid.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/3
Console(config-if)#switchport acceptable-frame-types tagged
Console(config-if)#switchport ingress-filtering
Console(config-if)#switchport native vlan 3
Console(config-if)#switchport gvrp
Console(config-if)#garp timer join 20
Console(config-if)#garp timer leave 90
Console(config-if)#garp timer leaveall 2000
Console(config-if)#switchport mode hybrid
Console(config-if)#
4-145
4-203
4-204
4-205
4-219
4-220
4-220
4-220
4-202
Private VLANs
Private VLANs provide port-based security and isolation between ports
within the assigned VLAN. This switch supports three types of private
VLAN ports: promiscuous, isolated, and community ports. A promiscuous
port can communicate with all interfaces within a private VLAN. An
isolated port can only communicate with promiscuous ports within its own
VLAN. Community ports can only communicate with other ports in their
own community VLAN, and with their designated promiscuous ports.
(Note that private VLANs and normal VLANs can exist simultaneously
within the same switch.)
Each private VLAN consists of two components: a primary VLAN and
one or more community VLANs. A primary VLAN allows traffic to pass
between promiscuous ports, and between promiscuous ports and
community ports subordinate to the primary VLAN. A community VLAN
conveys traffic between community ports, and from the community ports
to their associated promiscuous ports. Multiple primary VLANs can be
configured on this switch, and multiple community VLANs can be
configured within each primary VLAN.
3-158
VLAN CONFIGURATION
To configure private VLANs, follow these steps:
1. Use the Private VLAN Configuration menu (page 3-161) to designate
one or more isolated or community VLANs, and the primary VLAN
that will channel traffic outside of the VLAN groups.
2. Use the Private VLAN Association menu (page 3-162) to map the
secondary (i.e., isolate and community) VLAN(s) to the primary
VLAN.
3. Use the Private VLAN Port Configuration menu (page 3-165) to set
the port type to promiscuous (i.e., having access to all ports in the
primary VLAN), isolated (i.e., having access only to promiscuous ports
in its own VLAN), or host (i.e., having access restricted to community
VLAN members, and channeling all other traffic through a
promiscuous port). Then assign any promiscuous ports to a primary
VLAN and any host ports a secondary VLAN (i.e., community
VLAN).
Displaying Current Private VLANs
The Private VLAN Information page displays information on the private
VLANs configured on the switch, including primary and community
VLANs, and their associated interfaces.
Command Attributes
•
VLAN ID – ID of configured VLAN (1-4094).
•
Primary VLAN – The primary VLAN with which the selected VLAN
is associated. (Note that this displays as VLAN 0 if the selected VLAN
is itself a primary VLAN.)
•
Ports List – The list of ports (and assigned type) in the selected private
VLAN.
3-159
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
Web – Click VLAN, Private VLAN, Information. Select the desired port
from the VLAN ID drop-down menu.
Figure 3-67 Private VLAN Information
CLI – This example shows the switch configured with primary VLAN 5
and secondary VLAN 6. Port 3 has been configured as a promiscuous port
and mapped to VLAN 5, while ports 4 and 5 have been configured as a
host ports and are associated with VLAN 6. This means that traffic for
port 4 and 5 can only pass through port 3.
Console#show vlan private-vlan
Primary
Secondary
Type
-------- ----------- ---------5
primary
5
6
community
Console#
3-160
4-216
Interfaces
-------------------------------Eth1/ 3
Eth1/ 4 Eth1/ 5
VLAN CONFIGURATION
Configuring Private VLANs
The Private VLAN Configuration page is used to create/remove primary
or community VLANs.
Command Attributes
•
VLAN ID – ID of configured VLAN (1-4094).
•
Type – There are three types of VLANs within a private VLAN:
- Primary VLANs – Conveys traffic between promiscuous ports,
and to community ports within secondary VLANs.
- Community VLANs - Conveys traffic between community ports,
and to their associated promiscuous ports.
- Isolated VLANs – Conveys traffic only between the VLAN’s
isolated ports and promiscuous ports. Traffic between isolated ports
within the VLAN is blocked.
- Current – Displays a list of the currently configured VLANs.
Web – Click VLAN, Private VLAN, Configuration. Enter the VLAN ID
number, select Primary, Isolated or Community type, then click Add. To
remove a private VLAN from the switch, highlight an entry in the Current
list box and then click Remove. Note that all member ports must be
removed from the VLAN before it can be deleted.
Figure 3-68 Private VLAN Configuration
3-161
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
CLI – This example configures VLAN 5 as a primary VLAN, and VLAN
6 as a community VLAN and VLAN 7 as an isolated VLAN.
Console(config)#vlan database
Console(config-vlan)#private-vlan 5 primary
Console(config-vlan)#private-vlan 6 community
Console(config-vlan)#private-vlan 7 isolated
Console(config-vlan)#
4-198
4-211
Associating VLANs
Each community or isolated VLAN must be associated with a primary
VLAN.
Command Attributes
•
Primary VLAN ID – ID of primary VLAN (1-4094).
•
Association – Community or isolated VLANs associated with the
selected primary VLAN.
•
Non-Association – Community or isolated VLANs not associated
with the selected primary VLAN.
Web – Click VLAN, Private VLAN, Association. Select the required
primary VLAN from the scroll-down box, highlight one or more
community VLANs in the Non-Association list box, and click Add to
associate these entries with the selected primary VLAN. (A community
VLAN can only be associated with one primary VLAN.)
Figure 3-69 Private VLAN Association
3-162
VLAN CONFIGURATION
CLI – This example associates community VLANs 6 and 7 with primary
VLAN 5.
Console(config)#vlan database
Console(config-vlan)#private-vlan 5 association 6
Console(config-vlan)#private-vlan 5 association 7
Console(config-vlan)#
4-198
4-212
4-212
Displaying Private VLAN Interface Information
Use the Private VLAN Port Information and Private VLAN Trunk
Information menus to display the interfaces associated with private
VLANs.
Command Attributes
•
Port/Trunk – The switch interface.
•
PVLAN Port Type – Displays private VLAN port types.
- Normal – The port is not configured in a private VLAN.
- Host – The port is a community port and can only communicate
with other ports in its own community VLAN, and with the
designated promiscuous port(s).
- Isolated – The port is an isolated port that can only communicate
with promiscuous ports within its own isolated VLAN.
- Promiscuous – A promiscuous port can communicate with all the
interfaces within a private VLAN.
•
Primary VLAN – Conveys traffic between promiscuous ports, and
between promiscuous ports and community ports within the
associated secondary VLANs.
•
Community VLAN – A community VLAN conveys traffic between
community ports, and from community ports to their designated
promiscuous ports.
3-163
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
•
Isolated VLAN – Conveys traffic only between the VLAN’s isolated
ports and promiscuous ports. Traffic between isolated ports within the
VLAN is blocked.
•
Trunk – The trunk identifier. (Port Information only)
Web – Click VLAN, Private VLAN, Port Information or Trunk
Information.
Figure 3-70 Private VLAN Port Information
3-164
VLAN CONFIGURATION
CLI – This example shows the switch configured with primary VLAN 5
and community VLAN 6. Port 3 has been configured as a promiscuous
port and mapped to VLAN 5, while ports 4 and 5 have been configured as
host ports and associated with VLAN 6. This means that traffic for port 4
and 5 can only pass through port 3.
Console#show vlan private-vlan
Primary
Secondary
Type
-------- ----------- ---------5
primary
5
6
community
Console#
4-216
Interfaces
-----------------------------Eth1/ 3
Eth1/ 4 Eth1/ 5
Configuring Private VLAN Interfaces
Use the Private VLAN Port Configuration and Private VLAN Trunk
Configuration menus to set the private VLAN interface type, and associate
the interfaces with a private VLAN.
Command Attributes
•
Port/Trunk – The switch interface.
•
PVLAN Port Type – Sets the private VLAN port types.
- Normal – The port is not configured into a private VLAN.
- Host – The port is a community port or an isolated port. A
community port can communicate with other ports in its own
community VLAN and with the designated promiscuous port(s). An
isolated port can only communicate with the designated
promiscuous port(s); it cannot communicate with other hosts in its
own isolated VLAN.
- Promiscuous – A promiscuous port can communicate with all
interfaces within a private VLAN.
•
Primary VLAN – Conveys traffic between promiscuous ports, and
between promiscuous ports and community ports within the
associated secondary VLANs. If PVLAN type is “Promiscuous,” then
3-165
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
specify the associated primary VLAN. For “Host” type, the Primary
VLAN displayed is the one to which the selected secondary VLAN has
been associated.
•
Community VLAN – A community VLAN conveys traffic between
community ports, and from community ports to their designated
promiscuous ports. If PVLAN Port Type is “Host,” then specify the
associated secondary VLAN.
•
Isolated VLAN – Conveys traffic only between the VLAN’s isolated
ports and promiscuous ports. Traffic between isolated ports within the
VLAN is blocked. If PVLAN Port Type is “Isolated,” then specify the
associated isolated VLAN.
Web – Click VLAN, Private VLAN, Port Configuration or Trunk
Configuration. Set the PVLAN Port Type for each port that will join a
private VLAN. For promiscuous ports, set the associated primary VLAN.
For host ports, set the associated secondary VLAN. For isolated ports, set
the associated isolated VLAN. After all the ports have been configured,
click Apply.
Figure 3-71 Private VLAN Port Configuration
3-166
CLASS OF SERVICE CONFIGURATION
CLI – This example shows the switch configured with primary VLAN 5
and secondary VLAN 6. Port 3 has been configured as a promiscuous port
and mapped to VLAN 5, while ports 4 and 5 have been configured as a
host ports and associated with VLAN 6. This means that traffic for port 4
and 5 can only pass through port 3.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/3
Console(config-if)#switchport mode private-vlan promiscuous
Console(config-if)#switchport private-vlan mapping 5
Console(config-if)#exit
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/4
Console(config-if)#switchport mode private-vlan host
Console(config-if)#switchport private-vlan host-association 6
Console(config-if)#exit
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5
Console(config-if)#switchport mode private-vlan host
Console(config-if)#switchport private-vlan host-association 6
Console(config-if)#
4-213
4-215
4-214
4-214
Class of Service Configuration
Class of Service (CoS) allows you to specify which data packets have
greater precedence when traffic is buffered in the switch due to
congestion. This switch supports CoS with four priority queues for each
port. Data packets in a port’s high-priority queue will be transmitted before
those in the lower-priority queues. You can set the default priority for each
interface, and configure the mapping of frame priority tags to the switch’s
priority queues.
Layer 2 Queue Settings
Setting the Default Priority for Interfaces
You can specify the default port priority for each interface on the switch.
All untagged packets entering the switch are tagged with the specified
default port priority, and then sorted into the appropriate priority queue at
the output port.
3-167
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
Command Usage
•
This switch provides four priority queues for each port. It uses
Weighted Round Robin to prevent head-of-queue blockage.
•
The default priority applies for an untagged frame received on a port
set to accept all frame types (i.e, receives both untagged and tagged
frames). This priority does not apply to IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tagged
frames. If the incoming frame is an IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tagged
frame, the IEEE 802.1p User Priority bits will be used.
•
If the output port is an untagged member of the associated VLAN,
these frames are stripped of all VLAN tags prior to transmission.
Command Attributes
•
Default Priority13 – The priority that is assigned to untagged frames
received on the specified interface. (Range: 0-7, Default: 0)
•
Number of Egress Traffic Classes – The number of queue buffers
provided for each port.
Web – Click Priority, Default Port Priority or Default Trunk Priority.
Modify the default priority for any interface, then click Apply.
Figure 3-72 Port Priority Configuration
13. CLI displays this information as “Priority for untagged traffic.”
3-168
CLASS OF SERVICE CONFIGURATION
CLI – This example assigns a default priority of 5 to port 3.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/3
Console(config-if)#switchport priority default 5
Console(config-if)#end
Console#show interfaces switchport ethernet 1/3
Information of Eth 1/3
Broadcast threshold:
Disabled
LACP status:
Disabled
Ingress rate limit: disable, Level: 30
Egress rate limit: disable, Level: 30
VLAN membership mode:
Hybrid
Ingress rule:
Enabled
Acceptable frame type:
Tagged frames only
Native VLAN:
1
Priority for untagged traffic: 5
GVRP status:
Disabled
Allowed VLAN:
1(u),
Forbidden VLAN:
Private-VLAN mode:
NONE
Private-VLAN host-association: NONE
Private-VLAN mapping:
NONE
Console#
4-145
4-224
4-156
Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues
This switch processes Class of Service (CoS) priority tagged traffic by
using four priority queues for each port, with service schedules based on
strict or Weighted Round Robin (WRR). Up to eight separate traffic
priorities are defined in IEEE 802.1p. The default priority levels are
assigned according to recommendations in the IEEE 802.1p standard as
shown in the following table.
Table 3-10 Egress Queue Priority Mapping
Queue
0
1
2
3
Priority
1,2
0,3
4,5
6,7
1,2
Q0
0,3
Q1
4,5
Q2
6,7
Q3
Serviced
by weighted
round robin
3-169
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
The priority levels recommended in the IEEE 802.1p standard for various
network applications are shown in the following table. However, you can
map the priority levels to the switch’s output queues in any way that
benefits application traffic for your own network.
Table 3-11 CoS Priority Levels
Priority Level
Traffic Type
1
Background
2
(Spare)
0 (default)
Best Effort
3
Excellent Effort
4
Controlled Load
5
Video, less than 100 milliseconds latency and jitter
6
Voice, less than 10 milliseconds latency and jitter
7
Network Control
Command Attributes
•
Priority – CoS value. (Range: 0-7, where 7 is the highest priority)
•
Traffic Class14 – Output queue buffer. (Range: 0-3, where 3 is the
highest CoS priority queue)
14. CLI shows Queue ID.
3-170
CLASS OF SERVICE CONFIGURATION
Web – Click Priority, Traffic Classes. Assign priorities to the traffic classes
(i.e., output queues), then click Apply.
Figure 3-73 Traffic Classes
CLI – The following example shows how to change the CoS assignments.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#queue cos-map 0 0
Console(config-if)#queue cos-map 1 1
Console(config-if)#queue cos-map 2 2
Console(config-if)#end
Console#show queue cos-map ethernet 1/1
Information of Eth 1/1
CoS Value
: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Priority Queue: 0 1 2 1 2 2 3 3
Console#
4-145
4-226
4-228
Note: Mapping specific values for CoS priorities is implemented as an
interface configuration command, but any changes will apply to
the all interfaces on the switch.
3-171
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
Selecting the Queue Mode
You can set the switch to service the queues based on a strict rule that
requires all traffic in a higher priority queue to be processed before lower
priority queues are serviced, or use Weighted Round-Robin (WRR)
queuing that specifies a relative weight of each queue. WRR uses a
predefined relative weight for each queue that determines the percentage
of service time the switch services each queue before moving on to the
next queue. This prevents the head-of-line blocking that can occur with
strict priority queuing.
Command Attributes
•
WRR - Weighted Round-Robin shares bandwidth at the egress ports
by using scheduling weights 1, 2, 4, 6 for queues 0 through 3
respectively. (This is the default selection.)
•
Strict - Services the egress queues in sequential order, transmitting all
traffic in the higher priority queues before servicing lower priority
queues.
Web – Click Priority, Queue Mode. Select Strict or WRR, then click Apply.
Figure 3-74 Queue Mode
CLI – The following sets the queue mode to strict priority service mode.
Console(config)#queue mode wrr
Console(config)#exit
Console#show queue mode
Queue mode: wrr
Console#
3-172
4-223
4-227
CLASS OF SERVICE CONFIGURATION
Setting the Service Weight for Traffic Classes
This switch uses the Weighted Round Robin (WRR) algorithm to
determine the frequency at which it services each priority queue. As
described in “Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues” on page 3-169, the
traffic classes are mapped to one of the four egress queues provided for
each port. You can assign a weight to each of these queues (and thereby to
the corresponding traffic priorities). This weight sets the frequency at
which each queue will be polled for service, and subsequently affects the
response time for software applications assigned a specific priority value.
Command Attributes
•
WRR Setting Table15 – Displays a list of weights for each traffic class
(i.e., queue).
•
Weight Value – Set a new weight for the selected traffic class.
However, note that Queue 0 is fixed at a weight of 1, and cannot be
configured. (Range: 1-31)
Web – Click Priority, Queue Scheduling. Highlight a traffic class (i.e.,
output queue), enter a weight, then click Apply.
Figure 3-75 Configuring Queue Scheduling
15. CLI shows Queue ID.
3-173
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
CLI – The following example shows how to assign WRR weights to each
of the priority queues.
Console(config)#queue bandwidth 6 9 12
Console(config)#exit
Console#show queue bandwidth
Queue ID Weight
-------- -----0
1
1
6
2
9
3
12
Console
4-225
4-227
Layer 3/4 Priority Settings
Mapping Layer 3/4 Priorities to CoS Values
This switch supports several common methods of prioritizing layer 3/4
traffic to meet application requirements. Traffic priorities can be specified
in the IP header of a frame, using the priority bits in the Type of Service
(ToS) octet or the number of the TCP port. If priority bits are used, the
ToS octet may contain three bits for IP Precedence or six bits for
Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) service. When these services
are enabled, the priorities are mapped to a Class of Service value by the
switch, and the traffic then sent to the corresponding output queue.
Because different priority information may be contained in the traffic, this
switch maps priority values to the output queues in the following manner:
3-174
•
The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port Priority, IP Precedence
or DSCP Priority, and then Default Port Priority.
•
IP Precedence and DSCP Priority cannot both be enabled. Enabling
one of these priority types will automatically disable the other.
CLASS OF SERVICE CONFIGURATION
Selecting IP Precedence/DSCP Priority
The switch allows you to choose between using IP Precedence or DSCP
priority. Select one of the methods or disable this feature.
Command Attributes
•
Disabled – Disables both priority services. (This is the default setting.)
•
IP Precedence – Maps layer 3/4 priorities using IP Precedence.
•
IP DSCP – Maps layer 3/4 priorities using Differentiated Services
Code Point Mapping.
Web – Click Priority, IP Precedence/DSCP Priority Status. Select
Disabled, IP Precedence or IP DSCP from the scroll-down menu, then
click Apply.
Figure 3-76 IP Precedence/DSCP Priority Status
CLI – The following example enables IP Precedence service on the
switch.
Console(config)#map ip precedence
Console(config)#
4-229
Mapping IP Precedence
The Type of Service (ToS) octet in the IPv4 header includes three
precedence bits defining eight different priority levels ranging from highest
priority for network control packets to lowest priority for routine traffic.
The default IP Precedence values are mapped one-to-one to Class of
Service values (i.e., Precedence value 0 maps to CoS value 0, and so forth).
Bits 6 and 7 are used for network control, and the other bits for various
application types. ToS bits are defined in the following table.
3-175
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
Table 3-12 Mapping IP Precedence
Priority Level
Traffic Type
Priority Level Traffic Type
7
Network Control
3
6
Internetwork Control
2
Immediate
5
Critical
1
Priority
4
Flash Override
0
Routine
Flash
Command Attributes
•
IP Precedence Priority Table – Shows the IP Precedence to CoS
map.
•
Class of Service Value – Maps a CoS value to the selected IP
Precedence value. Note that “0” represents low priority and “7”
represent high priority.
Web – Click Priority, IP Precedence Priority. Select an entry from the IP
Precedence Priority Table, enter a value in the Class of Service Value field,
and then click Apply.
Figure 3-77 Mapping IP Precedence Priority Values
3-176
CLASS OF SERVICE CONFIGURATION
CLI – The following example globally enables IP Precedence service on
the switch, maps IP Precedence value 1 to CoS value 0 (on port 1), and
then displays the IP Precedence settings.
Console(config)#map ip precedence
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#map ip precedence 1 cos 0
Console(config-if)#end
Console#show map ip precedence ethernet 1/1
Precedence mapping status: enabled
4-229
4-145
4-232
4-236
Port
Precedence COS
--------- ---------- --Eth 1/ 1
0
0
Eth 1/ 1
1
0
Eth 1/ 1
2
2
Eth 1/ 1
3
3
Eth 1/ 1
4
4
Eth 1/ 1
5
5
Eth 1/ 1
6
6
Eth 1/ 1
7
7
Console#
Note: Mapping specific values for IP Precedence is implemented as an
interface configuration command, but any changes will apply to
the all interfaces on the switch.
Mapping DSCP Priority
The DSCP is six bits wide, allowing coding for up to 64 different
forwarding behaviors. The DSCP replaces the ToS bits, but it retains
backward compatibility with the three precedence bits so that non-DSCP
compliant, ToS-enabled devices, will not conflict with the DSCP mapping.
Based on network policies, different kinds of traffic can be marked for
different kinds of forwarding. The DSCP default values are defined in the
following table. Note that all the DSCP values that are not specified are
mapped to CoS value 0.
Table 3-13 Mapping DSCP Priority Values
IP DSCP Value
CoS Value
0
0
8
1
10, 12, 14, 16
2
3-177
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
Table 3-13 Mapping DSCP Priority Values (Continued)
IP DSCP Value
CoS Value
18, 20, 22, 24
3
26, 28, 30, 32, 34, 36
4
38, 40, 42
5
48
6
46, 56
7
Command Attributes
•
DSCP Priority Table – Shows the DSCP Priority to CoS map.
•
Class of Service Value – Maps a CoS value to the selected DSCP
Priority value. Note that “0” represents low priority and “7” represent
high priority.
Web – Click Priority, IP DSCP Priority. Select an entry from the DSCP
table, enter a value in the Class of Service Value field, then click Apply.
Figure 3-78 Mapping IP DSCP Priority Values
3-178
CLASS OF SERVICE CONFIGURATION
CLI – The following example globally enables DSCP Priority service on
the switch, maps DSCP value 0 to CoS value 1 (on port 1), and then
displays the DSCP Priority settings.
Console(config)#map ip dscp
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#map ip dscp 1 cos 0
Console(config-if)#end
Console#show map ip dscp ethernet 1/1
DSCP mapping status: enabled
4-233
4-145
4-233
4-237
Port
DSCP COS
--------- ---- --Eth 1/ 1
0
0
Eth 1/ 1
1
0
Eth 1/ 1
2
0
Eth 1/ 1
3
0
.
.
.
Eth 1/ 1
61
0
Eth 1/ 1
62
0
Eth 1/ 1
63
0
Console#
Note: Mapping specific values for IP DSCP is implemented as an
interface configuration command, but any changes will apply to
the all interfaces on the switch.
Mapping IP Port Priority
You can also map network applications to Class of Service values based on
the IP port number (i.e., TCP/UDP port number) in the frame header.
Some of the more common TCP service ports include: HTTP: 80,
FTP: 21, Telnet: 23 and POP3: 110.
Command Attributes
•
IP Port Priority Status – Enables or disables the IP port priority.
•
IP Port Priority Table – Shows the IP port to CoS map.
•
IP Port Number (TCP/UDP) – Set a new IP port number.
•
Class of Service Value – Sets a CoS value for a new IP port. Note that
“0” represents low priority and “7” represent high priority.
3-179
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
Web – Click Priority, IP Port Priority Status. Set IP Port Priority Status to
Enabled.
Figure 3-79 IP Port Priority Status
Click Priority, IP Port Priority. Enter the port number for a network
application in the IP Port Number box and the new CoS value in the Class
of Service box, and then click Apply.
Figure 3-80 IP Port Priority
3-180
CLASS OF SERVICE CONFIGURATION
CLI – The following example globally enables IP Port Priority service on
the switch, maps HTTP traffic on port 5 to CoS value 0, and then displays
all the IP Port Priority settings for that port.
Console(config)#map ip port
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5
Console(config-if)#map ip port 80 cos 0
Console(config-if)#end
Console#show map ip port ethernet 1/5
TCP port mapping status: enabled
4-229
4-230
4-230
Port
Port no. COS
--------- -------- --Eth 1/ 5
80
0
Console#
Note: Mapping specific values for IP Port Priority is implemented as an
interface configuration command, but any changes will apply to
the all interfaces on the switch.
Mapping CoS Values to ACLs
Use the ACL CoS Mapping page to set the output queue for packets
matching an ACL rule as shown in the following table. Note that the
specified CoS value is only used to map the matching packet to an output
queue; it is not written to the packet itself. For information on mapping
the CoS values to output queues, see page 3-169.
Table 3-14 Egress Queue Priority Mapping
Queue
0
1
2
3
Priority
1,2
0,3
4,5
6,7
Command Attributes
•
Port – Port identifier.
•
Name16 – Name of ACL.
•
Type – Type of ACL (IP or MAC).
16. For information on configuring ACLs, see page 3-78.
3-181
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
•
CoS Priority – CoS value used for packets matching an IP ACL rule.
(Range: 0-7)
•
ACL CoS Priority Mapping – Displays the configured information.
Web – Click Priority, ACL CoS Priority. Enable mapping for any port,
select an ACL from the scroll-down list, then click Add.
Figure 3-81 ACL CoS Priority
CLI – This example assigns a CoS value of zero to packets matching rules
within the specified ACL on port 24.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/24
Console(config-if)#map access-list ip bill cos 0
Console(config-if)#
3-182
4-145
4-126
MULTICAST FILTERING
Multicast Filtering
Multicasting is used to support real-time
applications such as videoconferencing
or streaming audio. A multicast server
does not have to establish a separate
connection with each client. It merely
broadcasts its service to the network, and
any hosts that want to receive the
multicast register with their local
multicast switch/router. Although this
approach reduces the network overhead
required by a multicast server, the
broadcast traffic must be carefully
pruned at every multicast switch/router it
passes through to ensure that traffic is
only passed on to the hosts which
subscribed to this service.
Unicast
Flow
Multicast
Flow
This switch uses IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) to query
for any attached hosts that want to receive a specific multicast service. It
identifies the ports containing hosts requesting to join the service and
sends data out to those ports only. It then propagates the service request
up to any neighboring multicast switch/router to ensure that it will
continue to receive the multicast service. This procedure is called multicast
filtering.
The purpose of IP multicast filtering is to optimize a switched network’s
performance, so multicast packets will only be forwarded to those ports
containing multicast group hosts or multicast routers/switches, instead of
flooding traffic to all ports in the subnet (VLAN).
3-183
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
Layer 2 IGMP (Snooping and Query)
IGMP Snooping and Query – If multicast routing is not supported on
other switches in your network, you can use IGMP Snooping and Query
(page 3-184) to monitor IGMP service requests passing between multicast
clients and servers, and dynamically configure the switch ports which need
to forward multicast traffic.
Static IGMP Router Interface – If IGMP snooping cannot locate the
IGMP querier, you can manually designate a known IGMP querier (i.e., a
multicast router/switch) connected over the network to an interface on
your switch (page 3-188). This interface will then join all the current
multicast groups supported by the attached router/switch to ensure that
multicast traffic is passed to all appropriate interfaces within the switch.
Static IGMP Host Interface – For multicast applications that you need to
control more carefully, you can manually assign a multicast service to
specific interfaces on the switch (page 3-191).
Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters
You can configure the switch to forward multicast traffic intelligently.
Based on the IGMP query and report messages, the switch forwards traffic
only to the ports that request multicast traffic. This prevents the switch
from broadcasting the traffic to all ports and possibly disrupting network
performance.
Command Usage
•
3-184
IGMP Snooping – This switch can passively snoop on IGMP Query
and Report packets transferred between IP multicast routers/switches
and IP multicast host groups to identify the IP multicast group
members. It simply monitors the IGMP packets passing through it,
picks out the group registration information, and configures the
multicast filters accordingly.
MULTICAST FILTERING
•
IGMP Querier – A router, or multicast-enabled switch, can
periodically ask their hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic. If
there is more than one router/switch on the LAN performing IP
multicasting, one of these devices is elected “querier” and assumes the
role of querying the LAN for group members. It then propagates the
service requests on to any upstream multicast switch/router to ensure
that it will continue to receive the multicast service.
Note: Multicast routers use this information, along with a multicast
routing protocol such as DVMRP or PIM, to support IP
multicasting across the Internet.
Command Attributes
•
IGMP Status — When enabled, the switch will monitor network
traffic to determine which hosts want to receive multicast traffic. This
is also referred to as IGMP Snooping. (Default: Enabled)
•
Act as IGMP Querier — When enabled, the switch can serve as the
Querier, which is responsible for asking hosts if they want to receive
multicast traffic. (Default: Enabled)
•
IGMP Query Count — Sets the maximum number of queries issued
for which there has been no response before the switch takes action to
drop a client from the multicast group. (Range: 2-10; Default: 2)
•
IGMP Query Interval — Sets the frequency at which the switch
sends IGMP host-query messages. (Range: 60-125 seconds;
Default: 125)
•
IGMP Report Delay — Sets the time between receiving an IGMP
Report for an IP multicast address on a port before the switch sends
an IGMP Query out of that port and removes the entry from its list.
(Range: 5-25 seconds; Default: 10)
•
IGMP Query Timeout — The time the switch waits after the
previous querier stops before it considers the router port (i.e., the
interface which had been receiving query packets) to have expired.
(Range: 300-500 seconds; Default: 300)
3-185
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
•
IGMP Version — Sets the protocol version for compatibility with
other devices on the network. (Range: 1-2; Default: 2)
Notes: 1. All systems on the subnet must support the same version.
2. Some attributes are only enabled for IGMPv2, including
IGMP Report Delay and IGMP Query Timeout.
Web – Click IGMP Snooping, IGMP Configuration. Adjust the IGMP
settings as required, and then click Apply. (The default settings are shown
below.)
Figure 3-82 IGMP Configuration
3-186
MULTICAST FILTERING
CLI – This example modifies the settings for multicast filtering, and then
displays the current status.
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping querier
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping query-count 10
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping query-interval 100
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping query-max-response-time 20
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping router-port-expire-time 300
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping version 2
Console(config)#exit
Console#show ip igmp snooping
Service status:
Enabled
Querier status:
Enabled
Query count:
10
Query interval:
100 sec
Query max response time: 20 sec
Router port expire time: 300 sec
IGMP snooping version:
Version 2
Console#
4-239
4-243
4-243
4-244
4-245
4-246
4-240
4-241
Displaying Interfaces Attached to a Multicast Router
Multicast routers that are attached to ports on the switch use information
obtained from IGMP, along with a multicast routing protocol such as
DVMRP or PIM, to support IP multicasting across the Internet. These
routers may be dynamically discovered by the switch or statically assigned
to an interface on the switch.
You can use the Multicast Router Port Information page to display the
ports on this switch attached to a neighboring multicast router/switch for
each VLAN ID.
Command Attributes
•
VLAN ID – ID of configured VLAN (1-4094).
•
Multicast Router List – Multicast routers dynamically discovered by
this switch or those that are statically assigned to an interface on this
switch.
3-187
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
Web – Click IGMP Snooping, Multicast Router Port Information. Select
the required VLAN ID from the scroll-down list to display the associated
multicast routers.
Figure 3-83 Multicast Router Port Information
CLI – This example shows that Port 11 has been statically configured as a
port attached to a multicast router.
Console#show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1
VLAN M'cast Router Port Type
---- ------------------ ------1
Eth 1/11 Static
Console#
4-248
Specifying Static Interfaces for a Multicast Router
Depending on your network connections, IGMP snooping may not always
be able to locate the IGMP querier. Therefore, if the IGMP querier is a
known multicast router/ switch connected over the network to an
interface (port or trunk) on your switch, you can manually configure the
interface (and a specified VLAN) to join all the current multicast groups
supported by the attached router. This can ensure that multicast traffic is
passed to all the appropriate interfaces within the switch.
Command Attributes
•
3-188
Interface – Activates the Port or Trunk scroll down list.
MULTICAST FILTERING
•
VLAN ID – Selects the VLAN to propagate all multicast traffic
coming from the attached multicast router.
•
Port or Trunk – Specifies the interface attached to a multicast router.
Web – Click IGMP Snooping, Static Multicast Router Port Configuration.
Specify the interfaces attached to a multicast router, indicate the VLAN
which will forward all the corresponding multicast traffic, and then click
Add. After you have finished adding interfaces to the list, click Apply.
Figure 3-84 Static Multicast Router Port Configuration
CLI – This example configures port 11 as a multicast router port within
VLAN 1.
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping vlan 1 mrouter ethernet 1/11 4-247
Console(config)#exit
Console#show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1
4-248
VLAN M'cast Router Port Type
---- ------------------ ------1
Eth 1/11 Static
Console#
Displaying Port Members of Multicast Services
You can display the port members associated with a specified VLAN and
multicast IP address.
Command Attributes
•
VLAN ID – Selects the VLAN for which to display port members.
•
Multicast IP Address – The IP address for a specific multicast
service.
3-189
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
•
Multicast Group Port List – Shows the interfaces that have already
been assigned to the selected VLAN to propagate a specific multicast
service.
Web – Click IGMP Snooping, IP Multicast Registration Table. Select a
VLAN ID and the IP address for a multicast service from the scroll-down
lists. The switch will display all the interfaces that are propagating this
multicast service.
Figure 3-85 IP Multicast Registration Table
CLI – This example displays all the known multicast services supported
on VLAN 1, along with the ports propagating the corresponding services.
The Type field shows if this entry was learned dynamically or was statically
configured.
Console#show bridge 1 multicast vlan 1
VLAN M'cast IP addr. Member ports Type
---- --------------- ------------ ------1
224.1.1.12
Eth1/12
USER
1
224.1.2.3
Eth1/12
IGMP
Console#
3-190
4-241
MULTICAST FILTERING
Assigning Ports to Multicast Services
Multicast filtering can be dynamically configured using IGMP Snooping
and IGMP Query messages as described in “Configuring IGMP snooping
and Query Parameters” on page 3-133. For certain applications that
require tighter control, you may need to statically configure a multicast
service on the switch. First add all the ports attached to participating hosts
to a common VLAN, and then assign the multicast service to that VLAN
group.
Command Usage
•
Static multicast addresses are never aged out.
•
When a multicast address is assigned to an interface in a specific
VLAN, the corresponding traffic can only be forwarded to ports
within that VLAN.
Command Attributes
•
Interface – Activates the Port or Trunk scroll down list.
•
VLAN ID – Selects the VLAN to propagate all multicast traffic
coming from the attached multicast router/switch.
•
Multicast IP – The IP address for a specific multicast service
•
Port or Trunk – Specifies the interface attached to a multicast router/
switch.
3-191
CONFIGURING THE SWITCH
Web – Click IGMP Snooping, IGMP Member Port Table. Specify the
interface attached to a multicast service (via an IGMP-enabled switch or
multicast router), indicate the VLAN that will propagate the multicast
service, specify the multicast IP address, and click Add. After you have
completed adding ports to the member list, click Apply.
Figure 3-86 IGMP Member Port Table
CLI – This example assigns a multicast address to VLAN 1, and then
displays all the known multicast services supported on VLAN 1.
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping vlan 1 static 224.1.1.12
ethernet 1/11
Console(config)#exit
Console#show mac-address-table multicast vlan 1
VLAN M'cast IP addr. Member ports Type
---- --------------- ------------ ------1
224.1.1.12
Eth1/11
User
1
224.1.2.3
Eth1/12
IGMP
Console#
3-192
4-239
4-241
CHAPTER 4
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
This chapter describes how to use the Command Line Interface (CLI).
Using the Command Line Interface
Accessing the CLI
When accessing the management interface for the switch over a direct
connection to the server’s console port, or via a Telnet connection, the
switch can be managed by entering command keywords and parameters at
the prompt. Using the switch's command-line interface (CLI) is very
similar to entering commands on a UNIX system.
Console Connection
To access the switch through the console port, perform these steps:
1. At the console prompt, enter the user name and password. (The default
user names are “admin” and “guest” with corresponding passwords of
“admin” and “guest.”) When the administrator user name and
password is entered, the CLI displays the “Console#” prompt and
enters privileged access mode (i.e., Privileged Exec). But when the
guest user name and password is entered, the CLI displays the
“Console>” prompt and enters normal access mode (i.e., Normal
Exec).
2. Enter the necessary commands to complete your desired tasks.
3. When finished, exit the session with the “quit” or “exit” command.
4-1
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
After connecting to the system through the console port, the login screen
displays:
User Access Verification
Username: admin
Password:
CLI session with the SMC6752AL2 is opened.
To end the CLI session, enter [Exit].
Console#
Telnet Connection
Telnet operates over the IP transport protocol. In this environment, your
management station and any network device you want to manage over the
network must have a valid IP address. Valid IP addresses consist of four
numbers, 0 to 255, separated by periods. Each address consists of a
network portion and host portion. For example, the IP address assigned to
this switch, 10.1.0.1, with subnet mask 255.255.255.0, consists of a
network portion (10.1.0) and a host portion (1).
Note: The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default.
To access the switch through a Telnet session, you must first set the IP
address for the Master unit, and set the default gateway if you are
managing the switch from a different IP subnet. For example,
Console(config)#interface vlan 1
Console(config-if)#ip address 10.1.0.254 255.255.255.0
Console(config-if)#exit
Console(config)#ip default-gateway 10.1.0.254
If your corporate network is connected to another network outside your
office or to the Internet, you need to apply for a registered IP address.
However, if you are attached to an isolated network, then you can use any
IP address that matches the network segment to which you are attached.
After you configure the switch with an IP address, you can open a Telnet
session by performing these steps:
1. From the remote host, enter the Telnet command and the IP address of
the device you want to access.
4-2
USING THE COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
2. At the prompt, enter the user name and system password. The CLI will
display the “Vty-n#” prompt for the administrator to show that you are
using privileged access mode (i.e., Privileged Exec), or “Vty-n>” for the
guest to show that you are using normal access mode (i.e., Normal
Exec), where n indicates the number of the current Telnet session.
3. Enter the necessary commands to complete your desired tasks.
4. When finished, exit the session with the “quit” or “exit” command.
After entering the Telnet command, the login screen displays:
Username: admin
Password:
CLI session with the SMC6752AL2 is opened.
To end the CLI session, enter [Exit].
Vty-0#
Note: You can open up to four sessions to the device via Telnet.
4-3
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Entering Commands
This section describes how to enter CLI commands.
Keywords and Arguments
A CLI command is a series of keywords and arguments. Keywords identify
a command, and arguments specify configuration parameters. For
example, in the command “show interfaces status ethernet 1/5,” show
interfaces and status are keywords, ethernet is an argument that specifies
the interface type, and 1/5 specifies the unit/port.
You can enter commands as follows:
•
To enter a simple command, enter the command keyword.
•
To enter multiple commands, enter each command in the required
order. For example, to enable Privileged Exec command mode, and
display the startup configuration, enter:
Console>enable
Console#show startup-config
•
To enter commands that require parameters, enter the required
parameters after the command keyword. For example, to set a
password for the administrator, enter:
Console(config)#username admin password 0 smith
Minimum Abbreviation
The CLI will accept a minimum number of characters that uniquely
identify a command. For example, the command “configure” can be
entered as con. If an entry is ambiguous, the system will prompt for
further input.
4-4
ENTERING COMMANDS
Command Completion
If you terminate input with a Tab key, the CLI will print the remaining
characters of a partial keyword up to the point of ambiguity. In the
“logging history” example, typing log followed by a tab will result in
printing the command up to “logging.”
Getting Help on Commands
You can display a brief description of the help system by entering the help
command. You can also display command syntax by using the “?”
character to list keywords or parameters.
4-5
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Showing Commands
If you enter a “?” at the command prompt, the system will display the first
level of keywords for the current command class (Normal Exec or
Privileged Exec) or configuration class (Global, ACL, Interface, Line or
VLAN Database). You can also display a list of valid keywords for a
specific command. For example, the command “show ?” displays a list of
possible show commands:
Console#show ?
access-group
access-list
bridge-ext
calendar
dot1x
garp
gvrp
history
interfaces
ip
lacp
line
log
logging
mac
mac-address-table
management
map
port
public-key
queue
radius-server
rate-limit
running-config
snmp
sntp
spanning-tree
ssh
startup-config
system
tacacs-server
users
version
vlan
Console#show
4-6
Access groups
Access lists
Bridge extension information
Date and time information
802.1X content
GARP properties
GVRP interface information
History information
Interface information
IP information
LACP statistic
TTY line information
Login records
Login setting
MAC access list
Configuration of the address table
Management IP filter
Maps priority
Port Characteristics
Public Key information
Priority queue information
RADIUS server information
Configures rate-limits
Information on the running configuration
Simple Network Management Protocol statistics
Simple Network Time Protocol configuration
Spanning-tree configuration
Secure shell server connections
Startup system configuration
System Information
TACACS server settings
Information about terminal lines
System hardware and software versions
Virtual LAN settings
ENTERING COMMANDS
The command “show interfaces ?” will display the following information:
Console#show interfaces ?
counters
Interface counters information
status
Interface status information
switchport
Interface switchport information
Console#
Partial Keyword Lookup
If you terminate a partial keyword with a question mark, alternatives that
match the initial letters are provided. (Remember not to leave a space
between the command and question mark.) For example “s?” shows all the
keywords starting with “s.”
Console#show s?
snmp
sntp
system
Console#show s
spanning-tree
ssh
startup-config
Negating the Effect of Commands
For many configuration commands you can enter the prefix keyword “no”
to cancel the effect of a command or reset the configuration to the default
value. For example, the logging command will log system messages to a
host server. To disable logging, specify the no logging command. This
guide describes the negation effect for all applicable commands.
Using Command History
The CLI maintains a history of commands that have been entered. You
can scroll back through the history of commands by pressing the up arrow
key. Any command displayed in the history list can be executed again, or
first modified and then executed.
Using the show history command displays a longer list of recently
executed commands.
4-7
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Understanding Command Modes
The command set is divided into Exec and Configuration classes. Exec
commands generally display information on system status or clear
statistical counters. Configuration commands, on the other hand, modify
interface parameters or enable certain switching functions. These classes
are further divided into different modes. Available commands depend on
the selected mode. You can always enter a question mark “?” at the prompt
to display a list of the commands available for the current mode. The
command classes and associated modes are displayed in the following
table:
Table 4-1 Command Modes
Class
Mode
Exec
Normal
Privileged
Configuration
Global*
Access Control List
Interface
Line
VLAN Database
* You must be in Privileged Exec mode to access the Global configuration mode.
You must be in Global Configuration mode to access any of the other
configuration modes.
Exec Commands
When you open a new console session on the switch with the user name
and password “guest,” the system enters the Normal Exec command
mode (or guest mode), displaying the “Console>” command prompt.
Only a limited number of the commands are available in this mode. You
can access all commands only from the Privileged Exec command mode
(or administrator mode). To access Privilege Exec mode, open a new
console session with the user name and password “admin.” The system
will now display the “Console#” command prompt. You can also enter
Privileged Exec mode from within Normal Exec mode, by entering the
enable command, followed by the privileged level password “super” (page
4-36).
4-8
ENTERING COMMANDS
To enter Privileged Exec mode, enter the following user names and
passwords:
Username: admin
Password: [admin login password]
CLI session with the SMC6752AL2 is opened.
To end the CLI session, enter [Exit].
Console#
Username: guest
Password: [guest login password]
CLI session with the SMC6752AL2 is opened.
To end the CLI session, enter [Exit].
Console>enable
Password: [privileged level password]
Console#
Configuration Commands
Configuration commands are privileged level commands used to modify
switch settings. These commands modify the running configuration only
and are not saved when the switch is rebooted. To store the running
configuration in non-volatile storage, use the copy running-config
startup-config command.
The configuration commands are organized into different modes:
•
Global Configuration - These commands modify the system level
configuration, and include commands such as hostname and
snmp-server community.
•
Access Control List Configuration - These commands are used for
packet filtering.
•
Interface Configuration - These commands modify the port
configuration such as speed-duplex and negotiation.
•
Line Configuration - These commands modify the console port and
Telnet configuration, and include command such as parity and
databits.
4-9
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
•
VLAN Configuration - Includes the command to create VLAN
groups.
To enter the Global Configuration mode, enter the command configure
in Privileged Exec mode. The system prompt will change to
“Console(config)#” which gives you access privilege to all Global
Configuration commands.
Console#configure
Console(config)#
To enter the other modes, at the configuration prompt type one of the
following commands. Use the exit or end command to return to the
Privileged Exec mode.
Table 4-2 Configuration Modes
Mode
Command
Prompt
Line
line {console | vty}
Console(config-line)#
Access
Control
List
access-list ip standard
access-list ip extended
access-list mac
Console(config-std-acl) 4-117
Console(config-ext-acl)
Console(config-mac-acl)
Interface
interface {ethernet port |
port-channel id| vlan id}
Console(config-if)#
4-143
VLAN
vlan database
Console(config-vlan)
4-198
For example, you can use the following commands to enter interface
configuration mode, and then return to Privileged Exec mode
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5
.
.
.
Console(config-if)#exit
Console(config)#
4-10
Page
4-14
ENTERING COMMANDS
Command Line Processing
Commands are not case sensitive. You can abbreviate commands and
parameters as long as they contain enough letters to differentiate them
from any other currently available commands or parameters. You can use
the Tab key to complete partial commands, or enter a partial command
followed by the “?” character to display a list of possible matches. You can
also use the following editing keystrokes for command-line processing:
Table 4-3 Command Line Processing
Keystroke
Function
Ctrl-A
Shifts cursor to start of command line.
Ctrl-B
Shifts cursor to the left one character.
Ctrl-C
Terminates the current task and displays the
command prompt.
Ctrl-E
Shifts cursor to end of command line.
Ctrl-F
Shifts cursor to the right one character.
Ctrl-K
Deletes all characters from the cursor to the end of
the line.
Ctrl-L
Repeats current command line on a new line.
Ctrl-N
Enters the next command line in the history buffer.
Ctrl-P
Enters the last command.
Ctrl-R
Repeats current command line on a new line.
Ctrl-U
Deletes from the cursor to the beginning of the line.
Ctrl-W
Deletes the last word typed.
Esc-B
Moves the cursor back one word.
Esc-D
Deletes from the cursor to the end of the word.
Esc-F
Moves the cursor forward one word.
Delete key or
backspace key
Erases a mistake when entering a command.
4-11
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Command Groups
The system commands can be broken down into the functional groups
shown below.
Table 4-4 Command Groups
Command Group Description
4-12
Page
Line
Sets communication parameters for the serial port
and Telnet, including baud rate and console time-out
4-14
General
Basic commands for entering privileged access
mode, restarting the system, or quitting the CLI
4-26
System
Management
Controls system logs, system passwords, user name,
browser management options, and a variety of other
system information
4-32
Flash/File
Manages code image or switch configuration files
4-86
Authentication
Configures logon access using local or remote
authentication; also configures port security and
IEEE 802.1X port access control
4-94
Access Control List Provides filtering for IP frames (based on address,
protocol, TCP/UDP port number or TCP control
code) or non-IP frames (based on MAC address or
Ethernet type)
4-117
SNMP
Activates authentication failure traps; configures
community access strings, and trap managers; also
configures IP address filtering
4-136
Interface
Configures the connection parameters for all
Ethernet ports, aggregated links, and VLANs
4-143
Mirror Port
Mirrors data to another port for analysis without
affecting the data passing through or the
performance of the monitored port
4-158
Rate Limiting
Controls the maximum rate for traffic transmitted or
received on a port
4-160
Link Aggregation
Statically groups multiple ports into a single logical
trunk; configures Link Aggregation Control
Protocol for port trunks
4-162
COMMAND GROUPS
Table 4-4 Command Groups (Continued)
Command Group Description
Page
Address Table
4-178
Configures the address table for filtering specified
addresses, displays current entries, clears the table, or
sets the aging time
Spanning Tree
Configures Spanning Tree settings for the switch
4-183
VLANs
Configures VLAN settings, and defines port
membership for VLAN groups; also enables or
configures private VLANs
4-198
GVRP and
Bridge Extension
Configures GVRP settings that permit automatic
VLAN learning; shows the configuration for the
bridge extension MIB
4-217
Priority
Sets port priority for untagged frames, selects strict
priority or weighted round robin, relative weight for
each priority queue, also sets priority for TCP/UDP
traffic types, IP precedence, and DSCP
4-222
Multicast Filtering
Configures IGMP multicast filtering, query
parameters, and specifies ports attached to a
multicast router
4-238
IP Interface
Configures IP address for the switch
4-249
The access mode shown in the following tables is indicated by these
abbreviations:
NE (Normal Exec)
PE (Privileged Exec)
GC (Global Configuration)
ACL (Access Control List Configuration)
IC (Interface Configuration)
LC (Line Configuration)
VC (VLAN Database Configuration)
4-13
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Line Commands
You can access the onboard configuration program by attaching a VT100
compatible device to the server’s serial port. These commands are used to
set communication parameters for the serial port or Telnet (i.e., a virtual
terminal).
Table 4-5 Line Commands
Command
Function
Mode Page
line
Identifies a specific line for configuration and
starts the line configuration mode
GC
4-15
login
Enables password checking at login
LC
4-16
password
Specifies a password on a line
LC
4-17
timeout login
response
Sets the interval that the system waits for a user LC
to log into the CLI
4-18
exec-timeout
Sets the interval that the command interpreter
waits until user input is detected
LC
4-19
password-thresh Sets the password intrusion threshold, which
limits the number of failed logon attempts
LC
4-20
silent-time*
Sets the amount of time the management
console is inaccessible after the number of
unsuccessful logon attempts exceeds the
threshold set by the password-thresh
command
LC
4-21
databits*
Sets the number of data bits per character that
are interpreted and generated by hardware
LC
4-22
parity*
Defines the generation of a parity bit
LC
4-23
speed*
Sets the terminal baud rate
LC
4-23
stopbits*
Sets the number of the stop bits transmitted per LC
byte
4-24
disconnect
Terminates a line connection
PE
4-25
show line
Displays a terminal line's parameters
NE,
PE
4-25
* These commands only apply to the serial port.
4-14
LINE COMMANDS
line
This command identifies a specific line for configuration, and to process
subsequent line configuration commands.
Syntax
line {console | vty}
• console - Console terminal line.
• vty - Virtual terminal for remote console access (i.e., Telnet).
Default Setting
There is no default line.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
Telnet is considered a virtual terminal connection and will be shown as
“Vty” in screen displays such as show users. However, the serial
communication parameters (e.g., databits) do not affect Telnet
connections.
Example
To enter console line mode, enter the following command:
Console(config)#line console
Console(config-line)#
Related Commands
show line (4-25)
show users (4-84)
4-15
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
login
This command enables password checking at login. Use the no form to
disable password checking and allow connections without a password.
Syntax
login [local]
no login
local - Selects local password checking. Authentication is based on
the user name specified with the username command.
Default Setting
login local
Command Mode
Line Configuration
Command Usage
• There are three authentication modes provided by the switch itself at
login:
- login selects authentication by a single global password as specified
by the password line configuration command. When using this
method, the management interface starts in Normal Exec (NE)
mode.
- login local selects authentication via the user name and password
specified by the username command (i.e., default setting). When
using this method, the management interface starts in Normal Exec
(NE) or Privileged Exec (PE) mode, depending on the user’s
privilege level (0 or 15 respectively).
- no login selects no authentication. When using this method, the
management interface starts in Normal Exec (NE) mode.
• This command controls login authentication via the switch itself. To
configure user names and passwords for remote authentication
servers, you must use the RADIUS or TACACS software installed on
those servers.
4-16
LINE COMMANDS
Example
Console(config-line)#login local
Console(config-line)#
Related Commands
username (4-35)
password (4-17)
password
This command specifies the password for a line. Use the no form to
remove the password.
Syntax
password {0 | 7} password
no password
• {0 | 7} - 0 means plain password, 7 means encrypted password
• password - Character string that specifies the line password.
(Maximum length: 8 characters plain text, 32 encrypted, case
sensitive)
Default Setting
No password is specified.
Command Mode
Line Configuration
Command Usage
• When a connection is started on a line with password protection, the
system prompts for the password. If you enter the correct password,
the system shows a prompt. You can use the password-thresh
command to set the number of times a user can enter an incorrect
password before the system terminates the line connection and returns
the terminal to the idle state.
• The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy
password settings (i.e., plain text or encrypted) when reading the
configuration file during system bootup or when downloading the
4-17
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
configuration file from a TFTP server. There is no need for you to
manually configure encrypted passwords.
Example
Console(config-line)#password 0 secret
Console(config-line)#
Related Commands
login (4-16)
password-thresh (4-20)
timeout login response
This command sets the interval that the system waits for a user to log into
the CLI. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
timeout login response [seconds]
no timeout login response
seconds - Integer that specifies the timeout interval.
(Range: 0 - 300 seconds; 0: disabled)
Default Setting
• CLI: Disabled (0 seconds)
• Telnet: 600 seconds
Command Mode
Line Configuration
Command Usage
• If a login attempt is not detected within the timeout interval, the
connection is terminated for the session.
• This command applies to both the local console and Telnet
connections.
• The timeout for Telnet cannot be disabled.
• Using the command without specifying a timeout restores the default
setting.
4-18
LINE COMMANDS
Example
To set the timeout to two minutes, enter this command:
Console(config-line)#timeout login response 120
Console(config-line)#
Related Commands
silent-time (4-21)
exec-timeout (4-14)
exec-timeout
This command sets the interval that the system waits until user input is
detected. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
exec-timeout [seconds]
no exec-timeout
seconds - Integer that specifies the number of seconds.
(Range: 0-65535 seconds; 0: no timeout)
Default Setting
• CLI: No timeout
• Telnet: 10 minutes
Command Mode
Line Configuration
Command Usage
• If user input is detected within the timeout interval, the session is kept
open; otherwise the session is terminated.
• This command applies to both the local console and Telnet
connections.
• The timeout for Telnet cannot be disabled.
• Using the command without specifying a timeout restores the default
setting.
4-19
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Example
To set the timeout to two minutes, enter this command:
Console(config-line)#exec-timeout 120
Console(config-line)#
Related Commands
silent-time (4-21)
timeout login response (4-13)
password-thresh
This command sets the password intrusion threshold which limits the
number of failed logon attempts. Use the no form to remove the threshold
value.
Syntax
password-thresh [threshold]
no password-thresh
threshold - The number of allowed password attempts.
(Range: 1-120; 0: no threshold)
Default Setting
The default value is three attempts.
Command Mode
Line Configuration
Command Usage
• When the logon attempt threshold is reached, the system interface
becomes silent for a specified amount of time before allowing the next
logon attempt. (Use the silent-time command to set this interval.)
When this threshold is reached for Telnet, the Telnet logon interface
shuts down.
• This command applies to both the local console and Telnet
connections.
4-20
LINE COMMANDS
Example
To set the password threshold to five attempts, enter this command:
Console(config-line)#password-thresh 5
Console(config-line)#
Related Commands
silent-time (4-21)
timeout login response (4-13)
silent-time
This command sets the amount of time the management console is
inaccessible after the number of unsuccessful logon attempts exceeds the
threshold set by the password-thresh command. Use the no form to
remove the silent time value.
Syntax
silent-time [seconds]
no silent-time
seconds - The number of seconds to disable console response.
(Range: 0-65535; 0: no silent-time)
Default Setting
The default value is no silent-time.
Command Mode
Line Configuration
Example
To set the silent time to 60 seconds, enter this command:
Console(config-line)#silent-time 60
Console(config-line)#
Related Commands
password-thresh (4-20)
4-21
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
databits
This command sets the number of data bits per character that are
interpreted and generated by the console port. Use the no form to restore
the default value.
Syntax
databits {7 | 8}
no databits
• 7 - Seven data bits per character.
• 8 - Eight data bits per character.
Default Setting
8 data bits per character
Command Mode
Line Configuration
Command Usage
The databits command can be used to mask the high bit on input
from devices that generate 7 data bits with parity. If parity is being
generated, specify 7 data bits per character. If no parity is required,
specify 8 data bits per character.
Example
To specify 7 data bits, enter this command:
Console(config-line)#databits 7
Console(config-line)#
Related Commands
parity (4-23)
4-22
LINE COMMANDS
parity
This command defines the generation of a parity bit. Use the no form to
restore the default setting.
Syntax
parity {none | even | odd}
no parity
• none - No parity
• even - Even parity
• odd - Odd parity
Default Setting
No parity
Command Mode
Line Configuration
Command Usage
Communication protocols provided by devices such as terminals and
modems often require a specific parity bit setting.
Example
To specify no parity, enter this command:
Console(config-line)#parity none
Console(config-line)#
speed
This command sets the terminal line’s baud rate. This command sets both
the transmit (to terminal) and receive (from terminal) speeds. Use the no
form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
speed bps
no speed
bps - Baud rate in bits per second.
(Options: 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 bps)
4-23
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Default Setting
9600
Command Mode
Line Configuration
Command Usage
Set the speed to match the baud rate of the device connected to the
serial port. Some baud rates available on devices connected to the port
might not be supported. The system indicates if the speed you selected
is not supported.
Example
To specify 57600 bps, enter this command:
Console(config-line)#speed 57600
Console(config-line)#
stopbits
This command sets the number of the stop bits transmitted per byte. Use
the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
stopbits {1 | 2}
• 1 - One stop bit
• 2 - Two stop bits
Default Setting
1 stop bit
Command Mode
Line Configuration
Example
To specify 2 stop bits, enter this command:
Console(config-line)#stopbits 2
Console(config-line)#
4-24
LINE COMMANDS
disconnect
This command terminates an SSH, Telnet, or console connection.
Syntax
disconnect session-id
session-id – The session identifier for an SSH, Telnet or console
connection. (Range: 0-4)
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
Specifying session identifier “0” will disconnect the console
connection. Specifying any other identifiers for an active session will
disconnect an SSH or Telnet connection.
Example
Console#disconnect 1
Console#
Related Commands
show ssh (4-55)
show users (4-84)
show line
This command displays the terminal line’s parameters.
Syntax
show line [console | vty]
• console - Console terminal line.
• vty - Virtual terminal for remote console access (i.e., Telnet).
Default Setting
Shows all lines
Command Mode
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec
4-25
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Example
To show all lines, enter this command:
Console#show line
Console configuration:
Password threshold: 3 times
Interactive timeout: Disabled
Login timeout: Disabled
Silent time:
Disabled
Baudrate:
9600
Databits:
8
Parity:
none
Stopbits:
1
VTY configuration:
Password threshold: 3 times
Interactive timeout: 600 sec
Login timeout: 300 sec
console#
General Commands
Table 4-6 General Commands
4-26
Command
Function
Mode
Page
enable
Activates privileged mode
NE
4-27
disable
Returns to normal mode from privileged mode PE
4-28
configure
Activates global configuration mode
PE
4-28
show history
Shows the command history buffer
NE, PE
4-29
reload
Restarts the system
PE
4-30
end
Returns to Privileged Exec mode
any
config.
mode
4-30
exit
Returns to the previous configuration mode, or any
exits the CLI
4-31
quit
Exits a CLI session
NE, PE
4-31
help
Shows how to use help
any
NA
?
Shows options for command completion
(context sensitive)
any
NA
GENERAL COMMANDS
enable
This command activates Privileged Exec mode. In privileged mode,
additional commands are available, and certain commands display
additional information. See “Understanding Command Modes” on
page 4-8.
Syntax
enable [level]
level - Privilege level to log into the device.
The device has two predefined privilege levels: 0: Normal Exec,
15: Privileged Exec. Enter level 15 to access Privileged Exec mode.
Default Setting
Level 15
Command Mode
Normal Exec
Command Usage
• “super” is the default password required to change the command
mode from Normal Exec to Privileged Exec. (To set this password,
see the enable password command on page 4-36.)
• The “#” character is appended to the end of the prompt to indicate
that the system is in privileged access mode.
Example
Console>enable
Password: [privileged level password]
Console#
Related Commands
disable (4-28)
enable password (4-36)
4-27
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
disable
This command returns to Normal Exec mode from privileged mode. In
normal access mode, you can only display basic information on the
switch's configuration or Ethernet statistics. To gain access to all
commands, you must use the privileged mode. See “Understanding
Command Modes” on page 4-8.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
The “>” character is appended to the end of the prompt to indicate
that the system is in normal access mode.
Example
Console#disable
Console>
Related Commands
enable (4-27)
configure
This command activates Global Configuration mode. You must enter this
mode to modify any settings on the switch. You must also enter Global
Configuration mode prior to enabling some of the other configuration
modes, including Interface Configuration, Line Configuration, and VLAN
Database Configuration. See “Understanding Command Modes” on
page 4-8.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
4-28
GENERAL COMMANDS
Example
Console#configure
Console(config)#
Related Commands
end (4-30)
show history
This command shows the contents of the command history buffer.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec
Command Usage
The history buffer size is fixed at 10 Execution commands and
10 Configuration commands.
Example
In this example, the show history command lists the contents of the
command history buffer:
Console#show history
Execution command history:
2 config
1 show history
Configuration command history:
4 interface vlan 1
3 exit
2 interface vlan 1
1 end
Console#
4-29
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
The ! command repeats commands from the Execution command history
buffer when you are in Normal Exec or Privileged Exec Mode, and
commands from the Configuration command history buffer when you are
in any of the configuration modes. In this example, the !2 command
repeats the second command in the Execution history buffer (config).
Console#!2
Console#config
Console(config)#
reload
This command restarts the system.
Note: When the system is restarted, it will always run the Power-On
Self-Test. It will also retain all configuration information stored in
non-volatile memory by the copy running-config startup-config
command.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
This command resets the entire system.
Example
This example shows how to reset the switch:
Console#reload
System will be restarted, continue <y/n>? y
end
This command returns to Privileged Exec mode.
Default Setting
None
4-30
GENERAL COMMANDS
Command Mode
Global Configuration, Interface Configuration, Line Configuration, and
VLAN Database Configuration.
Example
This example shows how to return to the Privileged Exec mode from the
Interface Configuration mode:
Console(config-if)#end
Console#
exit
This command returns to the previous configuration mode or exit the
configuration program.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Any
Example
This example shows how to return to the Privileged Exec mode from the
Global Configuration mode, and then quit the CLI session:
Console(config)#exit
Console#exit
Press ENTER to start session
User Access Verification
Username:
quit
This command exits the configuration program.
Default Setting
None
4-31
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Command Mode
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec
Command Usage
The quit and exit commands can both exit the configuration program.
Example
This example shows how to quit a CLI session:
Console#quit
Press ENTER to start session
User Access Verification
Username:
System Management Commands
These commands are used to control system logs, passwords, user names,
browser configuration options, and display or configure a variety of other
system information.
Table 4-7 System Management Commands
Command Group Function
4-32
Page
Device
Designation
Configures information that uniquely identifies this
switch
4-33
User Access
Configures the basic user names and passwords for
management access
4-34
IP Filter
Configures IP addresses that are allowed management
access
4-37
Web Server
Enables management access via a web browser
4-40
Telnet Server
Enables management access via Telnet
4-44
Secure Shell
Provides secure replacement for Telnet
4-46
Event Logging
Controls logging of error messages
4-59
Time (System
Clock)
Sets the system clock automatically via NTP/SNTP
server or manually
4-72
SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Table 4-7 System Management Commands (Continued)
Command Group Function
Page
System Status
Displays system configuration, active managers, and
version information
4-78
Frame Size
Enables support for jumbo frames
4-85
Device Designation Commands
Table 4-8 Device Designation Commands
Command
Function
prompt
Customizes the prompt used in PE and NE mode GC
Mode Page
4-33
hostname
Specifies the host name for the switch
GC
4-34
snmp-server
contact
Sets the system contact string
GC
4-138
snmp-server
location
Sets the system location string
GC
4-138
prompt
This command customizes the CLI prompt. Use the no form to restore
the default prompt.
Syntax
prompt string
no prompt
string - Any alphanumeric string to use for the CLI prompt.
(Maximum length: 255 characters)
Default Setting
Console
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Console(config)#prompt RD2
RD2(config)#
4-33
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
hostname
This command specifies or modifies the host name for this device. Use the
no form to restore the default host name.
Syntax
hostname name
no hostname
name - The name of this host. (Maximum length: 255 characters)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Console(config)#hostname RD#1
Console(config)#
User Access Commands
The basic commands required for management access are listed in this
section. This switch also includes other options for password checking via
the console or a Telnet connection (page 4-14), user authentication via a
remote authentication server (page 4-94), and host access authentication
for specific ports (page 4-107).
Table 4-9 User Access Commands
Command
Function
Mode Page
username
Establishes a user name-based authentication
system at login
GC
4-35
GC
4-36
enable password Sets a password to control access to the
Privileged Exec level
4-34
SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
username
This command adds named users, requires authentication at login,
specifies or changes a user's password (or specify that no password is
required), or specifies or changes a user's access level. Use the no form to
remove a user name.
Syntax
username name {access-level level | nopassword |
password {0 | 7} password}
no username name
• name - The name of the user.
(Maximum length: 8 characters, case sensitive. Maximum users: 16)
• access-level level - Specifies the user level.
The device has two predefined privilege levels:
0: Normal Exec, 15: Privileged Exec.
• nopassword - No password is required for this user to log in.
• {0 | 7} - 0 means plain password, 7 means encrypted password.
• password password - The authentication password for the user.
(Maximum length: 8 characters plain text, 32 encrypted, case
sensitive)
Default Setting
• The default access level is Normal Exec.
• The factory defaults for the user names and passwords are:
Table 4-10 Default Login Settings
username
access-level
password
guest
0
guest
admin
15
admin
Command Mode
Global Configuration
4-35
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Command Usage
The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy
password settings (i.e., plain text or encrypted) when reading the
configuration file during system bootup or when downloading the
configuration file from a TFTP server. There is no need for you to
manually configure encrypted passwords.
Example
This example shows how to set the access level and password for a user.
Console(config)#username bob access-level 15
Console(config)#username bob password 0 smith
Console(config)#
enable password
After initially logging onto the system, you should set the Privileged Exec
password. Remember to record it in a safe place. This command controls
access to the Privileged Exec level from the Normal Exec level. Use the no
form to reset the default password.
Syntax
enable password [level level] {0 | 7} password
no enable password [level level]
• level level - Level 15 for Privileged Exec. (Levels 0-14 are not used.)
• {0 | 7} - 0 means plain password, 7 means encrypted password.
• password - password for this privilege level. (Maximum length: 8
characters plain text, 32 encrypted, case sensitive)
Default Setting
• The default is level 15.
• The default password is “super”
Command Mode
Global Configuration
4-36
SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Command Usage
• You cannot set a null password. You will have to enter a password to
change the command mode from Normal Exec to Privileged Exec
with the enable command (page 4-27).
• The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy
password settings (i.e., plain text or encrypted) when reading the
configuration file during system bootup or when downloading the
configuration file from a TFTP server. There is no need for you to
manually configure encrypted passwords.
Example
Console(config)#enable password level 15 0 admin
Console(config)#
Related Commands
enable (4-27)
authentication enable (4-96)
IP Filter Commands
Table 4-11 IP Filter Commands
Command
Function
Mode
management
Configures IP addresses that are allowed
management access
GC
4-38
PE
4-39
show management Displays the switch to be monitored or
configured from a browser
Page
4-37
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
management
This command specifies the client IP addresses that are allowed
management access to the switch through various protocols. Use the no
form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
[no] management {all-client | http-client | snmp-client |
telnet-client} start-address [end-address]
• all-client - Adds IP address(es) to the SNMP, web and Telnet
groups.
• http-client - Adds IP address(es) to the web group.
• snmp-client - Adds IP address(es) to the SNMP group.
• telnet-client - Adds IP address(es) to the Telnet group.
• start-address - A single IP address, or the starting address of a range.
• end-address - The end address of a range.
Default Setting
All addresses
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• If anyone tries to access a management interface on the switch from
an invalid address, the switch will reject the connection, enter an event
message in the system log, and send a trap message to the trap
manager.
• IP address can be configured for SNMP, web and Telnet access
respectively. Each of these groups can include up to five different sets
of addresses, either individual addresses or address ranges.
• When entering addresses for the same group (i.e., SNMP, web or
Telnet), the switch will not accept overlapping address ranges. When
entering addresses for different groups, the switch will accept
overlapping address ranges.
• You cannot delete an individual address from a specified range. You
must delete the entire range, and reenter the addresses.
4-38
SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
• You can delete an address range just by specifying the start address, or
by specifying both the start address and end address.
Example
This example restricts management access to the indicated addresses.
Console(config)#management all-client 192.168.1.19
Console(config)#management all-client 192.168.1.25 192.168.1.30
Console(config)#
show management
This command displays the client IP addresses that are allowed
management access to the switch through various protocols.
Syntax
show management {all-client | http-client | snmp-client |
telnet-client}
• all-client - Adds IP address(es) to the SNMP, web and Telnet
groups.
• http-client - Adds IP address(es) to the web group.
• snmp-client - Adds IP address(es) to the SNMP group.
• telnet-client - Adds IP address(es) to the Telnet group.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
4-39
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Example
Console#show management all-client
Management IP Filter
HTTP-Client:
Start IP address
End IP address
----------------------------------------------1. 192.168.1.19
192.168.1.19
2. 192.168.1.25
192.168.1.30
SNMP-Client:
Start IP address
End IP address
----------------------------------------------1. 192.168.1.19
192.168.1.19
2. 192.168.1.25
192.168.1.30
TELNET-Client:
Start IP address
End IP address
----------------------------------------------1. 192.168.1.19
192.168.1.19
2. 192.168.1.25
192.168.1.30
Console#
Web Server Commands
Table 4-12 Web Server Commands
4-40
Command
Function
ip http port
Specifies the port to be used by the web browser GC
interface
Mode
Page
4-41
ip http server
Allows the switch to be monitored or configured GC
from a browser
4-41
ip http
secure-server
Enables HTTPS/SSL for encrypted
communications
GC
4-42
ip http
secure-port
Specifies the UDP port number for HTTPS/SSL GC
4-43
SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
ip http port
This command specifies the TCP port number used by the web browser
interface. Use the no form to use the default port.
Syntax
ip http port port-number
no ip http port
port-number - The TCP port to be used by the browser interface.
(Range: 1-65535)
Default Setting
80
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Console(config)#ip http port 769
Console(config)#
Related Commands
ip http server (4-41)
ip http server
This command allows this device to be monitored or configured from a
browser. Use the no form to disable this function.
Syntax
[no] ip http server
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
4-41
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Example
Console(config)#ip http server
Console(config)#
Related Commands
ip http port (4-41)
ip http secure-server
This command enables the secure hypertext transfer protocol (HTTPS)
over the Secure Socket Layer (SSL), providing secure access (i.e., an
encrypted connection) to the switch’s web interface. Use the no form to
disable this function.
Syntax
[no] ip http secure-server
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• Both HTTP and HTTPS service can be enabled independently on the
switch. However, you cannot configure the HTTP and HTTPS servers
to use the same UDP port.
• If you enable HTTPS, you must indicate this in the URL that you
specify in your browser: https://device[:port_number]
• When you start HTTPS, the connection is established in this way:
- The client authenticates the server using the server’s digital
certificate.
- The client and server negotiate a set of security protocols to use for
the connection.
- The client and server generate session keys for encrypting and
decrypting data.
• The client and server establish a secure encrypted connection.
4-42
SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
• A padlock icon should appear in the status bar for Internet Explorer
5.x and Netscape Navigator 6.2 or later versions.
• The following web browsers and operating systems currently support
HTTPS:
Table 4-13 HTTPS System Support
Web Browser
Operating System
Internet Explorer 5.0 or later
Windows 98,Windows NT (with service
pack 6a), Windows 2000, Windows XP
Netscape Navigator 6.2 or later
Windows 98,Windows NT (with service
pack 6a), Windows 2000, Windows XP,
Solaris 2.6
• To specify a secure-site certificate, see “Replacing the Default
Secure-site Certificate” on page 4-56. Also refer to the copy command
on page 4-87.
Example
Console(config)#ip http secure-server
Console(config)#
Related Commands
ip http secure-port (4-43)
copy tftp https-certificate (4-87)
ip http secure-port
This command specifies the UDP port number used for HTTPS/SSL
connection to the switch’s web interface. Use the no form to restore the
default port.
Syntax
ip http secure-port port_number
no ip http secure-port
port_number – The UDP port used for HTTPS/SSL.
(Range: 1-65535)
Default Setting
443
4-43
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• You cannot configure the HTTP and HTTPS servers to use the same
port.
• If you change the HTTPS port number, clients attempting to connect
to the HTTPS server must specify the port number in the URL, in this
format:
https://device:port_number
Example
Console(config)#ip http secure-port 1000
Console(config)#
Related Commands
ip http secure-server (4-42)
Telnet Server Commands
Table 4-14 Telnet Server Commands
Command
Function
Mode Page
ip telnet port
Specifies the port to be used by the Telnet
interface
GC
4-44
ip telnet server Allows the switch to be monitored or configured GC
from Telnet
4-45
ip telnet port
This command specifies the TCP port number used by the Telnet
interface. Use the no form to use the default port.
Syntax
ip telnet port port-number
no ip telnet port
port-number - The TCP port to be used by the browser interface.
(Range: 1-65535)
4-44
SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Default Setting
23
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Console(config)#ip telnet port 123
Console(config)#
Related Commands
ip telnet server (4-45)
ip telnet server
This command allows this device to be monitored or configured from
Telnet. Use the no form to disable this function.
Syntax
[no] ip telnet server
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Console(config)#ip telnet server
Console(config)#
Related Commands
ip telnet port (4-44)
4-45
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Secure Shell Commands
The Berkley-standard includes remote access tools originally designed for
Unix systems. Some of these tools have also been implemented for
Microsoft Windows and other environments. These tools, including
commands such as rlogin (remote login), rsh (remote shell), and rcp (remote
copy), are not secure from hostile attacks.
The Secure Shell (SSH) includes server/client applications intended as a
secure replacement for the older Berkley remote access tools. SSH can also
provide remote management access to this switch as a secure replacement
for Telnet. When a client contacts the switch via the SSH protocol, the
switch uses a public-key that the client must match along with a local user
name and password for access authentication. SSH also encrypts all data
transfers passing between the switch and SSH-enabled management
station clients, and ensures that data traveling over the network arrives
unaltered.
This section describes the commands used to configure the SSH server.
However, note that you also need to install a SSH client on the
management station when using this protocol to configure the switch.
Note: The switch supports both SSH Version 1.5 and 2.0.
Table 4-15 SSH Commands
Command
Function
Mode
ip ssh server
Enables the SSH server on the switch
GC
4-49
ip ssh timeout
Specifies the authentication timeout for the GC
SSH server
4-50
ip ssh
Specifies the number of retries allowed by GC
authentication-retries a client
4-51
ip ssh server-key size Sets the SSH server key size
4-46
Page
GC
4-51
copy tftp public-key
Copies the user’s public key from a TFTP PE
server to the switch
4-87
delete public-key
Deletes the public key for the specified
user
4-52
PE
SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Table 4-15 SSH Commands (Continued)
Command
Function
Mode
Page
ip ssh crypto
host-key generate
Generates the host key
PE
4-53
ip ssh crypto zeroize Clear the host key from RAM
PE
4-54
ip ssh save host-key
Saves the host key from RAM to flash
memory
PE
4-54
disconnect
Terminates a line connection
PE
4-25
show ip ssh
Displays the status of the SSH server and
the configured values for authentication
timeout and retries
PE
4-55
show ssh
Displays the status of current SSH sessions PE
4-55
show public-key
Shows the public key for the specified user PE
or for the host
4-57
show users
Shows SSH users, including privilege level PE
and public key type
4-84
The SSH server on this switch supports both password and public key
authentication. If password authentication is specified by the SSH client,
then the password can be authenticated either locally or via a RADIUS or
TACACS+ remote authentication server, as specified by the
authentication login command on page 4-95. If public key authentication
is specified by the client, then you must configure authentication keys on
both the client and the switch as described in the following section. Note
that regardless of whether you use public key or password authentication,
you still have to generate authentication keys on the switch and enable the
SSH server.
To use the SSH server, complete these steps:
1. Generate a Host Key Pair – Use the ip ssh crypto host-key generate
command to create a host public/private key pair.
4-47
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
2. Provide Host Public Key to Clients – Many SSH client programs
automatically import the host public key during the initial connection
setup with the switch. Otherwise, you need to manually create a known
hosts file on the management station and place the host public key in it.
An entry for a public key in the known hosts file would appear similar
to the following example:
10.1.0.54 1024 35 15684995401867669259333946775054617325313674890836547254
15020245593199868544358361651999923329781766065830956 10825913212890233
76546801726272571413428762941301196195566782 59566410486957427888146206
519417467729848654686157177393901647793559423035774130980227370877945452408397
1752646358058176716709574804776117
3. Import Client’s Public Key to the Switch – Use the copy tftp
public-key command to copy a file containing the public key for all the
SSH client’s granted management access to the switch. (Note that these
clients must be configured locally on the switch via the User Accounts
page as described on page 3-48.) The clients are subsequently
authenticated using these keys. The current firmware only accepts
public key files based on standard UNIX format as shown in the
following example for an RSA Version 1 key:
1024 35 1341081685609893921040944920155425347631641921872958921143173880
055536161631051775940838686311092912322268285192543746031009371877211996963178
136627741416898513204911720483033925432410163799759237144901193800609025394840
848271781943722884025331159521348610229029789827213532671316294325328189150453
06393916643 [email protected]
4. Set the Optional Parameters – Set other optional parameters, including
the authentication timeout, the number of retries, and the server key
size.
5. Enable SSH Service – Use the ip ssh server command to enable the
SSH server on the switch.
6. Configure Challenge-Response Authentication – When an SSH client
attempts to contact the switch, the SSH server uses the host key pair to
negotiate a session key and encryption method. Only clients that have a
private key corresponding to the public keys stored on the switch can
gain access. The following exchanges take place during this process:
4-48
SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
a. The client sends its public key to the switch.
b. The switch compares the client's public key to those stored in memory.
c. If a match is found, the switch uses the public key to encrypt a random
sequence of bytes, and sends this string to the client.
d. The client uses its private key to decrypt the bytes, and sends the
decrypted bytes back to the switch.
e. The switch compares the decrypted bytes to the original bytes it sent. If
the two sets match, this means that the client's private key corresponds
to an authorized public key, and the client is authenticated.
Note: To use SSH with only password authentication, the host public key
must still be given to the client, either during initial connection or
manually entered into the known host file. However, you do not
need to configure the client’s keys.
ip ssh server
This command enables the Secure Shell (SSH) server on this switch. Use
the no form to disable this service.
Syntax
[no] ip ssh server
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• The SSH server supports up to four client sessions. The maximum
number of client sessions includes both current Telnet sessions and
SSH sessions.
• The SSH server uses DSA or RSA for key exchange when the client
first establishes a connection with the switch, and then negotiates with
the client to select either DES (56-bit) or 3DES (168-bit) for data
encryption.
4-49
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
• You must generate the host key before enabling the SSH server.
Example
Console#ip ssh crypto host-key generate dsa
Console#configure
Console(config)#ip ssh server
Console(config)#
Related Commands
ip ssh crypto host-key generate (4-53)
show ssh (4-55)
ip ssh timeout
This command configures the timeout for the SSH server. Use the no
form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
ip ssh timeout seconds
no ip ssh timeout
seconds – The timeout for client response during SSH negotiation.
(Range: 1-120)
Default Setting
10 seconds
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
The timeout specifies the interval the switch will wait for a response
from the client during the SSH negotiation phase. Once an SSH session
has been established, the timeout for user input is controlled by the
exec-timeout command for vty sessions.
Example
Console(config)#ip ssh timeout 60
Console(config)#
4-50
SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Related Commands
exec-timeout (4-19)
show ip ssh (4-55)
ip ssh authentication-retries
This command configures the number of times the SSH server attempts to
reauthenticate a user. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
ip ssh authentication-retries count
no ip ssh authentication-retries
count – The number of authentication attempts permitted after
which the interface is reset. (Range: 1-5)
Default Setting
3
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Console(config)#ip ssh authentication-retires 2
Console(config)#
Related Commands
show ip ssh (4-55)
ip ssh server-key size
This command sets the SSH server key size. Use the no form to restore
the default setting.
Syntax
ip ssh server-key size key-size
no ip ssh server-key size
key-size – The size of server key. (Range: 512-896 bits)
4-51
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Default Setting
768 bits
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• The server key is a private key that is never shared outside the switch.
• The host key is shared with the SSH client, and is fixed at 1024 bits.
Example
Console(config)#ip ssh server-key size 512
Console(config)#
delete public-key
This command deletes the specified user’s public key.
Syntax
delete public-key username [dsa | rsa]
• username – Name of an SSH user. (Range: 1-8 characters)
• dsa – DSA public key type.
• rsa – RSA public key type.
Default Setting
Deletes both the DSA and RSA key.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#delete public-key admin dsa
Console#
4-52
SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
ip ssh crypto host-key generate
This command generates the host key pair (i.e., public and private).
Syntax
ip ssh crypto host-key generate [dsa | rsa]
• dsa – DSA (Version 2) key type.
• rsa – RSA (Version 1) key type.
Default Setting
Generates both the DSA and RSA key pairs.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
• This command stores the host key pair in memory (i.e., RAM). Use the
ip ssh save host-key command to save the host key pair to flash
memory.
• Some SSH client programs automatically add the public key to the
known hosts file as part of the configuration process. Otherwise, you
must manually create a known hosts file and place the host public key
in it.
• The SSH server uses this host key to negotiate a session key and
encryption method with the client trying to connect to it.
Example
Console#ip ssh crypto host-key generate dsa
Console#
Related Commands
ip ssh crypto zeroize (4-54)
ip ssh save host-key (4-54)
4-53
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
ip ssh crypto zeroize
This command clears the host key from memory (i.e. RAM).
Syntax
ip ssh crypto zeroize [dsa | rsa]
• dsa – DSA key type.
• rsa – RSA key type.
Default Setting
Clears both the DSA and RSA key.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
• This command clears the host key from volatile memory (RAM). Use
the no ip ssh save host-key command to clear the host key from flash
memory.
• The SSH server must be disabled before you can execute this
command.
Example
Console#ip ssh crypto zeroize dsa
Console#
Related Commands
ip ssh crypto host-key generate (4-53)
ip ssh save host-key (4-54)
no ip ssh server (4-49)
ip ssh save host-key
This command saves host key from RAM to flash memory.
Syntax
ip ssh save host-key [dsa | rsa]
• dsa – DSA key type.
• rsa – RSA key type.
4-54
SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Default Setting
Saves both the DSA and RSA key.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#ip ssh save host-key dsa
Console#
Related Commands
ip ssh crypto host-key generate (4-53)
show ip ssh
This command displays the connection settings used when authenticating
client access to the SSH server.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show ip ssh
SSH Enabled - version 1.99
Negotiation timeout: 120 secs; Authentication retries: 3
Server key size: 768 bits
Console#
show ssh
This command displays the current SSH server connections.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show ssh
Connection Version State
0
2.0
Session-Started
Username
admin
Encryption
ctos aes128-cbc-hmac-md5
stoc aes128-cbc-hmac-md5
Console#
4-55
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Table 4-16 show ssh - display description
Field
Description
Session
The session number. (Range: 0-3)
Version
The Secure Shell version number.
State
The authentication negotiation state.
(Values: Negotiation-Started, Authentication-Started,
Session-Started)
Username
The user name of the client.
Encryption
The encryption method is automatically negotiated between the
client and server.
Options for SSHv1.5 include: DES, 3DES
Options for SSHv2.0 can include different algorithms for the
client-to-server (ctos) and server-to-client (stoc):
aes128-cbc-hmac-sha1
aes192-cbc-hmac-sha1
aes256-cbc-hmac-sha1
3des-cbc-hmac-sha1
blowfish-cbc-hmac-sha1
aes128-cbc-hmac-md5
aes192-cbc-hmac-md5
aes256-cbc-hmac-md5
3des-cbc-hmac-md5
blowfish-cbc-hmac-md5
Terminology:
DES – Data Encryption Standard (56-bit key)
3DES – Triple-DES (Uses three iterations of DES, 112-bit key)
aes – Advanced Encryption Standard (160 or 224-bit key)
blowfish – Blowfish (32-448 bit key)
cbc – cypher-block chaining
sha1 – Secure Hash Algorithm 1 (160-bit hashes)
md5 – Message Digest algorithm number 5 (128-bit hashes)
4-56
SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
show public-key
This command shows the public key for the specified user or for the host.
Syntax
show public-key [user [username]| host]
username – Name of an SSH user. (Range: 1-8 characters)
Default Setting
Shows all public keys.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
• If no parameters are entered, all keys are displayed. If the user keyword
is entered, but no user name is specified, then the public keys for all
users are displayed.
• When an RSA key is displayed, the first field indicates the size of the
host key (e.g., 1024), the second field is the encoded public exponent
(e.g., 35), and the last string is the encoded modulus. When a DSA key
is displayed, the first field indicates that the encryption method used
by SSH is based on the Digital Signature Standard (DSS), and the last
string is the encoded modulus.
4-57
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Example
Console#show public-key host
Host:
RSA:
1024 35
1568499540186766925933394677505461732531367489083654725415020245593
1998685443583616519999233297817660658309586108259132128902337654680
1726272571413428762941301196195566782595664104869574278881462065194
1746772984865468615717739390164779355942303577413098022737087794545
24083971752646358058176716709574804776117
DSA:
ssh-dss AAAB3NzaC1kc3MAAACBAPWKZTPbsRIB8ydEXcxM3dyV/yrDbKStIlnzD/
Dg0h2HxcYV44sXZ2JXhamLK6P8bvuiyacWbUWa4PAtp1KMSdqsKeh3hKoA3vRRSy1N2
XFfAKxl5fwFfvJlPdOkFgzLGMinvSNYQwiQXbKTBH0Z4mUZpE85PWxDZMaCNBPjBrRA
AAAFQChb4vsdfQGNIjwbvwrNLaQ77isiwAAAIEAsy5YWDC99ebYHNRj5kh47wY4i8cZ
vH+p9cnrfwFTMU01VFDly3IR2G395NLy5Qd7ZDxfA9mCOfTyyEfbobMJZi8oGCstSNO
xrZZVnMqWrTYfdrKX7YKBw/Kjw6Bm iFq7O+jAhf1Dg45loAc27s6TLdtny1wRq/
ow2eTCD5nekAAACBAJ8rMccXTxHLFAczWS7EjOyDbsloBfPuSAb4oAsyjKXKVYNLQkT
LZfcFRu41bS2KV5LAwecsigF+DjKGWtPNIQqabKgYCw2odVzX4Gg+yqdTlYmGA7fHGm
8ARGeiG4ssFKy4Z6DmYPXFum1Yg0fhLwuHpOSKdxT3kk475S7 w0W
Console#
4-58
SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Event Logging Commands
Table 4-17 Event Logging Commands
Command
Function
Mode Page
logging on
Controls logging of error messages
GC
4-59
logging history
Limits syslog messages saved to switch memory GC
based on severity
4-60
logging host
Adds a syslog server host IP address that will
receive logging messages
GC
4-61
logging facility
Sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog GC
messages
4-62
logging trap
Limits syslog messages saved to a remote server GC
based on severity
4-63
clear logging
Clears messages from the logging buffer
4-64
PE
show logging
Displays the state of logging
PE
4-64
show log
Displays log messages
PE
4-67
logging on
This command controls logging of error messages, sending debug or error
messages to switch memory. The no form disables the logging process.
Syntax
[no] logging on
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
The logging process controls error messages saved to switch memory.
You can use the logging history command to control the type of error
messages that are stored.
4-59
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Example
Console(config)#logging on
Console(config)#
Related Commands
logging history (4-60)
clear logging (4-64)
logging history
This command limits syslog messages saved to switch memory based on
severity. The no form returns the logging of syslog messages to the default
level.
Syntax
logging history {flash | ram} level
no logging history {flash | ram}
• flash - Event history stored in flash memory (i.e., permanent
memory).
• ram - Event history stored in temporary RAM (i.e., memory
flushed on power reset).
• level - One of the levels listed below. Messages sent include the
selected level down to level 0. (Range: 0-7)
Table 4-18 Logging Levels
Level Severity Name
Description
7
debugging
Debugging messages
6
informational
Informational messages only
5
notifications
Normal but significant condition, such as cold
start
4
warnings
Warning conditions (e.g., return false,
unexpected return)
3
errors
Error conditions (e.g., invalid input, default
used)
2
critical
Critical conditions (e.g., memory allocation, or
free memory error - resource exhausted)
* There are only Level 2, 5 and 6 error messages for the current firmware release.
4-60
SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Table 4-18 Logging Levels (Continued)
Level Severity Name
Description
1
alerts
Immediate action needed
0
emergencies
System unusable
* There are only Level 2, 5 and 6 error messages for the current firmware release.
Default Setting
Flash: errors (level 3 - 0)
RAM: warnings (level 6 - 0)
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
The message level specified for flash memory must be a higher priority
(i.e., numerically lower) than that specified for RAM.
Example
Console(config)#logging history ram 0
Console(config)#
logging host
This command adds a syslog server host IP address that will receive
logging messages. Use the no form to remove a syslog server host.
Syntax
[no] logging host host_ip_address
host_ip_address - The IP address of a syslog server.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
4-61
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Command Usage
• By using this command more than once you can build up a list of host
IP addresses.
• The maximum number of host IP addresses allowed is five.
Example
Console(config)#logging host 10.1.0.3
Console(config)#
logging facility
This command sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages.
Use the no form to return the type to the default.
Syntax
[no] logging facility type
type - A number that indicates the facility used by the syslog server
to dispatch log messages to an appropriate service. (Range: 16-23)
Default Setting
23
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
The command specifies the facility type tag sent in syslog messages.
(See RFC 3164.) This type has no effect on the kind of messages
reported by the switch. However, it may be used by the syslog server to
sort messages or to store messages in the corresponding database.
Example
Console(config)#logging facility 19
Console(config)#
4-62
SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
logging trap
This command enables the logging of system messages to a remote server,
or limits the syslog messages saved to a remote server based on severity.
Use this command without a specified level to enable remote logging. Use
the no form to disable remote logging.
Syntax
logging trap [level]
no logging trap
level - One of the level arguments listed below. Messages sent
include the selected level up through level 0. (Refer to the table on
page 4-60.)
Default Setting
• Enabled
• Level 6 - 0
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• Using this command with a specified level enables remote logging and
sets the minimum severity level to be saved.
• Using this command without a specified level also enables remote
logging, but restores the minimum severity level to the default.
Example
Console(config)#logging trap 4
Console(config)#
4-63
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
clear logging
This command clears messages from the log buffer.
Syntax
clear logging [flash | ram]
• flash - Event history stored in flash memory (i.e., permanent
memory).
• ram - Event history stored in temporary RAM (i.e., memory
flushed on power reset).
Default Setting
Flash and RAM
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#clear logging
Console#
Related Commands
show logging (4-64)
show logging
This command displays the configuration settings for logging messages to
local switch memory, to an SMTP event handler, or to a remote syslog
server.
Syntax
show logging {flash | ram | sendmail | trap}
• flash - Displays settings for storing event messages in flash memory
(i.e., permanent memory).
• ram - Displays settings for storing event messages in temporary
RAM (i.e., memory flushed on power reset).
• sendmail - Displays settings for the SMTP event handler (page
4-71).
• trap - Displays settings for the trap function.
4-64
SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
The following example shows that system logging is enabled, the message
level for flash memory is “errors” (i.e., default level 3 - 0), the message
level for RAM is “informational” (i.e., default level 6 - 0).
Console#show logging flash
Syslog logging:
Enabled
History logging in FLASH: level errors
Console#show logging ram
Syslog logging:
Enabled
History logging in RAM: level informational
Console#
Table 4-19 show logging flash/ram - display description
Field
Description
Syslog logging
Shows if system logging has been enabled via the logging on
command.
History logging in The message level(s) reported based on the logging history
FLASH
command.
History logging in The message level(s) reported based on the logging history
RAM
command.
4-65
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
The following example displays settings for the trap function.
Console#show logging trap
Syslog logging:
REMOTELOG status:
REMOTELOG facility type:
REMOTELOG level type:
REMOTELOG server IP address:
REMOTELOG server IP address:
REMOTELOG server IP address:
REMOTELOG server IP address:
REMOTELOG server IP address:
Console#
Enabled
Enabled
local use 7
Informational messages only
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Table 4-20 show logging trap - display description
Field
Description
Syslog logging
Shows if system logging has been enabled via the logging on
command.
REMOTELOG
status
Shows if remote logging has been enabled via the logging
trap command.
REMOTELOG
facility type
The facility type for remote logging of syslog messages as
specified in the logging facility command.
REMOTELOG
level type
The severity threshold for syslog messages sent to a remote
server as specified in the logging trap command.
REMOTELOG
server IP address
The address of syslog servers as specified in the logging host
command.
Related Commands
show logging sendmail (4-71)
4-66
SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
show log
This command displays the system and event messages stored in memory.
Syntax
show log {flash | ram} [login] [tail]
• flash - Event history stored in flash memory (i.e., permanent
memory).
• ram - Event history stored in temporary RAM (i.e., memory
flushed on power reset).
• tail - Shows event history starting from the most recent entry.
• login - Shows the login record only.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
This command shows the system and event messages stored in
memory, including the time stamp, message level (page 4-60), program
module, function, and event number.
Example
The following example shows sample messages stored in RAM.
Console#show log ram
[5] 00:01:06 2001-01-01
"STA root change notification."
level: 6, module: 6, function: 1, and
[4] 00:01:00 2001-01-01
"STA root change notification."
level: 6, module: 6, function: 1, and
[3] 00:00:54 2001-01-01
"STA root change notification."
level: 6, module: 6, function: 1, and
[2] 00:00:50 2001-01-01
"STA topology change notification."
level: 6, module: 6, function: 1, and
[1] 00:00:48 2001-01-01
"VLAN 1 link-up notification."
level: 6, module: 6, function: 1, and
Console#
event no.: 1
event no.: 1
event no.: 1
event no.: 1
event no.: 1
4-67
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
SMTP Alert Commands
These commands configure SMTP event handling, and forwarding of alert
messages to the specified SMTP servers and email recipients.
Table 4-21 SMTP Alert Commands
Command
Function
Mode Page
logging sendmail
host
SMTP servers to receive alert messages
GC
4-68
logging sendmail
level
Severity threshold used to trigger alert
messages
GC
4-69
logging sendmail
source-email
Email address used for “From” field of alert GC
messages
4-70
logging sendmail
destination-email
Email recipients of alert messages
GC
4-70
logging sendmail
Enables SMTP event handling
GC
4-71
show logging
sendmail
Displays SMTP event handler settings
NE,
PE
4-71
logging sendmail host
This command specifies SMTP servers that will be sent alert messages.
Use the no form to remove an SMTP server.
Syntax
[no] logging sendmail host ip_address
ip_address - IP address of an SMTP server that will be sent alert
messages for event handling.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• You can specify up to three SMTP servers for event handing.
However, you must enter a separate command to specify each server.
4-68
SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
• To send email alerts, the switch first opens a connection, sends all the
email alerts waiting in the queue one by one, and finally closes the
connection.
• To open a connection, the switch first selects the server that
successfully sent mail during the last connection, or the first server
configured by this command. If it fails to send mail, the switch selects
the next server in the list and tries to send mail again. If it still fails, the
system will repeat the process at a periodic interval. (A trap will be
triggered if the switch cannot successfully open a connection.)
Example
Console(config)#logging sendmail host 192.168.1.200
Console(config)#
logging sendmail level
This command sets the severity threshold used to trigger alert messages.
Syntax
logging sendmail level level
level - One of the system message levels (page 4-60). Messages sent
include the selected level down to level 0. (Range: 0-7; Default: 7)
Default Setting
Level 7
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
The specified level indicates an event threshold. All events at this level
or higher will be sent to the configured email recipients. (For example,
using Level 7 will report all events from level 7 to level 0.)
Example
This example will send email alerts for system errors from level 4 through
0.
Console(config)#logging sendmail level 4
Console(config)#
4-69
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
logging sendmail source-email
This command sets the email address used for the “From” field in alert
messages. Use the no form to delete the source email address.
Syntax
[no] logging sendmail source-email email-address
email-address - The source email address used in alert messages.
(Range: 0-41 characters)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
You may use an symbolic email address that identifies the switch, or the
address of an administrator responsible for the switch.
Example
This example will set the source email [email protected].
Console(config)#logging sendmail source-email [email protected]
Console(config)#
logging sendmail destination-email
This command specifies the email recipients of alert messages. Use the no
form to remove a recipient.
Syntax
[no] logging sendmail destination-email email-address
email-address - The source email address used in alert messages.
(Range: 1-41 characters)
Default Setting
None
4-70
SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
You can specify up to five recipients for alert messages. However, you
must enter a separate command to specify each recipient.
Example
Console(config)#logging sendmail destination-email
[email protected]
Console(config)#
logging sendmail
This command enables SMTP event handling. Use the no form to disable
this function.
Syntax
[no] logging sendmail
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Console(config)#logging sendmail
Console(config)#
show logging sendmail
This command displays the settings for the SMTP event handler.
Command Mode
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec
4-71
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Example
Console#show logging sendmail
SMTP servers
----------------------------------------------1. 192.168.1.200
SMTP minimum severity level: 4
SMTP destination email addresses
----------------------------------------------1. [email protected]
SMTP source email address:
SMTP status:
Console#
[email protected]
Enabled
Time Commands
The system clock can be dynamically set by polling a set of specified time
servers (NTP or SNTP). Maintaining an accurate time on the switch
enables the system log to record meaningful dates and times for event
entries. If the clock is not set, the switch will only record the time from the
factory default set at the last bootup.
Table 4-22 Time Commands
Command
4-72
Function
Mode
Page
sntp client
Accepts time from specified time servers
GC
4-73
sntp server
Specifies one or more time servers
GC
4-74
sntp poll
Sets the interval at which the client polls for time GC
4-75
show sntp
Shows current SNTP configuration settings
NE,
PE
4-75
clock timezone Sets the time zone for the switch’s internal clock GC
4-76
calendar set
Sets the system date and time
PE
4-77
show calendar
Displays the current date and time setting
NE,
PE
4-78
SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
sntp client
This command enables SNTP client requests for time synchronization
from NTP or SNTP time servers specified with the sntp servers
command. Use the no form to disable SNTP client requests.
Syntax
[no] sntp client
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• The time acquired from time servers is used to record accurate dates
and times for log events. Without SNTP, the switch only records the
time starting from the factory default set at the last bootup (i.e.,
00:00:00, Jan. 1, 2001).
• This command enables client time requests to time servers specified
via the sntp servers command. It issues time synchronization requests
based on the interval set via the sntp poll command.
Example
Console(config)#sntp server 10.1.0.19
Console(config)#sntp poll 60
Console(config)#sntp client
Console(config)#end
Console#show sntp
Current time: Dec 23 02:52:44 2002
Poll interval: 60
Current mode: unicast
SNTP status: Enabled
SNTP server: 10.1.0.19 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0
Current server: 10.1.0.19
Console#
Related Commands
sntp server (4-74)
sntp poll (4-75)
show sntp (4-75)
4-73
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
sntp server
This command sets the IP address of the servers to which SNTP time
requests are issued. Use the this command with no arguments to clear all
time servers from the current list.
Syntax
sntp server [ip1 [ip2 [ip3]]]
ip - IP address of a time server (NTP or SNTP).
(Range: 1-3 addresses)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
This command specifies time servers from which the switch will poll
for time updates when set to SNTP client mode. The client will poll the
time servers in the order specified until a response is received. It issues
time synchronization requests based on the interval set via the sntp
poll command.
Example
Console(config)#sntp server 10.1.0.19
Console(config)#
Related Commands
sntp client (4-73)
sntp poll (4-75)
show sntp (4-75)
4-74
SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
sntp poll
This command sets the interval between sending time requests when the
switch is set to SNTP client mode. Use the no form to restore to the
default.
Syntax
sntp poll seconds
no sntp poll
seconds - Interval between time requests. (Range: 16-16384 seconds)
Default Setting
16 seconds
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Console(config)#sntp poll 60
Console(config)#
Related Commands
sntp client (4-73)
show sntp
This command displays the current time and configuration settings for the
SNTP client, and indicates whether or not the local time has been properly
updated.
Command Mode
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec
Command Usage
This command displays the current time, the poll interval used for
sending time synchronization requests, and the current SNTP mode
(i.e., unicast).
4-75
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Example
Console#show sntp
Current time: Dec 23 05:13:28 2002
Poll interval: 16
Current mode: unicast
SNTP status : Enabled
SNTP server 137.92.140.80 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0
Current server: 137.92.140.80
Console#
clock timezone
This command sets the time zone for the switch’s internal clock.
Syntax
clock timezone name hour hours minute minutes {before-utc |
after-utc}
• name - Name of timezone, usually an acronym. (Range: 1-29
characters)
• hours - Number of hours before/after UTC. (Range: 0-12 hours)
• minutes - Number of minutes before/after UTC. (Range: 0-59
minutes)
• before-utc - Sets the local time zone before (east) of UTC.
• after-utc - Sets the local time zone after (west) of UTC.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
This command sets the local time zone relative to the Coordinated
Universal Time (UTC, formerly Greenwich Mean Time or GMT),
based on the earth’s prime meridian, zero degrees longitude. To display
a time corresponding to your local time, you must indicate the number
of hours and minutes your time zone is east (before) or west (after) of
UTC.
4-76
SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Example
Console(config)#clock timezone Japan hours 8 minute 0 after-UTC
Console(config)#
Related Commands
show sntp (4-75)
calendar set
This command sets the system clock. It may be used if there is no time
server on your network, or if you have not configured the switch to receive
signals from a time server.
Syntax
calendar set hour min sec {day month year | month day year}
•
•
•
•
•
hour - Hour in 24-hour format. (Range: 0-23)
min - Minute. (Range: 0-59)
sec - Second. (Range: 0-59)
day - Day of month. (Range: 1-31)
month - january | february | march | april | may | june | july |
august | september | october | november | december
• year - Year (4-digit). (Range: 2001-2100)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
This example shows how to set the system clock to 15:12:34, April 1st,
2004.
Console#calendar set 15 12 34 1 April 2004
Console#
4-77
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
show calendar
This command displays the system clock.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show calendar
15:12:45 April 1 2004
Console#
System Status Commands
Table 4-23 System Status Commands
4-78
Command
Function
show
startup-config
Displays the contents of the configuration file PE
(stored in flash memory) that is used to start up
the system
Mode
Page
4-79
show
Displays the configuration data currently in use PE
running-config
4-81
show system
Displays system information
NE,
PE
4-83
show users
Shows all active console and Telnet sessions,
including user name, idle time, and IP address
of Telnet clients
NE,
PE
4-84
show version
Displays version information for the system
NE,
PE
4-84
SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
show startup-config
This command displays the configuration file stored in non-volatile
memory that is used to start up the system.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
• Use this command in conjunction with the show running-config
command to compare the information in running memory to the
information stored in non-volatile memory.
• This command displays settings for key command modes. Each mode
group is separated by “!” symbols, and includes the configuration
mode command, and corresponding commands. This command
displays the following information:
-
SNMP community strings
Users (names and access levels)
VLAN database (VLAN ID, name and state)
VLAN configuration settings for each interface
IP address configured for the switch
Spanning tree settings
Any configured settings for the console port and Telnet
4-79
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Example
Console#show startup-config
building startup-config, please wait.....
!
!
username admin access-level 15
username admin password 0 admin
!
username guest access-level 0
username guest password 0 guest
!
enable password level 15 0 super
!
snmp-server community public ro
snmp-server community private rw
!
logging history ram 6
logging history flash 3
!
vlan database
vlan 1 name DefaultVlan media ethernet state active
!
interface ethernet 1/1
switchport allowed vlan add 1 untagged
switchport native vlan 1
.
.
.
interface vlan 1
ip address dhcp
!
line console
!
line VTY
!
end
Console#
Related Commands
show running-config (4-81)
4-80
SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
show running-config
This command displays the configuration information currently in use.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
• Use this command in conjunction with the show startup-config
command to compare the information in running memory to the
information stored in non-volatile memory.
• This command displays settings for key command modes. Each mode
group is separated by “!” symbols, and includes the configuration
mode command, and corresponding commands. This command
displays the following information:
-
MAC address for each switch in the stack
SNTP server settings
SNMP community strings
Users (names, access levels, and encrypted passwords)
Event log settings
VLAN database (VLAN ID, name and state)
VLAN configuration settings for each interface
IP address configured for the switch
Layer 4 precedence settings
Any configured settings for the console port and Telnet
4-81
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Example
Console#show running-config
building running-config, please wait.....
!
phymap 00-30-f1-d3-26-00
!
SNTP server 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0
!
clock timezone hours 0 minute 0 after-UTC
!
SNMP-server community private rw
SNMP-server community public ro
!
!
username admin access-level 15
username admin password 7 21232f297a57a5a743894a0e4a801fc3
username guest access-level 0
username guest password 7 084e0343a0486ff05530df6c705c8bb4
enable password level 15 7 1b3231655cebb7a1f783eddf27d254ca
!
!
logging history ram 6
logging history flash 3
!
vlan database
vlan 1 name DefaultVlan media ethernet state active
!
!
interface ethernet 1/1
switchport allowed vlan add 1 untagged
switchport native vlan 1
.
.
.
!
interface vlan 1
IP address DHCP
!
!
no map IP precedence
no map IP DSCP
!
!
line console
!
line VTY
!
end
!
Console#
Related Commands
show startup-config (4-79)
4-82
SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
show system
This command displays system information.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec
Command Usage
• For a description of the items shown by this command, refer to
“Displaying System Information” on page -11.
• The POST results should all display “PASS.” If any POST test
indicates “FAIL,” contact your distributor for assistance.
Example
Console#show system
System description: TigerSwitch 10/100 6752AL2
System OID string: 1.3.6.1.4.1.202.20.44
System information
System Up time:
3 hours, 0 minutes, and 7.18 seconds
System Name:
[NONE]
System Location:
[NONE]
System Contact:
[NONE]
MAC address:
00-30-F1-D3-26-00
Web server:
enabled
Web server port:
80
Web secure server:
enabled
Web secure server port: 443
Telnet server
: enable
Telnet port
: 23
Jumbo Frame :
Disabled
POST result
DUMMY Test 1.................PASS
UART LOOP BACK Test..........PASS
DRAM Test....................PASS
Timer Test...................PASS
Switch Int Loopback test.....PASS
Done All Pass.
Console#
4-83
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
show users
Shows all active console and Telnet sessions, including user name, idle
time, and IP address of Telnet client.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec
Command Usage
The session used to execute this command is indicated by a “*” symbol
next to the Line (i.e., session) index number.
Example
Console#show users
Username accounts:
Username Privilege Public-Key
-------- --------- ---------admin
15
None
guest
0
None
steve
15
RSA
Online users:
Line
Username Idle time (h:m:s) Remote IP addr.
----------- -------- ----------------- --------------0
console
admin
0:14:14
* 1
VTY 0
admin
0:00:00
192.168.1.19
2
SSH 1
steve
0:00:06
192.168.1.19
Web online users:
Line
Remote IP addr Username Idle time (h:m:s).
----------- -------------- -------- -----------------1
HTTP
192.168.1.19
admin
0:00:00
Console#
show version
This command displays hardware and software version information for the
system.
Default Setting
None
4-84
SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Command Mode
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec
Command Usage
See “Displaying Switch Hardware/Software Versions” on page 3-13 for
detailed information on the items displayed by this command.
Example
Console#show version
Unit 1
Serial number:
Service tag:
Hardware version:
Module A type:
Module B type:
Number of ports:
Main power status:
Redundant power status:
Agent(master)
Unit ID:
Loader version:
Boot ROM version:
Operation code version:
Console#
A419048860
R0B
1000BaseT
1000BaseT
52
up
not present
1
2.2.1.1
2.2.1.3
2.2.2.2
Frame Size Commands
Table 4-24 Frame Size Commands
Command
Function
Mode
jumbo frame
Enables support for jumbo frames
GC
Page
4-85
jumbo frame
This command enables support for jumbo frames. Use the no form to
disable it.
Syntax
[no] jumbo frame
Default Setting
Disabled
4-85
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• This switch provides more efficient throughput for large sequential
data transfers by supporting jumbo frames up to 9216 bytes.
Compared to standard Ethernet frames that run only up to 1.5 KB,
using jumbo frames significantly reduces the per-packet overhead
required to process protocol encapsulation fields.
• To use jumbo frames, both the source and destination end nodes
(such as a computer or server) must support this feature. Also, when
the connection is operating at full duplex, all switches in the network
between the two end nodes must be able to accept the extended frame
size. And for half-duplex connections, all devices in the collision
domain would need to support jumbo frames.
• Enabling jumbo frames will limit the maximum threshold for
broadcast storm control to 64 packets per second. (See the switchport
broadcast command on page 4-151.)
• The current setting for jumbo frames can be disabled with the show
system command (page 4-83).
Example
Console(config)#jumbo frame
Console(config)#
Flash/File Commands
These commands are used to manage the system code or configuration
files.
Table 4-25 Flash/File Commands
4-86
Command
Function
copy
Copies a code image or a switch configuration to PE
or from flash memory or a TFTP server
Mode
Page
4-87
delete
Deletes a file or code image
PE
4-90
dir
Displays a list of files in flash memory
PE
4-91
FLASH/FILE COMMANDS
Table 4-25 Flash/File Commands
Command
Function
whichboot
Displays the files booted
boot system Specifies the file or image used to start up the
system
Mode
Page
PE
4-92
GC
4-93
copy
This command moves (upload/download) a code image or configuration
file between the switch’s flash memory and a TFTP server. When you save
the system code or configuration settings to a file on a TFTP server, that
file can later be downloaded to the switch to restore system operation. The
success of the file transfer depends on the accessibility of the TFTP server
and the quality of the network connection.
Syntax
copy file {file | running-config | startup-config | tftp | unit}
copy running-config {file | startup-config | tftp}
copy startup-config {file | running-config | tftp}
copy tftp {file | running-config | startup-config |
https-certificate | public-key}
copy unit file
• file - Keyword that allows you to copy to/from a file.
• running-config - Keyword that allows you to copy to/from the
current running configuration.
• startup-config - The configuration used for system initialization.
• tftp - Keyword that allows you to copy to/from a TFTP server.
• https-certificate - Copies an HTTPS certificate from an TFTP
server to the switch.
• public-key - Keyword that allows you to copy a SSH key from a
TFTP server. (See “Secure Shell Commands” on page 4-46.)
• unit - Keyword that allows you to copy to/from a unit.
Default Setting
None
4-87
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
• The system prompts for data required to complete the copy
command.
• The destination file name should not contain slashes (\ or /), the
leading letter of the file name should not be a period (.), and the
maximum length for file names on the TFTP server is 127 characters
or 31 characters for files on the switch. (Valid characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9,
“.”, “-”, “_”)
• Due to the size limit of the flash memory, the switch supports only
two operation code files.
• The maximum number of user-defined configuration files depends on
available memory.
• You can use “Factory_Default_Config.cfg” as the source to copy
from the factory default configuration file, but you cannot use it as the
destination.
• To replace the startup configuration, you must use startup-config as
the destination.
• Use the copy file unit command to copy a local file to another switch
in the stack. Use the copy unit file command to copy a file from
another switch in the stack.
• The Boot ROM and Loader cannot be uploaded or downloaded from
the TFTP server. You must follow the instructions in the release notes
for new firmware, or contact your distributor for help.
• For information on specifying an https-certificate, see See “Replacing
the Default Secure-site Certificate” on page 3-56.. For information on
configuring the switch to use HTTPS/SSL for a secure connection,
see See “ip http secure-server” on page 4-42..
4-88
FLASH/FILE COMMANDS
Example
The following example shows how to upload the configuration settings to
a file on the TFTP server:
Console#copy file tftp
Choose file type:
1. config: 2. opcode: <1-2>: 1
Source file name: startup
TFTP server ip address: 10.1.0.99
Destination file name: startup.01
TFTP completed.
Success.
Console#
The following example shows how to copy the running configuration to a
startup file.
Console#copy running-config file
destination file name: startup
Write to FLASH Programming.
\Write to FLASH finish.
Success.
Console#
The following example shows how to download a configuration file:
Console#copy tftp startup-config
TFTP server ip address: 10.1.0.99
Source configuration file name: startup.01
Startup configuration file name [startup]:
Write to FLASH Programming.
\Write to FLASH finish.
Success.
Console#
This example shows how to copy a secure-site certificate from an TFTP
server. It then reboots the switch to activate the certificate:
Console#copy tftp https-certificate
TFTP server ip address: 10.1.0.19
Source certificate file name: SS-certificate
Source private file name: SS-private
Private password: ********
Success.
Console#reload
System will be restarted, continue <y/n>? y
4-89
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
This example shows how to copy a public-key used by SSH from an TFTP
server. Note that public key authentication via SSH is only supported for
users configured locally on the switch:
Console#copy tftp public-key
TFTP server IP address: 192.168.1.19
Choose public key type:
1. RSA: 2. DSA: <1-2>: 1
Source file name: steve.pub
Username: steve
TFTP Download
Success.
Write to FLASH Programming.
Success.
Console#
delete
This command deletes a file or image.
Syntax
delete [unit:] filename
filename - Name of the configuration file or image name.
unit - Stack unit. (This is unit 1)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
• If the file type is used for system startup, then this file cannot be
deleted.
• “Factory_Default_Config.cfg” cannot be deleted.
• A colon (:) is required after the specified unit number.
4-90
FLASH/FILE COMMANDS
Example
This example shows how to delete the test2.cfg configuration file from
flash memory for unit 1.
Console#delete 1:test2.cfg
Console#
Related Commands
dir (4-91)
delete public-key (4-52)
dir
This command displays a list of files in flash memory.
Syntax
dir [unit:] {{boot-rom: | config: | opcode:} [:filename]}
The type of file or image to display includes:
•
•
•
•
•
boot-rom - Boot ROM (or diagnostic) image file.
config - Switch configuration file.
opcode - Run-time operation code image file.
filename - Name of the configuration file or code image.
unit - Stack unit. (This is unit 1)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
• If you enter the command dir without any parameters, the system
displays all files.
• A colon (:) is required after the specified unit number.
4-91
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
• File information is shown below:
Table 4-26 File Directory Information
Column Heading
Description
file name
The name of the file.
file type
File types: Boot-Rom, Operation Code, and Config file.
startup
Shows if this file is used when the system is started.
size
The length of the file in bytes.
Example
The following example shows how to display all file information:
Console#dir 1:
file name
file type
startup size (byte)
----------------------------------------- ------- ----------Unit1:
Diag_V2.2.1.3.bix
Boot-Rom image Y
196020
V2.1.5.4.bix
Operation Code N
1745120
V2.2.2.2.bix
Operation Code Y
1745500
Factory_Default_Config.cfg Config File
N
5013
startup
Config File
Y
6023
-----------------------------------------------------------------Total free space: 340787
Console#
whichboot
This command displays which files were booted when the system powered
up.
Syntax
whichboot
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
4-92
FLASH/FILE COMMANDS
Example
This example shows the information displayed by the whichboot
command. See the table under the dir command for a description of the
file information displayed by this command.
Console#whichboot
file name
file type
startup size (byte)
----------------------------------------- ------- ----------Unit1:
Diag_V2.2.1.3.bix
Boot-Rom image Y
196020
V2.2.2.2.bix
Operation Code Y
1745500
startup
Config File
Y
6023
-----------------------------------------------------------------Total free space: 340787
Console#
boot system
This command specifies the image used to start up the system.
Syntax
boot system [unit:] {boot-rom| config | opcode}: filename
The type of file or image to set as a default includes:
• boot-rom* - Boot ROM.
• config* - Configuration file.
• opcode* - Run-time operation code.
• filename - Name of the configuration file or code image.
• unit* - Specifies the unit number. (This is unit 1)
* The colon (:) is required.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• A colon (:) is required after the specified unit number and file type.
• If the file contains an error, it cannot be set as the default file.
4-93
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Example
Console(config)#boot system config: startup
Console(config)#
Related Commands
dir (4-91)
whichboot (4-92)
Authentication Commands
You can configure this switch to authenticate users logging into the system
for management access using local or RADIUS authentication methods.
You can also enable port-based authentication for network client access
using IEEE 802.1X.
Table 4-27 Authentication Commands
Command Group
Function
Page
Authentication
Sequence
Defines logon authentication method and
precedence
4-94
RADIUS Client
Configures settings for authentication via a
RADIUS server
4-97
TACACS+ Client
Configures settings for authentication via a
TACACS+ server
4-102
Port Security
Configures secure addresses for a port
4-104
Port Authentication Configures host authentication on specific ports
using 802.1X
4-107
Authentication Sequence
Table 4-28 Authentication Sequence
Command
Function
authentication login
Defines logon authentication method and GC
precedence
authentication enable Defines the authentication method and
precedence for command mode change
4-94
Mode
GC
Page
4-95
4-96
AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS
authentication login
This command defines the login authentication method and precedence.
Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
authentication login {[local] [radius] [tacacs]}
no authentication login
• local - Use local password.
• radius - Use RADIUS server password.
• tacacs - Use TACACS server password.
Default Setting
Local
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• RADIUS uses UDP while TACACS+ uses TCP. UDP only offers best
effort delivery, while TCP offers a connection-oriented transport.
Also, note that RADIUS encrypts only the password in the
access-request packet from the client to the server, while TACACS+
encrypts the entire body of the packet.
• RADIUS and TACACS+ logon authentication assigns a specific
privilege level for each user name and password pair. The user name,
password, and privilege level must be configured on the authentication
server.
• You can specify three authentication methods in a single command to
indicate the authentication sequence. For example, if you enter
“authentication login radius tacacs local,” the user name and
password on the RADIUS server is verified first. If the RADIUS
server is not available, then authentication is attempted on the
TACACS+ server. If the TACACS+ server is not available, the local
user name and password is checked.
4-95
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Example
Console(config)#authentication login radius
Console(config)#
Related Commands
username - for setting the local user names and passwords (4-35)
authentication enable
This command defines the authentication method and precedence to use
when changing from Exec command mode to Privileged Exec command
mode with the enable command (see page 4-27). Use the no form to
restore the default.
Syntax
authentication enable {[local] [radius] [tacacs]}
no authentication enable
• local - Use local password only.
• radius - Use RADIUS server password only.
• tacacs - Use TACACS server password.
Default Setting
Local
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• RADIUS uses UDP while TACACS+ uses TCP. UDP only offers best
effort delivery, while TCP offers a connection-oriented transport.
Also, note that RADIUS encrypts only the password in the
access-request packet from the client to the server, while TACACS+
encrypts the entire body of the packet.
• RADIUS and TACACS+ logon authentication assigns a specific
privilege level for each user name and password pair. The user name,
password, and privilege level must be configured on the authentication
server.
4-96
AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS
• You can specify three authentication methods in a single command to
indicate the authentication sequence. For example, if you enter
“authentication enable radius tacacs local,” the user name and
password on the RADIUS server is verified first. If the RADIUS
server is not available, then authentication is attempted on the
TACACS+ server. If the TACACS+ server is not available, the local
user name and password is checked.
Example
Console(config)#authentication enable radius
Console(config)#
Related Commands
enable password - sets the password for changing command modes (4-36)
RADIUS Client
Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service (RADIUS) is a logon
authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to
control access to RADIUS-aware devices on the network. An
authentication server contains a database of multiple user name/password
pairs with associated privilege levels for each user or group that require
management access to a switch.
Table 4-29 RADIUS Client Commands
Command
Function
Mode
radius-server host
Specifies the RADIUS server
GC
4-99
radius-server port
Sets the RADIUS server network port
GC
4-99
radius-server key
Sets the RADIUS encryption key
GC
4-99
radius-server
retransmit
Sets the number of retries
GC
4-100
radius-server timeout Sets the interval between sending
authentication requests
GC
4-100
show radius-server
PE
4-101
Shows the current RADIUS settings
Page
4-97
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
radius-server host
This command specifies primary and backup RADIUS servers and
authentication parameters that apply to each server. Use the no form to
restore the default values.
Syntax
[no] radius-server index host {host_ip_address | host_alias}
[auth-port auth_port] [timeout timeout] [retransmit retransmit]
[key key]
• index - Allows you to specify up to five servers. These servers are
queried in sequence until a server responds or the retransmit period
expires.
• host_ip_address - IP address of server.
• host_alias - Symbolic name of server. (Maximum length: 20
characters)
• port_number - RADIUS server UDP port used for authentication
messages. (Range: 1-65535)
• timeout - Number of seconds the switch waits for a reply before
resending a request. (Range: 1-65535)
• retransmit - Number of times the switch will try to authenticate logon
access via the RADIUS server. (Range: 1-30)
• key - Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client.
Do not use blank spaces in the string.
(Maximum length: 20 characters)
Default Setting
• auth-port - 1812
• timeout - 5 seconds
• retransmit - 2
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Console(config)#radius-server 1 host 192.168.1.20 auth-port 181
timeout 10 retransmit 5 key green
Console(config)#
4-98
AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS
radius-server port
This command sets the RADIUS server network port. Use the no form to
restore the default.
Syntax
radius-server port port_number
no radius-server port
port_number - RADIUS server UDP port used for authentication
messages. (Range: 1-65535)
Default Setting
1812
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Console(config)#radius-server port 181
Console(config)#
radius-server key
This command sets the RADIUS encryption key. Use the no form to
restore the default.
Syntax
radius-server key key_string
no radius-server key
key_string - Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for
client. Do not use blank spaces in the string. (Maximum length: 20
characters)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
4-99
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Example
Console(config)#radius-server key green
Console(config)#
radius-server retransmit
This command sets the number of retries. Use the no form to restore the
default.
Syntax
radius-server retransmit number_of_retries
no radius-server retransmit
number_of_retries - Number of times the switch will try to
authenticate logon access via the RADIUS server. (Range: 1-30)
Default Setting
2
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Console(config)#radius-server retransmit 5
Console(config)#
radius-server timeout
This command sets the interval between transmitting authentication
requests to the RADIUS server. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
radius-server timeout number_of_seconds
no radius-server timeout
number_of_seconds - Number of seconds the switch waits for a reply
before resending a request. (Range: 1-65535)
Default Setting
5
4-100
AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Console(config)#radius-server timeout 10
Console(config)#
show radius-server
This command displays the current settings for the RADIUS server.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show radius-server
Remote RADIUS server configuration:
Global settings
Communication key with RADIUS server:
Server port number:
1812
Retransmit times:
2
Request timeout:
5
Sever 1:
Server IP address: 192.168.1.1
Communication key with RADIUS server: *****
Server port number: 181
Retransmit times: 2
Request timeout: 5
Console#
4-101
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
TACACS+ Client
Terminal Access Controller Access Control System (TACACS+) is a logon
authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to
control access to TACACS-aware devices on the network. An
authentication server contains a database of multiple user name/password
pairs with associated privilege levels for each user or group that require
management access to a switch.
Table 4-30 TACACS Commands
Command
Function
Mode
Page
tacacs-server host
Specifies the TACACS+ server
GC
4-102
tacacs-server port
Specifies the TACACS+ server network
port
GC
4-103
tacacs-server key
Sets the TACACS+ encryption key
GC
4-103
GC
4-104
show tacacs-server Shows the current TACACS+ settings
tacacs-server host
This command specifies the TACACS+ server. Use the no form to restore
the default.
Syntax
tacacs-server host host_ip_address
no tacacs-server host
host_ip_address - IP address of a TACACS+ server.
Default Setting
10.11.12.13
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Console(config)#tacacs-server host 192.168.1.25
Console(config)#
4-102
AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS
tacacs-server port
This command specifies the TACACS+ server network port. Use the no
form to restore the default.
Syntax
tacacs-server port port_number
no tacacs-server port
port_number - TACACS+ server TCP port used for authentication
messages. (Range: 1-65535)
Default Setting
49
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Console(config)#tacacs-server port 181
Console(config)#
tacacs-server key
This command sets the TACACS+ encryption key. Use the no form to
restore the default.
Syntax
tacacs-server key key_string
no tacacs-server key
key_string - Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for
the client. Do not use blank spaces in the string.
(Maximum length: 20 characters)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
4-103
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Example
Console(config)#tacacs-server key green
Console(config)#
show tacacs-server
This command displays the current settings for the TACACS+ server.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show tacacs-server
Remote TACACS server configuration:
Server IP address:
10.11.12.13
Communication key with TACACS server: *****
Server port number:
49
Console#
Port Security Commands
These commands can be used to enable port security on a port. When
using port security, the switch stops learning new MAC addresses on the
specified port when it has reached a configured maximum number. Only
incoming traffic with source addresses already stored in the dynamic or
static address table for this port will be authorized to access the network.
The port will drop any incoming frames with a source MAC address that is
unknown or has been previously learned from another port. If a device
with an unauthorized MAC address attempts to use the switch port, the
intrusion will be detected and the switch can automatically take action by
disabling the port and sending a trap message.
4-104
AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS
Table 4-31 Port Security Commands
Command
Function
Mode Page
port security
Configures a secure port
IC
mac-address-table
static
Maps a static address to a port in a VLAN GC
4-179
show
mac-address-table
Displays entries in the bridge-forwarding PE
database
4-180
4-105
port security
This command enables or configures port security. Use the no form
without any keywords to disable port security. Use the no form with the
appropriate keyword to restore the default settings for a response to
security violation or for the maximum number of allowed addresses.
Syntax
port security [action {shutdown | trap | trap-and-shutdown}
| max-mac-count address-count]
no port security [action | max-mac-count]
• action - Response to take when port security is violated.
- shutdown - Disable port only.
- trap - Issue SNMP trap message only.
- trap-and-shutdown - Issue SNMP trap message and disable port.
• max-mac-count
- address-count - The maximum number of MAC addresses that can
be learned on a port. (Range: 0-1024)
Default Setting
• Status: Disabled
• Action: None
• Maximum Addresses: 0
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)
4-105
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Command Usage
• If you enable port security, the switch stops learning new MAC
addresses on the specified port when it has reached a configured
maximum number. Only incoming traffic with source addresses
already stored in the dynamic or static address table will be accepted.
• First use the port security max-mac-count command to set the
number of addresses, and then use the port security command to
enable security on the port.
• Use the no port security max-mac-count command to disable port
security and reset the maximum number of addresses to the default.
• You can also manually add secure addresses with the
mac-address-table static command.
• A secure port has the following restrictions:
• Cannot use port monitoring.
• Cannot be a multi-VLAN port.
• Cannot be connected to a network interconnection device.
• Cannot be a trunk port.
• If a port is disabled due to a security violation, it must be manually
re-enabled using the no shutdown command.
Example
The following example enables port security for port 5, and sets the
response to a security violation to issue a trap message:
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5
Console(config-if)#port security action trap
Related Commands
shutdown (4-150)
mac-address-table static (4-179)
show mac-address-table (4-180)
4-106
AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS
802.1X Port Authentication
The switch supports IEEE 802.1X (dot1x) port-based access control that
prevents unauthorized access to the network by requiring users to first
submit credentials for authentication. Client authentication is controlled
centrally by a RADIUS server using EAP (Extensible Authentication
Protocol).
Table 4-32 802.1X Port Authentication
Command
Function
Mode
Page
dot1x
system-auth-control
Enables dot1x globally on the switch.
GC
4-108
dot1x default
Resets all dot1x parameters to their
default values
GC
4-108
dot1x max-req
Sets the maximum number of times that IC
the switch retransmits an EAP request/
identity packet to the client before it
times out the authentication session
4-109
dot1x port-control
Sets dot1x mode for a port interface
IC
4-109
dot1x
operation-mode
Allows single or multiple hosts on an
dot1x port
IC
4-110
dot1x re-authenticate Forces re-authentication on specific ports PE
4-111
dot1x
re-authentication
Enables re-authentication for all ports
IC
4-111
dot1x timeout
quiet-period
Sets the time that a switch port waits after IC
the Max Request Count has been
exceeded before attempting to acquire a
new client
4-112
dot1x timeout
re-authperiod
Sets the time period after which a
connected client must be
re-authenticated
IC
4-112
dot1x timeout
tx-period
Sets the time period during an
authentication session that the switch
waits before re-transmitting an EAP
packet
IC
4-113
show dot1x
Shows all dot1x related information
PE
4-114
4-107
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
dot1x system-auth-control
This command enables 802.1X port authentication globally on the switch.
Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
[no] system-auth-control
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Console(config)#dot1x system-auth-control
Console(config)#
dot1x default
This command sets all configurable dot1x global and port settings to their
default values.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Console(config)#dot1x default
Console(config)#
4-108
AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS
dot1x max-req
This command sets the maximum number of times the switch port will
retransmit an EAP request/identity packet to the client before it times out
the authentication session. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
dot1x max-req count
no dot1x max-req
count – The maximum number of requests (Range: 1-10)
Default
2
Command Mode
Interface Configuration
Example
Console(config)#interface eth 1/2
Console(config-if)#dot1x max-req 2
Console(config-if)#
dot1x port-control
This command sets the dot1x mode on a port interface. Use the no form
to restore the default.
Syntax
dot1x port-control {auto | force-authorized | force-unauthorized}
no dot1x port-control
• auto – Requires a dot1x-aware connected client to be authorized by
the RADIUS server. Clients that are not dot1x-aware will be denied
access.
• force-authorized – Configures the port to grant access to all
clients, either dot1x-aware or otherwise.
• force-unauthorized – Configures the port to deny access to all
clients, either dot1x-aware or otherwise.
4-109
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Default
force-authorized
Command Mode
Interface Configuration
Example
Console(config)#interface eth 1/2
Console(config-if)#dot1x port-control auto
Console(config-if)#
dot1x operation-mode
This command allows single or multiple hosts (clients) to connect to an
802.1X-authorized port. Use the no form with no keywords to restore the
default to single host. Use the no form with the multi-host max-count
keywords to restore the default maximum count.
Syntax
dot1x operation-mode {single-host | multi-host [max-count
count]}
no dot1x operation-mode [multi-host max-count]
• single-host – Allows only a single host to connect to this port.
• multi-host – Allows multiple host to connect to this port.
• max-count – Keyword for the maximum number of hosts.
- count – The maximum number of hosts that can connect to a port.
(Range: 1-1024; Default: 5)
Default
Single-host
Command Mode
Interface Configuration
Command Usage
• The “max-count” parameter specified by this command is only
effective if the dot1x mode is set to “auto” by the dot1x port-control
command (page 4-109).
4-110
AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS
• In “multi-host” mode, only one host connected to a port needs to pass
authentication for all other hosts to be granted network access.
Similarly, a port can become unauthorized for all hosts if one attached
host fails re-authentication or sends an EAPOL logoff message.
Example
Console(config)#interface eth 1/2
Console(config-if)#dot1x operation-mode multi-host max-count 10
Console(config-if)#
dot1x re-authenticate
This command forces re-authentication on all ports or a specific interface.
Syntax
dot1x re-authenticate [interface]
interface
• ethernet unit/port
- unit - Stack unit. (This is unit 1)
- port - Port number. (Range: 1-52)
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#dot1x re-authenticate
Console#
dot1x re-authentication
This command enables periodic re-authentication globally for all ports.
Use the no form to disable re-authentication.
Syntax
[no] dot1x re-authentication
Command Mode
Interface Configuration
4-111
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Example
Console(config)#interface eth 1/2
Console(config-if)#dot1x re-authentication
Console(config-if)#
dot1x timeout quiet-period
This command sets the time that a switch port waits after the Max Request
Count has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client. Use
the no form to reset the default.
Syntax
dot1x timeout quiet-period seconds
no dot1x timeout quiet-period
seconds - The number of seconds. (Range: 1-65535)
Default
60 seconds
Command Mode
Interface Configuration
Example
Console(config)#interface eth 1/2
Console(config-if)#dot1x timeout quiet-period 350
Console(config-if)#
dot1x timeout re-authperiod
This command sets the time period after which a connected client must be
re-authenticated.
Syntax
dot1x timeout re-authperiod seconds
no dot1x timeout re-authperiod
seconds - The number of seconds. (Range: 1-65535)
Default
3600 seconds
4-112
AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS
Command Mode
Interface Configuration
Example
Console(config)#interface eth 1/2
Console(config-if)#dot1x timeout re-authperiod 300
Console(config-if)#
dot1x timeout tx-period
This command sets the time that an interface on the switch waits during an
authentication session before re-transmitting an EAP packet. Use the no
form to reset to the default value.
Syntax
dot1x timeout tx-period seconds
no dot1x timeout tx-period
seconds - The number of seconds. (Range: 1-65535)
Default
30 seconds
Command Mode
Interface Configuration
Example
Console(config)#interface eth 1/2
Console(config-if)#dot1x timeout tx-period 300
Console(config-if)#
4-113
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
show dot1x
This command shows general port authentication related settings on the
switch or a specific interface.
Syntax
show dot1x [statistics] [interface interface]
• statistics - Displays dot1x status for each port.
• interface
• ethernet unit/port
-unit - Stack unit. (This is unit 1)
-port - Port number. (Range: 1-52)
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
This command displays the following information:
• Global 802.1X Parameters – Shows whether or not 802.1X port
authentication is globally enabled on the switch.
• 802.1X Port Summary – Displays the port access control parameters
for each interface, including the following items:
- Status
– Administrative state for port access control.
- Operation Mode– Dot1x port control operation mode (page 4-110).
- Mode
– Dot1x port control mode (page 4-109).
- Authorized
– Authorization status (yes or n/a - not
authorized).
• 802.1X Port Details – Displays the port access control parameters
for each interface, including the following items:
- reauth-enabled – Periodic re-authentication (page 4-111).
- reauth-period – Time after which a connected client must be
re-authenticated (page 4-112).
- quiet-period
– Time a port waits after Max Request Count is
exceeded before attempting to acquire a new
client (page 4-112).
4-114
AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS
- tx-period
– Time a port waits during authentication
session before re-transmitting EAP packet
(page 4-113).
- supplicant-timeout – Supplicant timeout.
- server-timeout
– Server timeout.
- reauth-max
– Maximum number of reauthentication
attempts.
- max-req
– Maximum number of times a port will
retransmit an EAP request/identity packet
to the client before it times out the
authentication session (page 4-109).
- Status
– Authorization status (authorized or not).
- Operation Mode – Shows if single or multiple hosts (clients)
can connect to an 802.1X-authorized port.
- Max Count
– The maximum number of hosts allowed to
access this port (page 4-110).
- Port-control
– Shows the dot1x mode on a port as auto,
force-authorized, or force-unauthorized
(page 4-109).
- Supplicant
– MAC address of authorized client.
- Current Identifier – The integer (0-255) used by the
Authenticator to identify the current
authentication session.
• Authenticator State Machine
- State
– Current state (including initialize, disconnected,
connecting, authenticating, authenticated,
aborting, held, force_authorized,
force_unauthorized).
- Reauth Count – Number of times connecting state is re-entered.
• Backend State Machine
- State
– Current state (including request, response,
success, fail, timeout, idle, initialize).
- Request Count – Number of EAP Request packets sent to the
Supplicant without receiving a response.
- Identifier(Server) – Identifier carried in the most recent EAP
Success, Failure or Request packet received
4-115
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
from the Authentication Server.
• Reauthentication State Machine
- State
– Current state (including initialize, reauthenticate).
Example
Console#show dot1x
Global 802.1X Parameters
system-auth-control: enable
802.1X Port Summary
Port Name Status
1/1
disabled
1/2
enabled
.
.
.
1/52
disabled
Operation Mode
Single-Host
Single-Host
Single-Host
802.1X Port Details
802.1X is disabled on port 1/1
802.1X is enabled on port 1/2
reauth-enabled: Enable
reauth-period: 1800
quiet-period:
30
tx-period:
40
supplicant-timeout:
30
server-timeout: 10
reauth-max:
2
max-req:
5
Status
Authorized
Operation mode
Single-Host
Max count
5
Port-control
Auto
Supplicant
00-00-e8-49-5e-dc
Current Identifier 3
Authenticator State Machine
State
Authenticated
Reauth Count
0
Backend State Machine
State
Idle
Request Count
0
Identifier(Server) 2
Reauthentication State Machine
State
Initialize
.
.
.
802.1X is disabled on port 1/52
Console#
4-116
Mode
Authorized
ForceAuthorized
n/a
auto
yes
ForceAuthorized
n/a
ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS
Access Control List Commands
Access Control Lists (ACL) provide packet filtering for IP frames (based
on address, protocol, Layer 4 protocol port number or TCP control code)
or any frames (based on MAC address or Ethernet type). To filter packets,
first create an access list, add the required rules and then bind the list to a
specific port.
Access Control Lists
An ACL is a sequential list of permit or deny conditions that apply to IP
addresses, MAC addresses, or other more specific criteria. This switch tests
ingress or egress packets against the conditions in an ACL one by one. A
packet will be accepted as soon as it matches a permit rule, or dropped as
soon as it matches a deny rule. If no rules match for a list of all permit
rules, the packet is dropped; and if no rules match for a list of all deny
rules, the packet is accepted.
There are three filtering modes:
•
Standard IP ACL mode (STD-ACL) filters packets based on the source
IP address.
•
Extended IP ACL mode (EXT-ACL) filters packets based on source
or destination IP address, as well as protocol type and protocol port
number. If the TCP protocol is specified, then you can also filter
packets based on the TCP control code.
•
MAC ACL mode (MAC-ACL) filters packets based on the source or
destination MAC address and the Ethernet frame type (RFC 1060).
The following restrictions apply to ACLs:
•
Each ACL can have up to 32 rules.
•
The maximum number of ACLs is 88.
•
However, due to resource restrictions, the average number of rules
bound the ports should not exceed 20.
4-117
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
•
This switch supports ACLs for ingress filtering only. You can only
bind one IP ACL to any port and one MAC ACL globally for
ingress filtering. In other words, only two ACLs can be bound to an
interface - Ingress IP ACL and Ingress MAC ACL.
The order in which active ACLs are checked is as follows:
1. User-defined rules in the Ingress MAC ACL for ingress ports.
2. User-defined rules in the Ingress IP ACL for ingress ports.
3. Explicit default rule (permit any any) in the ingress IP ACL for ingress
ports.
4. Explicit default rule (permit any any) in the ingress MAC ACL for
ingress ports.
5. If no explicit rule is matched, the implicit default is permit all.
Table 4-33 Access Control Lists
Command
Groups
Function
Page
IP ACLs
Configures ACLs based on IP addresses, TCP/UDP
port number, protocol type, and TCP control code
4-118
MAC ACLs
Configures ACLs based on hardware addresses, packet 4-128
format, and Ethernet type
ACL Information Displays ACLs and associated rules; shows ACLs
assigned to each port
4-135
IP ACLs
Table 4-34 IP ACLs
4-118
Command
Function
access-list ip
Creates an IP ACL and enters configuration GC
mode
Mode
Page
permit, deny
Filters packets matching a specified source
IP address
permit, deny
Filters packets meeting the specified criteria, EXT-ACL 4-122
including source and destination IP address,
TCP/UDP port number, protocol type, and
TCP control code
4-119
STD-ACL 4-120
ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS
Table 4-34 IP ACLs (Continued)
Command
Function
Mode
Page
show ip
access-list
Displays the rules for configured IP ACLs
PE
4-124
ip
access-group
Adds a port to an IP ACL
IC
4-125
show ip
access-group
Shows port assignments for IP ACLs
PE
4-125
map access-list Sets the CoS value and corresponding output IC
ip
queue for packets matching an ACL rule
4-126
show map
access-list ip
4-127
Shows CoS value mapped to an access list for PE
an interface
access-list ip
This command adds an IP access list and enters configuration mode for
standard or extended IP ACLs. Use the no form to remove the specified
ACL.
Syntax
[no] access-list ip {standard | extended} acl_name
• standard – Specifies an ACL that filters packets based on the
source IP address.
• extended – Specifies an ACL that filters packets based on the
source or destination IP address, and other more specific criteria.
• acl_name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
4-119
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Command Usage
• When you create a new ACL or enter configuration mode for an
existing ACL, use the permit or deny command to add new rules to
the bottom of the list. To create an ACL, you must add at least one
rule to the list.
• To remove a rule, use the no permit or no deny command followed
by the exact text of a previously configured rule.
• An ACL can contain up to 32 rules.
Example
Console(config)#access-list ip standard david
Console(config-std-acl)#
Related Commands
permit, deny 4-120
ip access-group (4-125)
show ip access-list (4-124)
permit, deny (Standard ACL)
This command adds a rule to a Standard IP ACL. The rule sets a filter
condition for packets emanating from the specified source. Use the no
form to remove a rule.
Syntax
[no] {permit | deny} {any | source bitmask | host source}
•
•
•
•
any – Any source IP address.
source – Source IP address.
bitmask – Decimal number representing the address bits to match.
host – Keyword followed by a specific IP address.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Standard ACL
4-120
ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS
Command Usage
• New rules are appended to the end of the list.
• Address bitmasks are similar to a subnet mask, containing four
integers from 0 to 255, each separated by a period. The binary mask
uses 1 bits to indicate “match” and 0 bits to indicate “ignore.” The
bitmask is bitwise ANDed with the specified source IP address, and
then compared with the address for each IP packet entering the port(s)
to which this ACL has been assigned.
Example
This example configures one permit rule for the specific address 10.1.1.21
and another rule for the address range 168.92.16.x – 168.92.31.x using a
bitmask.
Console(config-std-acl)#permit host 10.1.1.21
Console(config-std-acl)#permit 168.92.16.0 255.255.240.0
Console(config-std-acl)#
Related Commands
access-list ip (4-119)
4-121
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
permit, deny (Extended ACL)
This command adds a rule to an Extended IP ACL. The rule sets a filter
condition for packets with specific source or destination IP addresses,
protocol types, source or destination protocol ports, or TCP control codes.
Use the no form to remove a rule.
Syntax
[no] {permit | deny} [protocol-number | udp]
{any | source address-bitmask | host source}
{any | destination address-bitmask | host destination}
[precedence precedence] [tos tos] [dscp dscp]
[source-port sport [end]] [destination-port dport [end]]
[no] {permit | deny} tcp
{any | source address-bitmask | host source}
{any | destination address-bitmask | host destination}
[precedence precedence] [tos tos] [dscp dscp]
[source-port sport [end]] [destination-port dport [end]]
[control-flag control-flags flag-bitmask]
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
protocol-number – A specific protocol number. (Range: 0-255)
source – Source IP address.
destination – Destination IP address.
address-bitmask – Decimal number representing the address bits to
match.
host – Keyword followed by a specific IP address.
precedence – IP precedence level. (Range: 0-7)
tos – Type of Service level. (Range: 0-15)
dscp – DSCP priority level. (Range: 0-63)
sport – Protocol17 source port number. (Range: 0-65535)
dport – Protocol17 destination port number. (Range: 0-65535)
end – Upper bound of the protocol port range. (Range: 0-65535)
control-flags – Decimal number (representing a bit string) that
specifies flag bits in byte 14 of the TCP header. (Range: 0-63)
flag-bitmask – Decimal number representing the code bits to match.
(Range: 0-63)
17. Includes TCP, UDP or other protocol types.
4-122
ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Extended ACL
Command Usage
• All new rules are appended to the end of the list.
• Address bitmasks are similar to a subnet mask, containing four
integers from 0 to 255, each separated by a period. The binary mask
uses 1 bits to indicate “match” and 0 bits to indicate “ignore.” The
bitmask is bitwise ANDed with the specified source IP address, and
then compared with the address for each IP packet entering the port(s)
to which this ACL has been assigned.
• You can specify both Precedence and ToS in the same rule. However,
if DSCP is used, then neither Precedence nor ToS can be specified.
• The control-code bitmask is a decimal number (representing an
equivalent bit mask) that is applied to the control code. Enter a
decimal number, where the equivalent binary bit “1” means to match
a bit and “0” means to ignore a bit. The following bits may be
specified:
- 1 (fin) – Finish
- 2 (syn) – Synchronize
- 4 (rst) – Reset
- 8 (psh) – Push
- 16 (ack) – Acknowledgement
- 32 (urg) – Urgent pointer
For example, use the code value and mask below to catch packets with
the following flags set:
SYN flag valid, use “control-code 2 2”
Both SYN and ACK valid, use “control-code 18 18”
SYN valid and ACK invalid, use “control-code 2 18”
4-123
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Example
This example accepts any incoming packets if the source address is within
subnet 10.7.1.x. For example, if the rule is matched; i.e., the rule (10.7.1.0
& 255.255.255.0) equals the masked address (10.7.1.2 & 255.255.255.0),
the packet passes through.
Console(config-ext-acl)#permit 10.7.1.1 255.255.255.0 any
Console(config-ext-acl)#
This allows TCP packets from class C addresses 192.168.1.0 to any
destination address when set for destination TCP port 80 (i.e., HTTP).
Console(config-ext-acl)#permit 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 any
destination-port 80
Console(config-ext-acl)#
This permits all TCP packets from class C addresses 192.168.1.0 with the
TCP control code set to “SYN.”
Console(config-ext-acl)#permit tcp 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 any
control-flag 2 2
Console(config-ext-acl)#
Related Commands
access-list ip (4-119)
show ip access-list
This command displays the rules for configured IP ACLs.
Syntax
show ip access-list {standard | extended} [acl_name]
• standard – Specifies a standard IP ACL.
• extended – Specifies an extended IP ACL.
• acl_name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters)
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
4-124
ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS
Example
Console#show ip access-list standard
IP standard access-list david:
permit host 10.1.1.21
permit 168.92.16.0 255.255.240.0
Console#
Related Commands
permit, deny 4-120
ip access-group (4-125)
ip access-group
This command binds a port to an IP ACL. Use the no form to remove the
port.
Syntax
[no] ip access-group acl_name in
• acl_name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters)
• in – Indicates that this list applies to ingress packets.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)
Command Usage
• A port can only be bound to one ACL.
• If a port is already bound to an ACL and you bind it to a different
ACL, the switch will replace the old binding with the new one.
• You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to
a port.
4-125
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Example
Console(config)#int eth 1/25
Console(config-if)#ip access-group david in
Console(config-if)#
Related Commands
show ip access-list (4-124)
show ip access-group
This command shows the ports assigned to IP ACLs.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show ip access-group
Interface ethernet 1/25
IP access-list david in
Console#
Related Commands
ip access-group (4-125)
map access-list ip
This command sets the output queue for packets matching an ACL rule.
The specified CoS value is only used to map the matching packet to an
output queue; it is not written to the packet itself. Use the no form to
remove the CoS mapping.
Syntax
[no] map access-list ip acl_name cos cos-value
• acl_name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters)
• cos-value – CoS value. (Range: 0-7)
Default Setting
None
4-126
ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)
Command Usage
A packet matching a rule within the specified ACL is mapped to one of
the output queues as shown in the following table. For information on
mapping the CoS values to output queues, see queue cos-map on
page 4-226.
Table 4-35 Egress Queue Priority Mapping
Queue
0
1
2
3
Priority
1,2
0,3
4,5
6,7
Example
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/25
Console(config-if)#map access-list ip david cos 0
Console(config-if)#
Related Commands
queue cos-map (4-226)
show map access-list ip (4-127)
show map access-list ip
This command shows the CoS value mapped to an IP ACL for the current
interface. (The CoS value determines the output queue for packets
matching an ACL rule.)
Syntax
show map access-list ip [interface]
interface
• ethernet unit/port
- unit - This is device 1.
- port - Port number.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
4-127
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Example
Console#show map access-list ip
Eth 1/25
access-list ip david cos 0
Console#
Related Commands
map access-list ip (4-126)
MAC ACLs
Table 4-36 MAC ACLs
Command
Function
Mode
Page
access-list mac
Creates a MAC ACL and enters
configuration mode
GC
4-128
permit, deny
Filters packets matching a specified
source and destination address, packet
format, and Ethernet type
MAC-ACL
4-130
show mac
access-list
Displays the rules for configured MAC
ACLs
PE
4-131
mac access-group Adds a port to a MAC ACL
IC
4-132
show mac
access-group
Shows port assignments for MAC ACLs PE
4-132
map access-list
mac
Sets the CoS value and corresponding
output queue for packets matching an
ACL rule
IC
4-133
show map
access-list mac
Shows CoS value mapped to an access
list for an interface
PE
4-134
access-list mac
This command adds a MAC access list and enters MAC ACL configuration
mode. Use the no form to remove the specified ACL.
Syntax
[no] access-list mac acl_name
acl_name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters)
4-128
ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• When you create a new ACL or enter configuration mode for an
existing ACL, use the permit or deny command to add new rules to
the bottom of the list. To create an ACL, you must add at least one
rule to the list.
• To remove a rule, use the no permit or no deny command followed
by the exact text of a previously configured rule.
• An ACL can contain up to 32 rules.
Example
Console(config)#access-list mac jerry
Console(config-mac-acl)#
Related Commands
permit, deny (MAC ACL) (4-130)
mac access-group (4-132)
show mac access-list (4-131)
4-129
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
permit, deny (MAC ACL)
This command adds a rule to a MAC ACL. The rule filters packets
matching a specified MAC source or destination address (i.e., physical layer
address), or Ethernet protocol type. Use the no form to remove a rule.
Syntax
[no] {permit | deny}
{any | host source | source address-bitmask}
{any | host destination | destination address-bitmask}
[vid vid [vid-end]] [ethertype protocol [protocol-end]]
Note:- The default is for Ethernet II packets.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
any – Any MAC source or destination address.
host – A specific MAC address.
source – Source MAC address.
destination – Destination MAC address range with bitmask.
address-bitmask18 – Bitmask for MAC address (in hexidecimal
format).
vid – VLAN ID. (Range: 1-4094)
vid-end – Upper bound of VID range. (Range: 1-4094)
protocol – A specific Ethernet protocol number. (Range: 0-65535)
protocol-end – Upper bound of protocol range. (Range: 0-65535)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
MAC ACL
Command Usage
• New rules are added to the end of the list.
• The ethertype option can only be used to filter Ethernet II formatted
packets.
18. For all bitmasks, “1” means care and “0” means ignore.
4-130
ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS
• A detailed listing of Ethernet protocol types can be found in RFC
1060. A few of the more common types include the following:
• 0800 - IP
• 0806 - ARP
• 8137 - IPX
Example
This rule permits packets from any source MAC address to the destination
address 00-e0-29-94-34-de where the Ethernet type is 0800.
Console(config-mac-acl)#permit any host 00-e0-29-94-34-de
ethertype 0800
Console(config-mac-acl)#
Related Commands
access-list mac (4-128)
show mac access-list
This command displays the rules for configured MAC ACLs.
Syntax
show mac access-list [acl_name]
acl_name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters)
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show mac access-list
MAC access-list jerry:
permit any host 00-e0-29-94-34-de ethertype 800 800
Console#
Related Commands
permit, deny 4-130
mac access-group (4-132)
4-131
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
mac access-group
This command binds a port to a MAC ACL. Use the no form to remove
the port.
Syntax
mac access-group acl_name in
• acl_name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters)
• in – Indicates that this list applies to ingress packets.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)
Command Usage
• A port can only be bound to one ACL.
• If a port is already bound to an ACL and you bind it to a different
ACL, the switch will replace the old binding with the new one.
Example
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/25
Console(config-if)#mac access-group jerry in
Console(config-if)#
Related Commands
show mac access-list (4-131)
show mac access-group
This command shows the ports assigned to MAC ACLs.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show mac access-group
Interface ethernet 1/25
MAC access-list jerry in
Console#
4-132
ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS
Related Commands
mac access-group (4-132)
map access-list mac
This command sets the output queue for packets matching an ACL rule.
The specified CoS value is only used to map the matching packet to an
output queue; it is not written to the packet itself. Use the no form to
remove the CoS mapping.
Syntax
[no] map access-list mac acl_name cos cos-value
• acl_name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters)
• cos-value – CoS value. (Range: 0-7)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)
Command Usage
• You must configure an ACL mask before you can map CoS values to
the rule.
• A packet matching a rule within the specified ACL is mapped to one
of the output queues as shown below.
Table 4-37 Egress Queue Priority Mapping
Queue
0
1
2
3
Priority
1,2
0,3
4,5
6,7
Example
Console(config)#int eth 1/5
Console(config-if)#map access-list mac jerry cos 0
Console(config-if)#
4-133
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Related Commands
queue cos-map (4-226)
show map access-list mac (4-134)
show map access-list mac
This command shows the CoS value mapped to a MAC ACL for the
current interface. (The CoS value determines the output queue for packets
matching an ACL rule.)
Syntax
show map access-list mac [interface]
interface
• ethernet unit/port
- unit - This is device 1.
- port - Port number. (Range: 1-52)
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show map access-list mac
Access-list to COS of Eth 1/5
Access-list jerry cos 0
Console#
Related Commands
map access-list mac (4-133)
4-134
ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS
ACL Information
Table 4-38 ACL Information
Command
Function
show access-list
Show all ACLs and associated rules
show access-group Shows the ACLs assigned to each port
Mode
Page
PE
4-135
PE
4-136
show access-list
This command shows all ACLs and associated rules, as well as all the
user-defined masks.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
Once the ACL is bound to an interface (i.e., the ACL is active), the
order in which the rules are displayed is determined by the associated
mask.
Example
Console#show access-list
IP standard access-list david:
permit host 10.1.1.21
permit 168.92.16.0 255.255.240.0
IP extended access-list bob:
permit 10.7.1.1 255.255.255.0 any
permit 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 any destination-port 80 80
permit 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 any protocol tcp control-code 2 2
MAC access-list jerry:
permit any host 00-30-29-94-34-de ethertype 800 800
IP extended access-list A6:
permit 10.7.1.0 255.255.255.0 any
permit 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 any destination-port 80 80
permit TCP 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 any control-flag 2 2
Console#
4-135
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
show access-group
This command shows the port assignments of ACLs.
Command Mode
Privileged Executive
Example
Console#show access-group
Interface ethernet 1/25
IP standard access-list david
MAC access-list jerry
Console#
SNMP Commands
Controls access to this switch from management stations using the Simple
Network Management Protocol (SNMP), as well as the error types sent to
trap managers.
Table 4-39 SNMP Commands
4-136
Command
Function
snmp-server
community
Sets up the community access string to permit GC
access to SNMP commands
Mode
4-137
Page
snmp-server
contact
Sets the system contact string
GC
4-138
snmp-server
location
Sets the system location string
GC
4-138
snmp-server host Specifies the recipient of an SNMP
notification operation
GC
4-139
snmp-server
enable traps
Enables the device to send SNMP traps
(i.e., SNMP notifications)
GC
4-141
show snmp
Displays the status of SNMP communications NE,
PE
4-142
SNMP COMMANDS
snmp-server community
This command defines the community access string for the Simple
Network Management Protocol. Use the no form to remove the specified
community string.
Syntax
snmp-server community string [ro|rw]
no snmp-server community string
• string - Community string that acts like a password and permits
access to the SNMP protocol. (Maximum length: 32 characters,
case sensitive; Maximum number of strings: 5)
• ro - Specifies read-only access. Authorized management stations are
only able to retrieve MIB objects.
• rw - Specifies read/write access. Authorized management stations
are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects.
Default Setting
• public - Read-only access. Authorized management stations are only
able to retrieve MIB objects.
• private - Read/write access. Authorized management stations are able
to both retrieve and modify MIB objects.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
The first snmp-server community command you enter enables
SNMP. The no snmp-server community command disables SNMP.
Example
Console(config)#snmp-server community alpha rw
Console(config)#
4-137
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
snmp-server contact
This command sets the system contact string. Use the no form to remove
the system contact information.
Syntax
snmp-server contact string
no snmp-server contact
string - String that describes the system contact information.
(Maximum length: 255 characters)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Console(config)#snmp-server contact Joe
Console(config)#
Related Commands
snmp-server location (4-138)
snmp-server location
This command sets the system location string. Use the no form to remove
the location string.
Syntax
snmp-server location text
no snmp-server location
text - String that describes the system location.
(Maximum length: 255 characters)
Default Setting
None
4-138
SNMP COMMANDS
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Console(config)#snmp-server location Room 23
Console(config)#
Related Commands
snmp-server contact (4-138)
snmp-server host
This command specifies the recipient of a Simple Network Management
Protocol notification operation. Use the no form to remove the specified
host.
Syntax
snmp-server host host-addr community-string [version {1 | 2c}]
no snmp-server host host-addr
• host-addr - Internet address of the host (the targeted recipient).
(Maximum host addresses: 5 trap destination IP address entries)
• community-string - Password-like community string sent with the
notification operation. Although you can set this string using the
snmp-server host command by itself, we recommend that you
define this string using the snmp-server community command
prior to using the snmp-server host command. (Maximum length:
32 characters)
• version - Specifies whether to send notifications as SNMP v1 or
v2c traps. (Range: 1, 2c; Default: 1)
Default Setting
Host Address: None
SNMP Version: 1
Command Mode
Global Configuration
4-139
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Command Usage
• If you do not enter an snmp-server host command, no notifications
are sent. In order to configure the switch to send SNMP notifications,
you must enter at least one snmp-server host command. In order to
enable multiple hosts, you must issue a separate snmp-server host
command for each host.
• The snmp-server host command is used in conjunction with the
snmp-server enable traps command. Use the snmp-server enable
traps command to specify which SNMP notifications are sent
globally. For a host to receive notifications, at least one snmp-server
enable traps command and the snmp-server host command for that
host must be enabled.
• Some notification types cannot be controlled with the snmp-server
enable traps command. For example, some notification types are
always enabled.
• The switch can send SNMP version 1 or version 2c notifications to a
host IP address, depending on the SNMP version that the
management station supports. If the snmp-server host command does
not specify the SNMP version, the default is to send SNMP version 1
notifications.
Example
Console(config)#snmp-server host 10.1.19.23 batman
Console(config)#
Related Commands
snmp-server enable traps (4-141)
4-140
SNMP COMMANDS
snmp-server enable traps
This command enables this device to send Simple Network Management
Protocol traps (SNMP notifications). Use the no form to disable SNMP
notifications.
Syntax
[no] snmp-server enable traps [authentication | link-up-down]
• authentication - Keyword to issue authentication failure traps.
• link-up-down - Keyword to issue link-up or link-down traps.
Default Setting
Issue authentication and link-up-down traps.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• If you do not enter an snmp-server enable traps command, no
notifications controlled by this command are sent. In order to
configure this device to send SNMP notifications, you must enter at
least one snmp-server enable traps command. If you enter the
command with no keywords, both authentication and link-up-down
notifications are enabled. If you enter the command with a keyword,
only the notification type related to that keyword is enabled.
• The snmp-server enable traps command is used in conjunction with
the snmp-server host command. Use the snmp-server host
command to specify which host or hosts receive SNMP notifications.
In order to send notifications, you must configure at least one
snmp-server host command.
Example
Console(config)#snmp-server enable traps link-up-down
Console(config)#
Related Commands
snmp-server host (4-139)
4-141
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
show snmp
This command checks the status of SNMP communications.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec
Command Usage
This command provides information on the community access strings,
counter information for SNMP input and output protocol data units,
and whether or not SNMP logging has been enabled with the
snmp-server enable traps command.
4-142
SNMP COMMANDS
Example
Console#show snmp
SNMP traps:
Authentication: enabled
Link-up-down:
enabled
SNMP communities:
1. alpha, and the privilege is read-write
2. private, and the privilege is read-write
3. public, and the privilege is read-only
0 SNMP packets input
0 Bad SNMP version errors
0 Unknown community name
0 Illegal operation for community name supplied
0 Encoding errors
0 Number of requested variables
0 Number of altered variables
0 Get-request PDUs
0 Get-next PDUs
0 Set-request PDUs
0 SNMP packets output
0 Too big errors
0 No such name errors
0 Bad values errors
0 General errors
0 Response PDUs
0 Trap PDUs
SNMP logging: enabled
Logging to 10.1.19.23 batman version 1
Console#
4-143
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Interface Commands
These commands are used to display or set communication parameters for
an Ethernet port, aggregated link, or VLAN.
Table 4-40 Interface Commands
4-144
Command
Function
Mode Page
interface
Configures an interface type and enters interface GC
configuration mode
4-145
description
Adds a description to an interface configuration IC
4-145
speed-duplex
Configures the speed and duplex operation of a IC
given interface when autonegotiation is disabled
4-146
negotiation
Enables autonegotiation of a given interface
IC
4-147
capabilities
Advertises the capabilities of a given interface
for use in autonegotiation
IC
4-148
flowcontrol
Enables flow control on a given interface
IC
4-149
shutdown
Disables an interface
IC
4-150
switchport
broadcast
packet-rate
Configures the broadcast storm control
threshold
IC
4-151
clear counters
Clears statistics on an interface
PE
4-152
show interfaces Displays status for the specified interface
status
NE,
PE
4-153
show interfaces Displays statistics for the specified interfaces
counters
NE,
PE
4-154
show interfaces Displays the administrative and operational
switchport
status of an interface
NE,
PE
4-156
INTERFACE COMMANDS
interface
This command configures an interface type and enter interface
configuration mode. Use the no form to remove a trunk.
Syntax
interface interface
no interface port-channel channel-id
interface
• ethernet unit/port
- unit - Stack unit. (This is unit 1)
- port - Port number. (Range: 1-52)
• port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-4)
• vlan vlan-id (Range: 1-4094)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
To specify port 24, enter the following command:
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/24
Console(config-if)#
description
This command adds a description to an interface. Use the no form to
remove the description.
Syntax
description string
no description
string - Comment or a description to help you remember what is
attached to this interface. (Range: 1-64 characters)
4-145
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Example
The following example adds a description to port 24.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/24
Console(config-if)#description RD-SW#3
Console(config-if)#
speed-duplex
This command configures the speed and duplex mode of a given interface
when autonegotiation is disabled. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
speed-duplex {1000full | 100full | 100half | 10full | 10half}
no speed-duplex
• 1000full - Forces 1000 Mbps full-duplex operation
• 100full - Forces 100 Mbps full-duplex operation
• 100half - Forces 100 Mbps half-duplex operation
• 10full - Forces 10 Mbps full-duplex operation
• 10half - Forces 10 Mbps half-duplex operation
Default Setting
• Auto-negotiation is enabled by default.
• When auto-negotiation is disabled, the default speed-duplex setting is
100half for 100BASE-TX ports and 1000full for Gigabit Ethernet
ports.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
• To force operation to the speed and duplex mode specified in a
speed-duplex command, use the no negotiation command to
disable auto-negotiation on the selected interface.
4-146
INTERFACE COMMANDS
• When using the negotiation command to enable auto-negotiation,
the optimal settings will be determined by the capabilities command.
To set the speed/duplex mode under auto-negotiation, the required
mode must be specified in the capabilities list for an interface.
Example
The following example configures port 5 to 100 Mbps, half-duplex
operation.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5
Console(config-if)#speed-duplex 100half
Console(config-if)#no negotiation
Console(config-if)#
Related Commands
negotiation (4-147)
capabilities (4-148)
negotiation
This command enables autonegotiation for a given interface. Use the no
form to disable autonegotiation.
Syntax
[no] negotiation
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
• When auto-negotiation is enabled the switch will negotiate the best
settings for a link based on the capabilities command. When
auto-negotiation is disabled, you must manually specify the link
attributes with the speed-duplex and flowcontrol commands.
• If autonegotiation is disabled, auto-MDI/MDI-X pin signal
configuration will also be disabled for the RJ-45 ports.
4-147
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Example
The following example configures port 11 to use autonegotiation.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/11
Console(config-if)#negotiation
Console(config-if)#
Related Commands
capabilities (4-148)
speed-duplex (4-146)
capabilities
This command advertises the port capabilities of a given interface during
autonegotiation. Use the no form with parameters to remove an advertised
capability, or the no form without parameters to restore the default values.
Syntax
[no] capabilities {1000full | 100full | 100half | 10full | 10half |
flowcontrol | symmetric}
• 1000full - Supports 1000 Mbps full-duplex operation
• 100full - Supports 100 Mbps full-duplex operation
• 100half - Supports 100 Mbps half-duplex operation
• 10full - Supports 10 Mbps full-duplex operation
• 10half - Supports 10 Mbps half-duplex operation
• flowcontrol - Supports flow control
• symmetric (Gigabit only) - When specified, the port transmits and
receives pause frames; when not specified, the port will
auto-negotiate to determine the sender and receiver for asymmetric
pause frames. (The current switch ASIC only supports symmetric pause
frames.)
Default Setting
• 100BASE-TX: 10half, 10full, 100half, 100full
• 1000BASE-T: 10half, 10full, 100half, 100full, 1000full
• SFP: 1000full
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
4-148
INTERFACE COMMANDS
Command Usage
When auto-negotiation is enabled with the negotiation command, the
switch will negotiate the best settings for a link based on the
capabilites command. When auto-negotiation is disabled, you must
manually specify the link attributes with the speed-duplex and
flowcontrol commands.
Example
The following example configures Ethernet port 5 capabilities to 100half,
100full and flow control.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5
Console(config-if)#capabilities 100half
Console(config-if)#capabilities 100full
Console(config-if)#capabilities flowcontrol
Console(config-if)#
Related Commands
negotiation (4-147)
speed-duplex (4-146)
flowcontrol (4-149)
flowcontrol
This command enables flow control. Use the no form to disable flow
control.
Syntax
[no] flowcontrol
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
• Flow control can eliminate frame loss by “blocking” traffic from end
stations or segments connected directly to the switch when its buffers
fill. When enabled, back pressure is used for half-duplex operation and
IEEE 802.3x for full-duplex operation.
4-149
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
• To force flow control on or off (with the flowcontrol or no
flowcontrol command), use the no negotiation command to disable
auto-negotiation on the selected interface.
• When using the negotiation command to enable auto-negotiation,
the optimal settings will be determined by the capabilities command.
To enable flow control under auto-negotiation, “flowcontrol” must
be included in the capabilities list for any port
• Avoid using flow control on a port connected to a hub unless it is
actually required to solve a problem. Otherwise back pressure
jamming signals may degrade overall performance for the segment
attached to the hub.
Example
The following example enables flow control on port 5.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5
Console(config-if)#flowcontrol
Console(config-if)#no negotiation
Console(config-if)#
Related Commands
negotiation (4-147)
capabilities (flowcontrol, symmetric) (4-148)
shutdown
This command disables an interface. To restart a disabled interface, use the
no form.
Syntax
[no] shutdown
Default Setting
All interfaces are enabled.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
4-150
INTERFACE COMMANDS
Command Usage
This command allows you to disable a port due to abnormal behavior
(e.g., excessive collisions), and then reenable it after the problem has
been resolved. You may also want to disable a port for security reasons.
Example
The following example disables port 5.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5
Console(config-if)#shutdown
Console(config-if)#
switchport broadcast packet-rate
This command configures broadcast storm control. Use the no form to
disable broadcast storm control.
Syntax
switchport broadcast octet-rate rate
no switchport broadcast
rate - Threshold level as a rate; i.e., octets per second.
(Range: 64-95232000)
Default Setting
Enabled for all ports
Packet-rate limit: 32000 octets per second
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)
Command Usage
• When broadcast traffic exceeds the specified threshold, packets above
that threshold are dropped.
• This command can enable or disable broadcast storm control for the
selected interface. However, the specified threshold value applies to
all ports on the switch.
4-151
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Example
The following shows how to configure broadcast storm control at 600
packets per second:
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5
Console(config-if)#switchport broadcast octet-rate 600
Console(config-if)#
clear counters
This command clears statistics on an interface.
Syntax
clear counters interface
interface
• ethernet unit/port
- unit - Stack unit. (This is unit 1)
- port - Port number. (Range: 1-52)
• port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-4)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
Statistics are only initialized for a power reset. This command sets the
base value for displayed statistics to zero for the current management
session. However, if you log out and back into the management
interface, the statistics displayed will show the absolute value
accumulated since the last power reset.
Example
The following example clears statistics on port 5.
Console#clear counters ethernet 1/5
Console#
4-152
INTERFACE COMMANDS
show interfaces status
This command displays the status for an interface.
Syntax
show interfaces status [interface]
interface
• ethernet unit/port
- unit - Stack unit. (This is unit 1)
- port - Port number. (Range: 1-52)
• port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-4)
• vlan vlan-id (Range: 1-4094)
Default Setting
Shows the status for all interfaces.
Command Mode
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec
Command Usage
If no interface is specified, information on all interfaces is displayed.
For a description of the items displayed by this command, see
“Displaying Connection Status” on page 3-87.
4-153
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Example
Console#show interfaces status ethernet 1/5
Information of Eth 1/5
Basic information:
Port type:
100TX
Mac address:
00-30-F1-D3-26-05
Configuration:
Name:
Port admin:
Up
Speed-duplex:
Auto
Capabilities:
10half, 10full, 100half, 100full,
Broadcast storm:
Enabled
Broadcast storm limit: 32000 octets/second
Flow control:
Disabled
Lacp:
Disabled
Port security:
Disabled
Max MAC count:
0
Port security action:
None
Current status:
Link status:
Up
Port operation status: Up
Operation speed-duplex: 100full
Flow control type:
None
Console#show interfaces status vlan 1
Information of VLAN 1
MAC address:
00-00-AB-CD-00-00
Console#
show interfaces counters
This command displays interface statistics.
Syntax
show interfaces counters [interface]
interface
• ethernet unit/port
- unit - Stack unit. (This is unit 1)
- port - Port number. (Range: 1-52)
• port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-4)
Default Setting
Shows the counters for all interfaces.
Command Mode
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec
4-154
INTERFACE COMMANDS
Command Usage
If no interface is specified, information on all interfaces is displayed.
For a description of the items displayed by this command, see
“Showing Port Statistics” on page 3-114.
Example
Console#show interfaces counters ethernet 1/7
Ethernet 1/7
Iftable stats:
Octets input: 30658, Octets output: 196550
Unicast input: 6, Unicast output: 5
Discard input: 0, Discard output: 0
Error input: 0, Error output: 0
Unknown protos input: 0, QLen output: 0
Extended iftable stats:
Multi-cast input: 0, Multi-cast output: 3064
Broadcast input: 262, Broadcast output: 1
Ether-like stats:
Alignment errors: 0, FCS errors: 0
Single Collision frames: 0, Multiple collision frames: 0
SQE Test errors: 0, Deferred transmissions: 0
Late collisions: 0, Excessive collisions: 0
Internal mac transmit errors: 0, Internal mac receive errors: 0
Frame too longs: 0, Carrier sense errors: 0
Symbol errors: 0
RMON stats:
Drop events: 0, Octets: 227208, Packets: 3338
Broadcast pkts: 263, Multi-cast pkts: 3064
Undersize pkts: 0, Oversize pkts: 0
Fragments: 0, Jabbers: 0
CRC align errors: 0, Collisions: 0
Packet size <= 64 octets: 3150, Packet size 65 to 127 octets: 139
Packet size 128 to 255 octets: 4, Packet size 256 to 511 octets:0
Packet size 512 to 1023 octets: 0, Packet size 1024 to 1518 octets: 0
Console#
4-155
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
show interfaces switchport
This command displays the administrative and operational status of the
specified interfaces.
Syntax
show interfaces switchport [interface]
interface
• ethernet unit/port
- unit - Stack unit. (This is unit 1)
- port - Port number. (Range: 1-52)
• port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-4)
Default Setting
Shows all interfaces.
Command Mode
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec
Command Usage
If no interface is specified, information on all interfaces is displayed.
Example
This example shows the configuration setting for port 24.
Console#show interfaces switchport ethernet 1/24
Broadcast threshold:
Enabled, 600 octets/second
LACP status:
Enabled
Ingress rate limit: disable, Level: 30
Egress rate limit: disable, Level: 30
VLAN membership mode:
Hybrid
Ingress rule:
Disabled
Acceptable frame type:
All frames
Native VLAN:
1
Priority for untagged traffic: 0
GVRP status:
Disabled
Allowed Vlan:
1(u),
Forbidden Vlan:
Private-VLAN mode:
NONE
Private-VLAN host-association: NONE
Private-VLAN mapping:
NONE
Console#
4-156
INTERFACE COMMANDS
Table 4-41 Interfaces Switchport Statistics
Field
Description
Broadcast threshold Shows if broadcast storm suppression is enabled or disabled;
if enabled it also shows the threshold level (page 4-151).
Lacp status
Shows if Link Aggregation Control Protocol has been
enabled or disabled (page 4-166).
Ingress/Egress rate Shows if rate limiting is enabled, and the current rate limit.
limit
(page 4-161).
VLAN membership Indicates membership mode as Trunk or Hybrid (page
mode
4-202).
Ingress rule
Shows if ingress filtering is enabled or disabled (page 4-204).
Acceptable frame
type
Shows if acceptable VLAN frames include all types or tagged
frames only (page 4-203).
Native VLAN
Indicates the default Port VLAN ID (page 4-205).
Priority for
untagged traffic
Indicates the default priority for untagged frames (page
4-222).
Gvrp status
Shows if GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is enabled or
disabled (page 4-219).
Allowed Vlan
Shows the VLANs this interface has joined, where “(u)”
indicates untagged and “(t)” indicates tagged (page 4-206).
Forbidden Vlan
Shows the VLANs this interface can not dynamically join via
GVRP (page 4-207).
Private VLAN
mode
Shows the private VLAN mode as host, promiscuous, or
none (4-213).
Private VLAN
host-association
Shows the secondary (or community) VLAN with which this
port is associated (4-214).
Private VLAN
mapping
Shows the primary VLAN mapping for a promiscuous port
(4-215).
4-157
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Mirror Port Commands
This section describes how to mirror traffic from a source port to a target
port.
Table 4-42 Mirror Port Commands
Command
Function
Mode
Page
port monitor
Configures a mirror session
IC
4-158
show port
monitor
Shows the configuration for a mirror port
PE
4-159
port monitor
This command configures a mirror session. Use the no form to clear a
mirror session.
Syntax
port monitor interface [rx | tx]
no port monitor interface
• interface - ethernet unit/port (source port)
- unit - Stack unit. (This is unit 1)
- port - Port number. (Range: 1-52)
• rx - Mirror received packets.
• tx - Mirror transmitted packets.
Default Setting
No mirror session is defined.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, destination port)
Command Usage
• You can mirror traffic from any source port to a destination port for
real-time analysis. You can then attach a logic analyzer or RMON
probe to the destination port and study the traffic crossing the source
port in a completely unobtrusive manner.
• The destination port is set by specifying an Ethernet interface.
4-158
MIRROR PORT COMMANDS
• The mirror port and monitor port speeds should match, otherwise
traffic may be dropped from the monitor port.
• You can only create a single mirror session.
Example
The following example configures the switch to mirror received packets
from port 6 to 11:
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/11
Console(config-if)#port monitor ethernet 1/6 rx
Console(config-if)#
show port monitor
This command displays mirror information.
Syntax
show port monitor [interface]
interface
• ethernet unit/port
- unit - Stack unit. (This is unit 1)
- port - Port number. (Range: 1-52)
Default Setting
Shows all sessions.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
This command displays the currently configured source port,
destination port, and mirror mode (i.e., RX, TX).
4-159
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Example
The following shows mirroring configured from port 6 to port 11:
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/11
Console(config-if)#port monitor ethernet 1/6 rx
Console(config-if)#end
Console#show port monitor
Port Mirroring
------------------------------------Destination port(listen port):Eth1/11
Source port(monitored port) :Eth1/ 6
Mode
:RX
Console#
Rate Limit Commands
This function allows the network manager to control the maximum rate
for traffic transmitted or received on an interface. Rate limiting is
configured on interfaces at the edge of a network to limit traffic into or out
of the network. Traffic that falls within the rate limit is transmitted, while
packets that exceed the acceptable amount of traffic are dropped.
Rate limiting can be applied to individual ports or trunks. When an
interface is configured with this feature, the traffic rate will be monitored
by the hardware to verify conformity. Non-conforming traffic is dropped,
conforming traffic is forwarded without any changes.
Note: The “rate limit granularity” is multiplied by the “rate limit”
(page 4-161) to set the actual rate limit for an interface. Granularity
is a global setting that applies to Fast Ethernet or Gigabit Ethernet
interfaces.
Table 4-43 Rate Limit Commands
4-160
Command
Function
Mode
Page
rate-limit
Configures the maximum input or output
rate for a port
IC
4-161
rate-limit
granularity
Sets the Fast Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet IC
granularity
4-162
show rate-limit
Shows the rate limit granularity
4-163
PE
RATE LIMIT COMMANDS
rate-limit
Use this command to define the rate limit level for a specific interface. Use
this command without specifying a rate to restore the default rate limit
level. Use the no form to restore the default status of disabled.
Syntax
rate-limit {input | output} level [rate]
no rate-limit {input | output}
• input – Input rate
• output – Output rate
• rate – Maximum value. (Range: 1-30)
Default Setting
30
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
Actual rate limit = Rate limit level * Granularity
Example
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#rate-limit input level 20
Console(config-if)#
4-161
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
rate-limit granularity
Use this command to define the rate limit granularity for the Fast Ethernet
ports, and the Gigabit Ethernet ports. Use the no form of this command
to restore the default setting.
Syntax
rate-limit {fastethernet | gigabitethernet} granularity [granularity]
no rate-limit {fastethernet | gigabitethernet} granularity
• fastethernet – Fast Ethernet granularity
• gigabitethernet – Gigabit Ethernet granularity
• granularity – Sets rate limit granularity for the system. For Fast
Ethernet, choose 512 Kbps, 1 Mbps, or 3.3 Mbps. For Gigabit
Ethernet, only one granularity option is supported, 33.3 Mbps
Default Setting
Fast Ethernet interface – 3.3 Mbps
Gigabit Ethernet interface – 33.3 Mbps
Command Mode
Global Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
Actual rate limit = Rate limit level * Granularity
Example
The following sets Fast Ethernet granularity to 1 Mbps, and Gigabit
Ethernet granularity to 33.3 Mbps.
Console(config)#rate-limit fastethernet granularity 1000
Console(config)#rate-limit gigabitethernet granularity 33300
Console(config)#
4-162
RATE LIMIT COMMANDS
show rate-limit
Use this command to display the rate limit granularity.
Default Setting
Fast Ethernet interface – 3.3 Mbps
Gigabit Ethernet interface – 33.3 Mbps
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
• For Fast Ethernet interfaces, the rate limit granularity is 512 Kbps, 1
Mbps, or 3.3 Mbps.
• For Gigabit Ethernet interfaces, the rate limit granularity is 33.3 Mbps.
Example
Console#show rate-limit
Fast ethernet granularity:
1000
Gigabit ethernet granularity:
Console#
33300
4-163
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Link Aggregation Commands
Ports can be statically grouped into an aggregate link (i.e., trunk) to
increase the bandwidth of a network connection or to ensure fault
recovery. Or you can use the Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)
to automatically negotiate a trunk link between this switch and another
network device. For static trunks, the switches have to comply with the
Cisco EtherChannel standard. For dynamic trunks, the switches have to
comply with LACP. This switch supports up to four trunks. For example, a
trunk consisting of two 1000 Mbps ports can support an aggregate
bandwidth of 4 Gbps when operating at full duplex.
Table 4-44 Link Aggregation Commands
Command
Function
Mode
Page
Manual Configuration Commands
interface
port-channel
Configures a trunk and enters
interface configuration mode
for the trunk
GC
4-145
channel-group
Adds a port to a trunk
IC (Ethernet)
4-166
Configures LACP for the
current interface
IC (Ethernet)
4-166
lacp system-priority Configures a port's LACP
system priority
IC (Ethernet)
4-169
lacp admin-key
Configures a port's
administration key
IC (Ethernet)
4-170
lacp admin-key
Configures an port channel’s
administration key
IC (Port Channel) 4-171
lacp port-priority
Configures a port's LACP port
priority
IC (Ethernet)
4-172
show interfaces
Shows trunk information
status port-channel
NE, PE
4-153
show lacp
PE
4-173
Dynamic Configuration Command
lacp
Trunk Status Display Command
4-164
Shows LACP information
LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS
Guidelines for Creating Trunks
General Guidelines –
• Finish configuring port trunks before you connect the corresponding
network cables between switches to avoid creating a loop.
• A trunk can have up to eight ports.
• The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as trunk
ports.
• All ports in a trunk must be configured in an identical manner,
including communication mode (i.e., speed, duplex mode and flow
control), VLAN assignments, and CoS settings.
• Any of the Gigabit ports on the front panel can be trunked together,
including ports of different media types.
• All the ports in a trunk have to be treated as a whole when moved
from/to, added or deleted from a VLAN via the specified
port-channel.
• STP, VLAN, and IGMP settings can only be made for the entire trunk
via the specified port-channel.
Dynamically Creating a Port Channel –
Ports assigned to a common port channel must meet the
following criteria:
• Ports must have the same LACP system priority.
• Ports must have the same port admin key (Ethernet Interface).
• If the port channel admin key (lacp admin key - Port Channel) is not
set when a channel group is formed (i.e., it has the null value of 0), this
key is set to the same value as the port admin key (lacp admin key Ethernet Interface) used by the interfaces that joined the group.
• However, if the port channel admin key is set, then the port admin key
must be set to the same value for a port to be allowed to join a channel
group.
• If a link goes down, LACP port priority is used to select the backup
link.
4-165
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
channel-group
This command adds a port to a trunk. Use the no form to remove a port
from a trunk.
Syntax
channel-group channel-id
no channel-group
channel-id - Trunk index (Range: 1-4)
Default Setting
The current port will be added to this trunk.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)
Command Usage
• When configuring static trunks, the switches must comply with the
Cisco EtherChannel standard.
• Use no channel-group to remove a port group from a trunk.
• Use no interfaces port-channel to remove a trunk from the switch.
Example
The following example creates trunk 1 and then adds port 11:
Console(config)#interface port-channel 1
Console(config-if)#exit
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/11
Console(config-if)#channel-group 1
Console(config-if)#
lacp
This command enables 802.3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol
(LACP) for the current interface. Use the no form to disable it.
Syntax
[no] lacp
Default Setting
Disabled
4-166
LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)
Command Usage
• The ports on both ends of an LACP trunk must be configured for full
duplex, either by forced mode or auto-negotiation.
• A trunk formed with another switch using LACP will automatically be
assigned the next available port-channel ID.
• If the target switch has also enabled LACP on the connected ports, the
trunk will be activated automatically.
• If more than eight ports attached to the same target switch have
LACP enabled, the additional ports will be placed in standby mode,
and will only be enabled if one of the active links fails.
4-167
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Example
The following shows LACP enabled on ports 11-13. Because LACP has
also been enabled on the ports at the other end of the links, the show
interfaces status port-channel 1 command shows that Trunk 1 has been
established.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/11
Console(config-if)#lacp
Console(config-if)#exit
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/12
Console(config-if)#lacp
Console(config-if)#exit
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/13
Console(config-if)#lacp
Console(config-if)#exit
Console(config)#exit
Console#show interfaces status port-channel 1
Information of Trunk 1
Basic information:
Port type:
100TX
Mac address:
00-00-e8-00-00-0b
Configuration:
Name:
Port admin:
Up
Speed-duplex:
Auto
Capabilities:
10half, 10full, 100half, 100full
Flow control status:
Disabled
Port security:
Disabled
Max MAC count:
0
Current status:
Created by:
LACP
Link status:
Up
Operation speed-duplex: 100full
Flow control type:
None
Member Ports: Eth1/11, Eth1/12, Eth1/13,
Console#
4-168
LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS
lacp system-priority
This command configures a port's LACP system priority. Use the no form
to restore the default setting.
Syntax
lacp {actor | partner} system-priority priority
no lacp {actor | partner} system-priority
• actor - The local side an aggregate link.
• partner - The remote side of an aggregate link.
• priority - This priority is used to determine link aggregation group
(LAG) membership, and to identify this device to other switches
during LAG negotiations. (Range: 0-65535)
Default Setting
32768
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)
Command Usage
• Port must be configured with the same system priority to join the
same LAG.
• System priority is combined with the switch’s MAC address to form
the LAG identifier. This identifier is used to indicate a specific LAG
during LACP negotiations with other systems.
• Once the remote side of a link has been established, LACP
operational settings are already in use on that side. Configuring LACP
settings for the partner only applies to its administrative state, not its
operational state, and will only take effect the next time an aggregate
link is established with the partner.
Example
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5
Console(config-if)#lacp actor system-priority 3
Console(config-if)#
4-169
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
lacp admin-key (Ethernet Interface)
This command configures a port's LACP administration key. Use the no
form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
lacp {actor | partner} admin-key key
[no] lacp {actor | partner} admin-key
• actor - The local side an aggregate link.
• partner - The remote side of an aggregate link.
• key - The port admin key must be set to the same value for ports
that belong to the same link aggregation group (LAG).
(Range: 0-65535)
Default Setting
0
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)
Command Usage
• Ports are only allowed to join the same LAG if (1) the LACP system
priority matches, (2) the LACP port admin key matches, and (3) the
LACP port channel key matches (if configured).
• If the port channel admin key (lacp admin key - Port Channel) is not
set when a channel group is formed (i.e., it has the null value of 0), this
key is set to the same value as the port admin key (lacp admin key Ethernet Interface) used by the interfaces that joined the group.
• Once the remote side of a link has been established, LACP
operational settings are already in use on that side. Configuring LACP
settings for the partner only applies to its administrative state, not its
operational state, and will only take effect the next time an aggregate
link is established with the partner.
Example
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5
Console(config-if)#lacp actor admin-key 120
Console(config-if)#
4-170
LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS
lacp admin-key (Port Channel)
This command configures a port channel's LACP administration key
string. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
lacp {actor | partner} admin-key key
[no] lacp {actor | partner} admin-key
key - The port channel admin key is used to identify a specific link
aggregation group (LAG) during local LACP setup on this switch.
(Range: 0-65535)
Default Setting
0
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Port Channel)
Command Usage
• Ports are only allowed to join the same LAG if (1) the LACP system
priority matches, (2) the LACP port admin key matches, and (3) the
LACP port channel key matches (if configured).
• If the port channel admin key (lacp admin key - Port Channel) is not
set when a channel group is formed (i.e., it has the null value of 0), this
key is set to the same value as the port admin key (lacp admin key Ethernet Interface) used by the interfaces that joined the group. Note
that when the LAG is no longer used, the port channel admin key is
reset to 0.
Example
Console(config)#interface port-channel 1
Console(config-if)#lacp actor admin-key 3
Console(config-if)#
4-171
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
lacp port-priority
This command configures LACP port priority. Use the no form to restore
the default setting.
Syntax
lacp {actor | partner} port-priority priority
no lacp {actor | partner} port-priority
• actor - The local side an aggregate link.
• partner - The remote side of an aggregate link.
• priority - LACP port priority is used to select a backup link.
(Range: 0-65535)
Default Setting
32768
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)
Command Usage
• Setting a lower value indicates a higher effective priority.
• If an active port link goes down, the backup port with the highest
priority is selected to replace the downed link. However, if two or
more ports have the same LACP port priority, the port with the lowest
physical port number will be selected as the backup port.
• Once the remote side of a link has been established, LACP
operational settings are already in use on that side. Configuring LACP
settings for the partner only applies to its administrative state, not its
operational state, and will only take effect the next time an aggregate
link is established with the partner.
Example
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5
Console(config-if)#lacp actor port-priority 128
4-172
LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS
show lacp
This command displays LACP information.
Syntax
show lacp [port-channel] {counters | internal | neighbors | sysid}
• port-channel - Local identifier for a link aggregation group.
(Range: 1-4)
• counters - Statistics for LACP protocol messages.
• internal - Configuration settings and operational state for local
side.
• neighbors - Configuration settings and operational state for
remote side.
• sysid - Summary of system priority and MAC address for all
channel groups.
Default Setting
Port Channel: all
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
4-173
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Example
Console#show lacp 1 counters
Port channel : 1
------------------------------------------------------------------Eth 1/ 1
------------------------------------------------------------------LACPDUs Sent : 21
LACPDUs Received : 21
Marker Sent : 0
Marker Received : 0
LACPDUs Unknown Pkts : 0
LACPDUs Illegal Pkts : 0
.
.
.
Table 4-45 show lacp counters - display description
4-174
Field
Description
LACPDUs Sent
Number of valid LACPDUs transmitted from this channel
group.
LACPDUs
Received
Number of valid LACPDUs received on this channel group.
Marker Sent
Number of valid Marker PDUs transmitted from this channel
group.
Marker Received
Number of valid Marker PDUs received by this channel
group.
LACPDUs
Unknown Pkts
Number of frames received that either (1) Carry the Slow
Protocols Ethernet Type value, but contain an unknown
PDU, or (2) are addressed to the Slow Protocols group MAC
Address, but do not carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type.
LACPDUs Illegal
Pkts
Number of frames that carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet
Type value, but contain a badly formed PDU or an illegal
value of Protocol Subtype.
LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS
Console#show lacp 1 internal
Port channel : 1
------------------------------------------------------------------Oper Key : 4
Admin Key : 0
Eth 1/1
------------------------------------------------------------------LACPDUs Internal : 30 sec
LACP System Priority : 32768
LACP Port Priority : 32768
Admin Key : 4
Oper Key : 4
Admin State : defaulted, aggregation, long timeout, LACP-activity
Oper State : distributing, collecting, synchronization,
aggregation, long timeout, LACP-activity
.
.
.
Table 4-46 show lacp internal - display description
Field
Description
Oper Key
Current operational value of the key for the aggregation port.
Admin Key
Current administrative value of the key for the aggregation port.
LACPDUs
Internal
Number of seconds before invalidating received LACPDU
information.
LACP System
Priority
LACP system priority assigned to this port channel.
LACP Port
Priority
LACP port priority assigned to this interface within the channel
group.
4-175
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Table 4-46 show lacp internal - display description (Continued)
Field
Description
Admin State,
Oper State
Administrative or operational values of the actor’s state
parameters:
• Expired – The actor’s receive machine is in the expired state;
• Defaulted – The actor’s receive machine is using defaulted
operational partner information, administratively configured
for the partner.
• Distributing – If false, distribution of outgoing frames on this
link is disabled; i.e., distribution is currently disabled and is not
expected to be enabled in the absence of administrative
changes or changes in received protocol information.
• Collecting – Collection of incoming frames on this link is
enabled; i.e., collection is currently enabled and is not expected
to be disabled in the absence of administrative changes or
changes in received protocol information.
• Synchronization – The System considers this link to be
IN_SYNC; i.e., it has been allocated to the correct Link
Aggregation Group, the group has been associated with a
compatible Aggregator, and the identity of the Link
Aggregation Group is consistent with the System ID and
operational Key information transmitted.
• Aggregation – The system considers this link to be
aggregatable; i.e., a potential candidate for aggregation.
• Long timeout – Periodic transmission of LACPDUs uses a slow
transmission rate.
• LACP-Activity – Activity control value with regard to this link.
(0: Passive; 1: Active)
4-176
LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS
Console#show lacp 1 neighbors
Port channel 1 neighbors
------------------------------------------------------------------Eth 1/1
------------------------------------------------------------------Partner Admin System ID : 32768, 00-00-00-00-00-00
Partner Oper System ID : 32768, 00-00-00-00-00-01
Partner Admin Port Number : 1
Partner Oper Port Number : 1
Port Admin Priority : 32768
Port Oper Priority : 32768
Admin Key : 0
Oper Key : 4
Admin State : defaulted, distributing, collecting,
synchronization, long timeout,
Oper State : distributing, collecting, synchronization,
aggregation, long timeout, LACP-activity
.
.
.
Table 4-47 show lacp neighbors - display description
Field
Description
Partner Admin
System ID
LAG partner’s system ID assigned by the user.
Partner Oper
System ID
LAG partner’s system ID assigned by the LACP protocol.
Partner Admin
Port Number
Current administrative value of the port number for the
protocol Partner.
Partner Oper
Port Number
Operational port number assigned to this aggregation port
by the port’s protocol partner.
Port Admin Priority Current administrative value of the port priority for the
protocol partner.
Port Oper Priority
Priority value assigned to this aggregation port by the
partner.
Admin Key
Current administrative value of the Key for the protocol
partner.
Oper Key
Current operational value of the Key for the protocol
partner.
Admin State
Administrative values of the partner’s state parameters.
(See preceding table.)
Oper State
Operational values of the partner’s state parameters.
(See preceding table.)
4-177
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Console#show lacp sysid
Port Channel
System Priority
System MAC Address
------------------------------------------------------------------1
32768
00-30-F1-D3-26-00
2
32768
00-30-F1-D3-26-00
3
32768
00-30-F1-D3-26-00
4
32768
00-30-F1-D3-26-00
Console#
Table 4-48 show lacp sysid - display description
Field
Description
Channel group
A link aggregation group configured on this switch.
System Priority*
LACP system priority for this channel group.
System MAC
Address*
System MAC address.
* The LACP system priority and system MAC address are concatenated to form the LAG system ID.
Address Table Commands
These commands are used to configure the address table for filtering
specified addresses, displaying current entries, clearing the table, or setting
the aging time.
Table 4-49 Address Table Commands
4-178
Command
Function
mac-address-table
static
Maps a static address to a port in a VLAN GC
Mode
4-179
Page
clear
mac-address-table
dynamic
Removes any learned entries from the
forwarding database
PE
4-180
show
mac-address-table
Displays entries in the bridge-forwarding
database
PE
4-180
mac-address-table
aging-time
Sets the aging time of the address table
GC
4-181
show
mac-address-table
aging-time
Shows the aging time for the address table PE
4-182
ADDRESS TABLE COMMANDS
mac-address-table static
This command maps a static address to a destination port in a VLAN. Use
the no form to remove an address.
Syntax
mac-address-table static mac-address interface interface
vlan vlan-id [action]
no mac-address-table static mac-address vlan vlan-id
• mac-address - MAC address.
• interface
• ethernet unit/port
- unit - Stack unit. (This is unit 1)
- port - Port number. (Range: 1-52)
• port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-4)
• vlan-id - VLAN ID (Range: 1-4094)
• action - delete-on-reset - Assignment lasts until the switch is reset.
- permanent - Assignment is permanent.
Default Setting
No static addresses are defined. The default mode is permanent.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
The static address for a host device can be assigned to a specific port
within a specific VLAN. Use this command to add static addresses to
the MAC Address Table. Static addresses have the following
characteristics:
• Static addresses will not be removed from the address table when a
given interface link is down.
• Static addresses are bound to the assigned interface and will not be
moved. When a static address is seen on another interface, the address
will be ignored and will not be written to the address table.
4-179
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
• A static address cannot be learned on another port until the address is
removed with the no form of this command.
Example
Console(config)#mac-address-table static 00-e0-29-94-34-de
interface ethernet 1/1 vlan 1 delete-on-reset
Console(config)#
clear mac-address-table dynamic
This command removes any learned entries from the forwarding database
and clears the transmit and receive counts for any static or system
configured entries.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#clear mac-address-table dynamic
Console#
show mac-address-table
This command shows classes of entries in the bridge-forwarding database.
Syntax
show mac-address-table [address mac-address [mask]] [interface
interface] [vlan vlan-id] [sort {address | vlan | interface}]
• mac-address - MAC address.
• mask - Bits to match in the address.
• interface
- ethernet unit/port
- unit - Stack unit. (This is unit 1)
- port - Port number. (Range: 1-52)
- port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-4)
• vlan-id - VLAN ID (Range: 1-4094)
• sort - Sort by address, vlan or interface.
4-180
ADDRESS TABLE COMMANDS
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
• The MAC Address Table contains the MAC addresses associated with
each interface. Note that the Type field may include the following
types:
- Learned - Dynamic address entries
- Permanent - Static entry
- Delete-on-reset - Static entry to be deleted when system is reset
• The mask should be hexadecimal numbers (representing an equivalent
bit mask) in the form xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx that is applied to the specified
MAC address. Enter hexadecimal numbers, where an equivalent
binary bit “0” means to match a bit and “1” means to ignore a bit. For
example, a mask of 00-00-00-00-00-00 means an exact match, and a
mask of FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF means “any.”
• The maximum number of address entries is 8191.
Example
Console#show mac-address-table
Interface Mac Address
Vlan
--------- ----------------- ---Eth 1/1 00-00-E8-49-5E-DC
1
Trunk 2 00-E0-29-8F-AA-1B
1
Console#
Type
----------------Delete-on-reset
Learned
mac-address-table aging-time
This command sets the aging time for entries in the address table. Use the
no form to restore the default aging time.
Syntax
mac-address-table aging-time seconds
no mac-address-table aging-time
seconds - Aging time. (Range: 10-30000 seconds; 0 to disable aging)
4-181
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Default Setting
300 seconds
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
The aging time is used to age out dynamically learned forwarding
information.
Example
Console(config)#mac-address-table aging-time 100
Console(config)#
show mac-address-table aging-time
This command shows the aging time for entries in the address table.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show mac-address-table aging-time
Aging time: 100 sec.
Console#
4-182
SPANNING TREE COMMANDS
Spanning Tree Commands
This section includes commands that configure the Spanning Tree
Algorithm (STA) globally for the switch, and commands that configure
STA for the selected interface.
Table 4-50 Spanning Tree Commands
Command
Function
Mode
Page
spanning-tree
Enables the spanning tree protocol
GC
4-184
spanning-tree mode Configures STP or RSTP
GC
4-185
spanning-tree
forward-time
Configures the spanning tree bridge
forward time
GC
4-186
spanning-tree
hello-time
Configures the spanning tree bridge hello GC
time
4-186
spanning-tree
max-age
Configures the spanning tree bridge
maximum age
GC
4-187
spanning-tree
priority
Configures the spanning tree bridge
priority
GC
4-188
spanning-tree
path-cost method
Configures the path cost method for
RSTP
GC
4-189
spanning-tree
transmission-limit
Configures the transmission limit for
RSTP
GC
4-189
spanning-tree
spanning-disabled
Disables spanning tree for an interface
IC
4-190
spanning-tree cost
Configures the spanning tree path cost of IC
an interface
4-191
spanning-tree
port-priority
Configures the spanning tree priority of
an interface
IC
4-192
spanning-tree
edge-port
Enables fast forwarding for edge ports
IC
4-192
spanning-tree
portfast
Sets an interface to fast forwarding
IC
4-193
spanning-tree
link-type
Configures the link type for RSTP
IC
4-194
4-183
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Table 4-50 Spanning Tree Commands
Command
Function
spanning-tree
protocol-migration
Re-checks the appropriate BPDU format PE
show spanning-tree Shows spanning tree configuration for
the common spanning tree (i.e., overall
bridge) or a selected interface
Mode
PE
Page
4-196
4-196
spanning-tree
This command enables the Spanning Tree Algorithm globally for the
switch. Use the no form to disable it.
Syntax
[no] spanning-tree
Default Setting
Spanning tree is enabled.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
The Spanning Tree Algorithm (STA) can be used to detect and disable
network loops, and to provide backup links between switches, bridges
or routers. This allows the switch to interact with other bridging
devices (that is, an STA-compliant switch, bridge or router) in your
network to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations
on the network, and provide backup links which automatically take over
when a primary link goes down.
Example
This example shows how to enable the Spanning Tree Algorithm for the
switch:
Console(config)#spanning-tree
Console(config)#
4-184
SPANNING TREE COMMANDS
spanning-tree mode
This command selects the spanning tree mode for this switch. Use the no
form to restore the default.
Syntax
spanning-tree mode {stp | rstp}
no spanning-tree mode
• stp - Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1D)
• rstp - Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1w)
Default Setting
rstp
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• Spanning Tree Protocol
Uses RSTP for the internal state machine, but sends only 802.1D
BPDUs.
• Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
RSTP supports connections to either STP or RSTP nodes by
monitoring the incoming protocol messages and dynamically
adjusting the type of protocol messages the RSTP node transmits, as
described below:
- STP Mode – If the switch receives an 802.1D BPDU after a port’s
migration delay timer expires, the switch assumes it is connected
to an 802.1D bridge and starts using only 802.1D BPDUs.
- RSTP Mode – If RSTP is using 802.1D BPDUs on a port and
receives an RSTP BPDU after the migration delay expires, RSTP
restarts the migration delay timer and begins using RSTP BPDUs
on that port.
Example
The following example configures the switch to use Rapid Spanning Tree:
Console(config)#spanning-tree mode rstp
Console(config)#
4-185
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
spanning-tree forward-time
This command configures the spanning tree bridge forward time globally
for this switch. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
spanning-tree forward-time seconds
no spanning-tree forward-time
seconds - Time in seconds. (Range: 4 - 30 seconds)
The minimum value is the higher of 4 or [(max-age / 2) +1].
Default Setting
15 seconds
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
This command sets the maximum time (in seconds) the root device will
wait before changing states (i.e., discarding to learning to forwarding).
This delay is required because every device must receive information
about topology changes before it starts to forward frames. In addition,
each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would
make it return to the discarding state; otherwise, temporary data loops
might result.
Example
Console(config)#spanning-tree forward-time 20
Console(config)#
spanning-tree hello-time
This command configures the spanning tree bridge hello time globally for
this switch. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
spanning-tree hello-time time
no spanning-tree hello-time
time - Time in seconds. (Range: 1-10 seconds).
The maximum value is the lower of 10 or [(max-age / 2) -1].
4-186
SPANNING TREE COMMANDS
Default Setting
2 seconds
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
This command sets the time interval (in seconds) at which the root
device transmits a configuration message.
Example
Console(config)#spanning-tree hello-time 5
Console(config)#
spanning-tree max-age
This command configures the spanning tree bridge maximum age globally
for this switch. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
spanning-tree max-age seconds
no spanning-tree max-age
seconds - Time in seconds. (Range: 6-40 seconds)
The minimum value is the higher of 6 or [2 x (hello-time + 1)].
The maximum value is the lower of 40 or [2 x (forward-time - 1)].
Default Setting
20 seconds
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
This command sets the maximum time (in seconds) a device can wait
without receiving a configuration message before attempting to
reconfigure. All device ports (except for designated ports) should
receive configuration messages at regular intervals. Any port that ages
out STA information (provided in the last configuration message)
4-187
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
becomes the designated port for the attached LAN. If it is a root port,
a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the
network.
Example
Console(config)#spanning-tree max-age 40
Console(config)#
spanning-tree priority
This command configures the spanning tree priority globally for this
switch. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
spanning-tree priority priority
no spanning-tree priority
priority - Priority of the bridge. (Range: 0 - 65535)
(Range – 0-61440, in steps of 4096; Options: 0, 4096,
8192, 12288, 16384, 20480, 24576, 28672, 32768, 36864,
40960, 45056, 49152, 53248, 57344, 61440)
Default Setting
32768
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device, root port, and
designated port. The device with the highest priority becomes the STA
root device. However, if all devices have the same priority, the device
with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device.
Example
Console(config)#spanning-tree priority 40960
Console(config)#
4-188
SPANNING TREE COMMANDS
spanning-tree pathcost method
This command configures the path cost method used for Rapid Spanning
Tree. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
spanning-tree pathcost method {long | short}
no spanning-tree pathcost method
• long - Specifies 32-bit based values that range from 0-200,000,000.
• short - Specifies 16-bit based values that range from 0-65535.
Default Setting
Long method
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
The path cost method is used to determine the best path between
devices. Therefore, lower values should be assigned to ports attached to
faster media, and higher values assigned to ports with slower media.
Note that path cost (page 4-191) takes precedence over port priority
(page 4-192).
Example
Console(config)#spanning-tree pathcost method long
Console(config)#
spanning-tree transmission-limit
This command configures the minimum interval between the transmission
of consecutive RSTP BPDUs. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
spanning-tree transmission-limit count
no spanning-tree transmission-limit
count - The transmission limit in seconds. (Range: 1-10)
Default Setting
3
4-189
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
This command limits the maximum transmission rate for BPDUs.
Example
Console(config)#spanning-tree transmission-limit 4
Console(config)#
spanning-tree spanning-disabled
This command disables the spanning tree algorithm for the specified
interface. Use the no form to reenable the spanning tree algorithm for the
specified interface.
Syntax
[no] spanning-tree spanning-disabled
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
This command limits the maximum transmission rate for BPDUs.
Example
This example disables the spanning tree algorithm for port 5.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree spanning-disabled
Console(config-if)#
4-190
SPANNING TREE COMMANDS
spanning-tree cost
This command configures the spanning tree path cost for the specified
interface. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
spanning-tree cost cost
no spanning-tree cost
cost - The path cost for the port. (Range: 1-200,000,000))
The recommended range is:
• Ethernet: 200,000-20,000,000
• Fast Ethernet: 20,000-2,000,000
• Gigabit Ethernet: 2,000-200,000
Default Setting
• Ethernet – half duplex: 2,000,000; full duplex: 1,000,000;
trunk: 500,000
• Fast Ethernet – half duplex: 200,000; full duplex: 100,000;
trunk: 50,000
• Gigabit Ethernet – full duplex: 10,000; trunk: 5,000
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
• This command is used by the Spanning Tree Algorithm to determine
the best path between devices. Therefore, lower values should be
assigned to ports attached to faster media, and higher values assigned
to ports with slower media.
• Path cost takes precedence over port priority.
• When the spanning-tree pathcost method (page 4-189) is set to short,
the maximum value for path cost is 65,535.
Example
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree cost 5000
Console(config-if)#
4-191
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
spanning-tree port-priority
This command configures the priority for the specified interface. Use the
no form to restore the default.
Syntax
spanning-tree port-priority priority
no spanning-tree port-priority
priority - The priority for a port. (Range: 0-240, in steps of 16)
Default Setting
128
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
• This command defines the priority for the use of a port in the
Spanning Tree Algorithm. If the path cost for all ports on a switch are
the same, the port with the highest priority (that is, lowest value) will
be configured as an active link in the spanning tree.
• Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority, the port
with the lowest numeric identifier will be enabled.
Example
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree port-priority 128
Related Commands
spanning-tree cost (4-191)
spanning-tree edge-port
This command specifies an interface as an edge port. Use the no form to
restore the default.
Syntax
[no] spanning-tree edge-port
4-192
SPANNING TREE COMMANDS
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
• You can enable this option if an interface is attached to a LAN
segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or to an end node. Since
end nodes cannot cause forwarding loops, they can pass directly
through to the spanning tree forwarding state. Specifying Edge Ports
provides quicker convergence for devices such as workstations or
servers, retains the current forwarding database to reduce the amount
of frame flooding required to rebuild address tables during
reconfiguration events, does not cause the spanning tree to initiate
reconfiguration when the interface changes state, and also overcomes
other STA-related timeout problems. However, remember that Edge
Port should only be enabled for ports connected to an end-node
device.
• This command has the same effect as the spanning-tree portfast.
Example
Console(config)#interface ethernet ethernet 1/5
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree edge-port
Console(config-if)#
Related Commands
spanning-tree portfast (4-193)
spanning-tree portfast
This command sets an interface to fast forwarding. Use the no form to
disable fast forwarding.
Syntax
[no] spanning-tree portfast
Default Setting
Disabled
4-193
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
• This command is used to enable/disable the fast spanning-tree mode
for the selected port. In this mode, ports skip the Discarding and
Learning states, and proceed straight to Forwarding.
• Since end-nodes cannot cause forwarding loops, they can be passed
through the spanning tree state changes more quickly than allowed by
standard convergence time. Fast forwarding can achieve quicker
convergence for end-node workstations and servers, and also
overcome other STA related timeout problems. (Remember that fast
forwarding should only be enabled for ports connected to a LAN
segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or for an end-node
device.)
• This command is the same as spanning-tree edge-port, and is only
included for backward compatibility with earlier products. Note that
this command may be removed for future software versions.
Example
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree portfast
Console(config-if)#
Related Commands
spanning-tree edge-port (4-192)
spanning-tree link-type
This command configures the link type for Rapid Spanning Tree. Use the
no form to restore the default.
Syntax
spanning-tree link-type {auto | point-to-point | shared}
no spanning-tree link-type
• auto - Automatically derived from the duplex mode setting.
• point-to-point - Point-to-point link.
• shared - Shared medium.
4-194
SPANNING TREE COMMANDS
Default Setting
auto
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
• Specify a point-to-point link if the interface can only be connected to
exactly one other bridge, or a shared link if it can be connected to two
or more bridges.
• When automatic detection is selected, the switch derives the link type
from the duplex mode. A full-duplex interface is considered a
point-to-point link, while a half-duplex interface is assumed to be on
a shared link.
• RSTP only works on point-to-point links between two bridges. If you
designate a port as a shared link, RSTP is forbidden.
Example
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree link-type point-to-point
spanning-tree protocol-migration
This command re-checks the appropriate BPDU format to send on the
selected interface.
Syntax
spanning-tree protocol-migration interface
interface
• ethernet unit/port
- unit - This is device 1.
- port - Port number. (Range: 1-52)
• port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-4)
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
4-195
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Command Usage
If at any time the switch detects STP BPDUs, including Configuration
or Topology Change Notification BPDUs, it will automatically set the
selected interface to forced STP-compatible mode. However, you can
also use the spanning-tree protocol-migration command at any time
to manually re-check the appropriate BPDU format to send on the
selected interfaces (i.e., RSTP or STP-compatible).
Example
Console#spanning-tree protocol-migration ethernet 1/5
Console#
show spanning-tree
This command shows the configuration for the spanning tree.
Syntax
show spanning-tree [interface]
interface
• ethernet unit/port
- unit - This is device 1.
- port - Port number. (Range: 1-52)
• port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-4)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
• Use the show spanning-tree command with no parameters to
display the spanning tree configuration for the switch and for every
interface in the tree.
• Use the show spanning-tree interface command to display the
spanning tree configuration for a specific interface.
4-196
SPANNING TREE COMMANDS
• For a description of the items displayed under “Spanning-tree
information,” see “Configuring Global Settings” on page 3 -130. For
a description of the items displayed for specific interfaces, see
“Displaying Interface Settings” on page 3 -134.
Example
Console#show spanning-tree
Spanning-tree information
--------------------------------------------------------------Spanning tree mode:
RSTP
Spanning tree enabled/disabled:
enabled
Priority:
40960
Bridge Hello Time (sec.):
2
Bridge Max Age (sec.):
20
Bridge Forward Delay (sec.):
15
Root Hello Time (sec.):
2
Root Max Age (sec.):
20
Root Forward Delay (sec.):
15
Designated Root:
32768.0.0000ABCD0000
Current root port:
1
Current root cost:
50000
Number of topology changes:
5
Last topology changes time (sec.):226
Transmission limit:
3
Path Cost Method:
long
--------------------------------------------------------------Eth 1/ 1 information
--------------------------------------------------------------Admin status:
enabled
Role:
root
State:
forwarding
Path cost:
100000
Priority:
128
Designated cost:
200000
Designated port:
128.24
Designated root:
32768.0.0000ABCD0000
Designated bridge:
32768.0.0030F1552000
Fast forwarding:
enabled
Forward transitions: 1
Admin edge port:
enabled
Oper edge port:
disabled
Admin Link type:
auto
Oper Link type:
point-to-point
Spanning Tree Status: enabled
.
.
.
Console#
4-197
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
VLAN Commands
A VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the network,
but communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment.
This section describes commands used to create VLAN groups, add port
members, specify how VLAN tagging is used, and enable automatic
VLAN registration for the selected interface.
Table 4-51 VLANs
Command Groups
Function
Page
Editing VLAN Groups Sets up VLAN groups, including name, VID
and state
4-198
Configuring VLAN
Interfaces
Configures VLAN interface parameters,
including ingress and egress tagging mode,
ingress filtering, PVID, and GVRP
4-201
Displaying VLAN
Information
Displays VLAN groups, status, port members,
and MAC addresses
4-208
Configuring Private
VLANs
Configures private VLANs, including uplink
and downlink ports
4-209
Editing VLAN Groups
Table 4-52 Editing VLAN Groups
Command
Function
vlan database
Enters VLAN database mode to add, change, GC
and delete VLANs
Mode
4-198
vlan
Configures a VLAN, including VID, name
and state
4-199
VC
Page
vlan database
This command enters VLAN database mode. All commands in this mode
will take effect immediately.
Default Setting
None
4-198
VLAN COMMANDS
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• Use the VLAN database command mode to add, change, and delete
VLANs. After finishing configuration changes, you can display the
VLAN settings by entering the show vlan command.
• Use the interface vlan command mode to define the port
membership mode and add or remove ports from a VLAN. The
results of these commands are written to the running-configuration
file, and you can display this file by entering the show
running-config command.
Example
Console(config)#vlan database
Console(config-vlan)#
Related Commands
show vlan (4-208)
vlan
This command configures a VLAN. Use the no form to restore the default
settings or delete a VLAN.
Syntax
vlan vlan-id [name vlan-name] media ethernet [state {active |
suspend}]
no vlan vlan-id [name | state]
• vlan-id - ID of configured VLAN. (Range: 1-4094, no leading
zeroes)
• name - Keyword to be followed by the VLAN name.
- vlan-name - ASCII string from 1 to 32 characters.
• media ethernet - Ethernet media type.
• state - Keyword to be followed by the VLAN state.
- active - VLAN is operational.
- suspend - VLAN is suspended. Suspended VLANs do not pass
packets.
4-199
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Default Setting
By default only VLAN 1 exists and is active.
Command Mode
VLAN Database Configuration
Command Usage
• no vlan vlan-id deletes the VLAN.
• no vlan vlan-id name removes the VLAN name.
• no vlan vlan-id state returns the VLAN to the default state
(i.e., active).
• You can configure up to 255 VLANs on the switch.
Example
The following example adds a VLAN, using VLAN ID 105 and name
RD5. The VLAN is activated by default.
Console(config)#vlan database
Console(config-vlan)#vlan 105 name RD5 media ethernet
Console(config-vlan)#
Related Commands
show vlan (4-208)
4-200
VLAN COMMANDS
Configuring VLAN Interfaces
Table 4-53 Configuring VLAN Interfaces
Command
Function
Mode
Page
interface vlan
Enters interface configuration mode
for a specified VLAN
IC
4-201
switchport mode
Configures VLAN membership mode IC
for an interface
4-202
switchport
Configures frame types to be accepted IC
acceptable-frame-types by an interface
4-203
switchport
ingress-filtering
Enables ingress filtering on an interface IC
4-204
switchport native vlan
Configures the PVID (native VLAN)
of an interface
IC
4-205
switchport allowed vlan Configures the VLANs associated with IC
an interface
4-206
switchport gvrp
Enables GVRP for an interface
IC
4-219
switchport forbidden
vlan
Configures forbidden VLANs for an
interface
IC
4-207
switchport priority
default
Sets a port priority for incoming
untagged frames
IC
4-224
interface vlan
This command enters interface configuration mode for VLANs, which is
used to configure VLAN parameters for a physical interface.
Syntax
interface vlan vlan-id
vlan-id - ID of the configured VLAN. (Range: 1-4094, no leading
zeroes)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
4-201
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Example
The following example shows how to set the interface configuration mode
to VLAN 1, and then assign an IP address to the VLAN:
Console(config)#interface vlan 1
Console(config-if)#ip address 192.168.1.254 255.255.255.0
Console(config-if)#
Related Commands
shutdown (4-150)
switchport mode
This command configures the VLAN membership mode for a port. Use
the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
switchport mode {trunk | hybrid | private-vlan}
no switchport mode
• trunk - Specifies a port as an end-point for a VLAN trunk. A trunk
is a direct link between two switches, so the port transmits tagged
frames that identify the source VLAN. Note that frames belonging
to the port’s default VLAN (i.e., associated with the PVID) are also
transmitted as tagged frames.
• hybrid - Specifies a hybrid VLAN interface. The port may transmit
tagged or untagged frames.
• private-vlan - For an explanation of this command see “switchport
mode private-vlan” on page 4-213.
Default Setting
All ports are in hybrid mode with the PVID set to VLAN 1.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
4-202
VLAN COMMANDS
Example
The following shows how to set the configuration mode to port 1, and
then set the switchport mode to hybrid:
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#switchport mode hybrid
Console(config-if)#
Related Commands
switchport acceptable-frame-types (4-203)
switchport acceptable-frame-types
This command configures the acceptable frame types for a port. Use the
no form to restore the default.
Syntax
switchport acceptable-frame-types {all | tagged}
no switchport acceptable-frame-types
• all - The port accepts all frames, tagged or untagged.
• tagged - The port only receives tagged frames.
Default Setting
All frame types
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
When set to receive all frame types, any received frames that are
untagged are assigned to the default VLAN.
Example
The following example shows how to restrict the traffic received on port 1
to tagged frames:
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#switchport acceptable-frame-types tagged
Console(config-if)#
4-203
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Related Commands
switchport mode (4-202)
switchport ingress-filtering
This command enables ingress filtering for an interface. Use the no form
to restore the default.
Syntax
[no] switchport ingress-filtering
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
• Ingress filtering only affects tagged frames.
• If ingress filtering is disabled and a port receives frames tagged for
VLANs for which it is not a member, these frames will be flooded to
all other ports (except for those VLANs explicitly forbidden on this
port).
• If ingress filtering is enabled and a port receives frames tagged for
VLANs for which it is not a member, these frames will be discarded.
• Ingress filtering does not affect VLAN independent BPDU frames,
such as GVRP or STA. However, they do affect VLAN dependent
BPDU frames, such as GMRP.
Example
The following example shows how to set the interface to port 1 and then
enable ingress filtering:
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#switchport ingress-filtering
Console(config-if)#
4-204
VLAN COMMANDS
switchport native vlan
This command configures the PVID (i.e., default VLAN ID) for a port.
Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
switchport native vlan vlan-id
no switchport native vlan
vlan-id - Default VLAN ID for a port.
(Range: 1-4094, no leading zeroes)
Default Setting
VLAN 1
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
• If an interface is not a member of VLAN 1 and you assign its PVID
to this VLAN, the interface will automatically be added to VLAN 1 as
an untagged member. For all other VLANs, an interface must first be
configured as an untagged member before you can assign its PVID to
that group.
• If acceptable frame types is set to all or switchport mode is set to
hybrid, the PVID will be inserted into all untagged frames entering
the ingress port.
Example
The following example shows how to set the PVID for port 1 to VLAN 3:
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#switchport native vlan 3
Console(config-if)#
4-205
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
switchport allowed vlan
This command configures VLAN groups on the selected interface. Use
the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
switchport allowed vlan {add vlan-list [tagged | untagged] |
remove vlan-list}
no switchport allowed vlan
• add vlan-list - List of VLAN identifiers to add.
• remove vlan-list - List of VLAN identifiers to remove.
• vlan-list - Separate nonconsecutive VLAN identifiers with a comma
and no spaces; use a hyphen to designate a range of IDs. Do not
enter leading zeros. (Range: 1-4094).
Default Setting
• All ports are assigned to VLAN 1 by default
• The default frame type is untagged.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
• A port, or a trunk with switchport mode set to hybrid, must be
assigned to at least one VLAN as untagged.
• If a trunk has switchport mode set to trunk (i.e., 1Q Trunk), then you
can only assign an interface to VLAN groups as a tagged member.
• Frames are always tagged within the switch. The tagged/untagged
parameter used when adding a VLAN to an interface tells the switch
whether to keep or remove the tag from a frame on egress.
• If none of the intermediate network devices nor the host at the other
end of the connection supports VLANs, the interface should be
added to these VLANs as an untagged member. Otherwise, it is only
necessary to add at most one VLAN as untagged, and this should
correspond to the native VLAN for the interface.
4-206
VLAN COMMANDS
• If a VLAN on the forbidden list for an interface is manually added to
that interface, the VLAN is automatically removed from the
forbidden list for that interface.
Example
The following example shows how to add VLANs 1, 2, 5 and 6 to the
allowed list as tagged VLANs for port 1:
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#switchport allowed vlan add 1,2,5,6 tagged
Console(config-if)#
switchport forbidden vlan
This command configures forbidden VLANs. Use the no form to remove
the list of forbidden VLANs.
Syntax
switchport forbidden vlan {add vlan-list | remove vlan-list}
no switchport forbidden vlan
• add vlan-list - List of VLAN identifiers to add.
• remove vlan-list - List of VLAN identifiers to remove.
• vlan-list - Separate nonconsecutive VLAN identifiers with a comma
and no spaces; use a hyphen to designate a range of IDs. Do not
enter leading zeros. (Range: 1-4094).
Default Setting
No VLANs are included in the forbidden list.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
• This command prevents a VLAN from being automatically added to
the specified interface via GVRP.
• If a VLAN has been added to the set of allowed VLANs for an
interface, then you cannot add it to the set of forbidden VLANs for
that same interface.
4-207
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Example
The following example shows how to prevent port 1 from being added to
VLAN 3:
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#switchport forbidden vlan add 3
Console(config-if)#
Displaying VLAN Information
Table 4-54 Show VLAN Commands
Command
Function
Mode Page
show vlan
Shows VLAN information
NE,
PE
4-208
show interfaces
status vlan
Displays status for the specified VLAN
interface
NE,
PE
4-153
show interfaces
switchport
Displays the administrative and operational NE,
status of an interface
PE
4-156
show vlan
This command shows VLAN information.
Syntax
show vlan [id vlan-id | name vlan-name | private-vlan private-vlan-type]
• id - Keyword to be followed by the VLAN ID.
- vlan-id - ID of the configured VLAN. (Range: 1-4093, no
leading zeroes)
• name - Keyword to be followed by the VLAN name.
- vlan-name - ASCII string from 1 to 32 characters.
• private-vlan - For an explanation of this command see “show vlan
private-vlan” on page 4-216
- private-vlan-type - Indicates the private vlan type.
(Options: Community, Isolated, Primary)
Default Setting
Shows all VLANs.
4-208
VLAN COMMANDS
Command Mode
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec
Example
The following example shows how to display information for VLAN 1:
Console#show vlan id 1
Vlan ID:
Type:
Name:
Status:
Ports/Port Channel:
1
Static
DefaultVlan
Active
Eth1/ 1(S) Eth1/ 2(S)
Eth1/ 6(S) Eth1/ 7(S)
Eth1/11(S) Eth1/12(S)
Eth1/16(S) Eth1/17(S)
Eth1/21(S) Eth1/22(S)
Eth1/26(S) Eth1/27(S)
Eth1/31(S) Eth1/32(S)
Eth1/36(S) Eth1/37(S)
Eth1/41(S) Eth1/42(S)
Eth1/46(S) Eth1/47(S)
Eth1/51(S) Eth1/52(S)
Eth1/ 3(S)
Eth1/ 8(S)
Eth1/13(S)
Eth1/18(S)
Eth1/23(S)
Eth1/28(S)
Eth1/33(S)
Eth1/38(S)
Eth1/43(S)
Eth1/48(S)
Eth1/ 4(S)
Eth1/ 9(S)
Eth1/14(S)
Eth1/19(S)
Eth1/24(S)
Eth1/29(S)
Eth1/34(S)
Eth1/39(S)
Eth1/44(S)
Eth1/49(S)
Eth1/ 5(S)
Eth1/10(S)
Eth1/15(S)
Eth1/20(S)
Eth1/25(S)
Eth1/30(S)
Eth1/35(S)
Eth1/40(S)
Eth1/45(S)
Eth1/50(S)
Console#
Configuring Private VLANs
Private VLANs provide port-based security and isolation between ports
within the assigned VLAN. This switch supports three types of private
VLAN ports: promiscuous, community and isolated ports. A promiscuous
port can communicate with all interfaces within a private VLAN.
Community ports can only communicate with other ports in their own
community VLAN, and with their designated promiscuous ports. Isolated
ports can only communicate with their designated promiscuous ports, and
not with any other host ports in its isolated VLAN. This section describes
commands used to configure private VLANs.
Table 4-55 Private VLAN Commands
Command
Function
Mode Page
Edit Private VLAN Groups
private-vlan
Adds or deletes primary, community, or VC
isolated VLANs
private-vlan association Associates a community VLAN with a
primary VLAN
VC
4-211
4-212
4-209
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Table 4-55 Private VLAN Commands (Continued)
Command
Function
Mode Page
Configure Private VLAN Interfaces
switchport mode
private-vlan
Sets an interface to host mode or
promiscuous mode
IC
4-213
switchport private-vlan Associates an interface with a secondary IC
host-association
VLAN
4-214
switchport private-vlan Associates an interface with an isolated
isolated
VLAN
IC
4-214
switchport private-vlan Maps an interface to a primary VLAN
mapping
IC
4-215
NE,
PE
4-216
Display Private VLAN Information
show vlan private-vlan Shows private VLAN information
To configure private VLANs, follow these steps:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
4-210
Use the private-vlan command to designate one or more isolated or
community VLANs and the primary VLAN that will channel traffic
outside the community groups.
Use the private-vlan association command to map the community
VLAN(s) to the primary VLAN.
Use the switchport mode private-vlan command to configure ports
as promiscuous (i.e., having access to all ports in the primary VLAN)
or host (i.e., community or isolated port).
Use the switchport private-vlan host-association command to
assign a port to a community VLAN. Or use the switchport
private-vlan isolated command to assign a port to an isolated
VLAN.
Use the switchport private-vlan mapping command to assign a
port to a primary VLAN.
Use the show vlan private-vlan command to verify your
configuration settings.
VLAN COMMANDS
private-vlan
Use this command to create a primary, isolated or community private
VLAN. Use the no form to remove the specified private VLAN.
Syntax
private-vlan vlan-id {community | primary | isolated}
no private-vlan vlan-id
• vlan-id - ID of private VLAN. (Range: 1-4094, no leading zeroes).
• community - A VLAN in which traffic is restricted to port
members.
• primary - A VLAN which can contain one or more community
VLANs, and serves to channel traffic between community
VLANs and other locations.
• isolated – Specifies an isolated VLAN. Ports assigned to an
isolated VLAN can only communicate with promiscuous ports
within their own VLAN.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
VLAN Configuration
Command Usage
• Private VLANs are used to restrict traffic to ports within the same
VLAN “community,” and channel traffic passing outside the
community through promiscuous ports that have been mapped to the
associated “primary” VLAN.
• Port membership for private VLANs is static. Once a port has been
assigned to a private VLAN, it cannot be dynamically moved to
another VLAN via GVRP.
• Private VLAN ports cannot be set to trunked mode. (See “switchport
mode” on page 4-202.)
4-211
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Example
Console(config)#vlan database
Console(config-vlan)#private-vlan 2 primary
Console(config-vlan)#private-vlan 3 community
Console(config)#
private vlan association
Use this command to associate a primary VLAN with a secondary (i.e.,
community) VLAN. Use the no form to remove all associations for the
specified primary VLAN.
Syntax
private-vlan primary-vlan-id association {secondary-vlan-id |
add secondary-vlan-id | remove secondary-vlan-id}
no private-vlan primary-vlan-id association
• primary-vlan-id - ID of primary VLAN.
(Range: 1-4094, no leading zeroes).
• secondary-vlan-id - ID of secondary (i.e, community) VLAN.
(Range: 1-4094, no leading zeroes).
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
VLAN Configuration
Command Usage
Secondary VLANs provide security for group members. The associated
primary VLAN provides a common interface for access to other
network resources within the primary VLAN (e.g., servers configured
with promiscuous ports) and to resources outside of the primary
VLAN (via promiscuous ports).
Example
Console(config-vlan)#private-vlan 2 association 3
Console(config)#
4-212
VLAN COMMANDS
switchport mode private-vlan
Use this command to set the private VLAN mode for an interface. Use the
no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
switchport mode private-vlan {host | promiscuous}
no switchport mode private-vlan
• host – This port type can subsequently be assigned to a community
or isolated VLAN.
• promiscuous – This port type can communicate with all other
promiscuous ports in the same primary VLAN, as well as with all
the ports in the associated secondary VLANs.
Default Setting
Normal VLAN
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
To assign a host port to a community VLAN, use the private-vlan
host association command. To assign a host port to an isolated
VLAN, use the switchport private-vlan isolated command.
Example
Console(config)#interface ethernet
Console(config-if)#switchport mode
Console(config-if)#exit
Console(config)#interface ethernet
Console(config-if)#switchport mode
Console(config-if)#
1/2
private-vlan promiscuous
1/3
private-vlan host
4-213
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
switchport private-vlan host-association
Use this command to associate an interface with a secondary VLAN. Use
the no form to remove this association.
Syntax
switchport private-vlan host-association secondary-vlan-id
no switchport private-vlan host-association
secondary-vlan-id - ID of secondary (i.e., community) VLAN.
(Range: 1-4094).
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
All ports assigned to a secondary (i.e., community) VLAN can pass
traffic between group members, but must communicate with resources
outside of the group via a promiscuous port.
Example
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/3
Console(config-if)#switchport private-vlan host-association 3
Console(config-if)#
switchport private-vlan isolated
Use this command to associate an interface with an isolated VLAN. Use
the no form to remove this association.
Syntax
switchport private-vlan isolated isolated-vlan-id
no switchport private-vlan isolated
isolated-vlan-id - ID of isolated VLAN. (Range: 1-4094).
Default Setting
None
4-214
VLAN COMMANDS
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
All ports assigned to an isolated VLAN can pass traffic between group
members, but must communicate with resources outside of the group
via a promiscuous port.
Example
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/3
Console(config-if)#switchport private-vlan isolated 3
Console(config-if)#
switchport private-vlan mapping
Use this command to map an interface to a primary VLAN. Use the no
form to remove this mapping.
Syntax
switchport private-vlan mapping primary-vlan-id
no switchport private-vlan mapping
primary-vlan-id – ID of primary VLAN. (Range: 1-4094).
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
Promiscuous ports assigned to a primary VLAN can communicate with
any other promiscuous ports in the same VLAN, and with the group
members within any associated secondary VLANs.
Example
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/2
Console(config-if)#switchport private-vlan mapping 2
Console(config-if)#
4-215
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
show vlan private-vlan
Use this command to show the private VLAN configuration settings on
this switch.
Syntax
show vlan private-vlan [community | isolated | primary]
• community – Displays all community VLANs, along with their
associated primary VLAN and assigned host interfaces.
• isolated – Displays all isolated VLANs, along with their associated
primary VLAN and assigned host interfaces.
• primary – Displays all primary VLANs, along with any assigned
promiscuous interfaces.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Executive
Example
Console#show vlan private-vlan
Primary
Secondary
Type
-------- ----------- ---------5
primary
5
6
community
0
8
isolated
Console#
4-216
Interfaces
-----------------------------Eth1/ 3
Eth1/ 4 Eth1/ 5
GVRP AND BRIDGE EXTENSION COMMANDS
GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands
GARP VLAN Registration Protocol defines a way for switches to
exchange VLAN information in order to automatically register VLAN
members on interfaces across the network. This section describes how to
enable GVRP for individual interfaces and globally for the switch, as well
as how to display default configuration settings for the Bridge Extension
MIB.
Table 4-56 GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands
Command
Function
Mode Page
bridge-ext gvrp
Enables GVRP globally for the
switch
GC
4-217
show bridge-ext
Shows the global bridge extension
configuration
PE
4-218
switchport gvrp
Enables GVRP for an interface
IC
4-219
switchport forbidden vlan Configures forbidden VLANs for an IC
interface
4-207
show gvrp configuration
Displays GVRP configuration for
the selected interface
4-219
garp timer
Sets the GARP timer for the selected IC
function
4-220
show garp timer
Shows the GARP timer for the
selected function
4-221
NE,
PE
NE,
PE
bridge-ext gvrp
This command enables GVRP globally for the switch. Use the no form to
disable it.
Syntax
[no] bridge-ext gvrp
Default Setting
Disabled
4-217
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
GVRP defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in
order to register VLAN members on ports across the network. This
function should be enabled to permit automatic VLAN registration,
and to support VLANs which extend beyond the local switch.
Example
Console(config)#bridge-ext gvrp
Console(config)#
show bridge-ext
This command shows the configuration for bridge extension commands.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
See “Displaying Basic VLAN Information” on page 3 -146 and
“Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities” on page 3 -15 for a
description of the displayed items.
Example
Console#show bridge-ext
Max support vlan numbers:
Max support vlan ID:
Extended multicast filtering services:
Static entry individual port:
VLAN learning:
Configurable PVID tagging:
Local VLAN capable:
Traffic classes:
Global GVRP status:
GMRP:
Console#
4-218
255
4094
No
Yes
IVL
Yes
No
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
GVRP AND BRIDGE EXTENSION COMMANDS
switchport gvrp
This command enables GVRP for a port. Use the no form to disable it.
Syntax
[no] switchport gvrp
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Example
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/6
Console(config-if)#switchport gvrp
Console(config-if)#
show gvrp configuration
This command shows if GVRP is enabled.
Syntax
show gvrp configuration [interface]
interface
• ethernet unit/port
- unit - Stack unit. (This is unit 1)
- port - Port number. (Range: 1-52)
• port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-4)
Default Setting
Shows both global and interface-specific configuration.
Command Mode
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show gvrp configuration ethernet 1/6
Eth 1/ 6:
GVRP configuration: Enabled
Console#
4-219
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
garp timer
This command sets the values for the join, leave and leaveall timers. Use
the no form to restore the timers’ default values.
Syntax
garp timer {join | leave | leaveall} timer_value
no garp timer {join | leave | leaveall}
• {join | leave | leaveall} - Which timer to set.
• timer_value - Value of timer.
Ranges:
- join: 20-1000 centiseconds
- leave: 60-3000 centiseconds
- leavall: 500-18000 centiseconds
Default Setting
• join: 20 centiseconds
• leave: 60 centiseconds
• leaveall: 1000 centiseconds
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
• Group Address Registration Protocol is used by GVRP and GMRP to
register or deregister client attributes for client services within a
bridged LAN. The default values for the GARP timers are
independent of the media access method or data rate. These values
should not be changed unless you are experiencing difficulties with
GMRP or GVRP registration/deregistration.
• Timer values are applied to GVRP for all the ports on all VLANs.
• Timer values must meet the following restrictions:
- leave >= (2 x join)
- leaveall > leave
Note: Set GVRP timers on all Layer 2 devices connected in the same
network to the same values. Otherwise, GVRP may not operate
successfully.
4-220
GVRP AND BRIDGE EXTENSION COMMANDS
Example
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#garp timer join 100
Console(config-if)#
Related Commands
show garp timer (4-221)
show garp timer
This command shows the GARP timers for the selected interface.
Syntax
show garp timer [interface]
interface
• ethernet unit/port
- unit - Stack unit. (This is unit 1)
- port - Port number. (Range: 1-52)
• port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-4)
Default Setting
Shows all GARP timers.
Command Mode
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show garp timer ethernet 1/1
Eth 1/ 1 GARP timer status:
Join timer:
100 centiseconds
Leave timer:
60 centiseconds
Leaveall timer: 1000 centiseconds
Console#
Related Commands
garp timer (4-220)
4-221
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Priority Commands
The commands described in this section allow you to specify which data
packets have greater precedence when traffic is buffered in the switch due
to congestion. This switch supports CoS with four priority queues for each
port. Data packets in a port’s high-priority queue will be transmitted before
those in the lower-priority queues. You can set the default priority for each
interface, the relative weight of each queue, and the mapping of frame
priority tags to the switch’s priority queues.
Table 4-57 Priority Commands
Command Groups
Function
Priority (Layer 2)
Configures default priority for untagged frames, 4-222
sets queue weights, and maps class of service tags
to hardware queues
Page
Priority (Layer 3 and 4) Maps TCP ports, IP precedence tags, or IP DSCP 4-229
tags to class of service values
Priority Commands (Layer 2)
Table 4-58 Priority Commands (Layer 2)
Command
Function
Mode
Page
queue mode
Sets the queue mode to strict priority or
Weighted Round-Robin (WRR)
GC
4-223
IC
4-224
switchport priority Sets a port priority for incoming untagged
default
frames
queue bandwidth
Assigns round-robin weights to the priority GC
queues
4-225
queue cos map
Assigns class-of-service values to the
priority queues
4-226
show queue mode Shows the current queue mode
show queue
bandwidth
4-222
IC
PE
4-227
Shows round-robin weights assigned to the PE
priority queues
4-227
PRIORITY COMMANDS
Table 4-58 Priority Commands (Layer 2) (Continued)
Command
Function
Mode
Page
show queue
cos-map
Shows the class-of-service map
PE
4-228
show interfaces
switchport
Displays the administrative and operational PE
status of an interface
4-156
queue mode
This command sets the queue mode to strict priority or Weighted
Round-Robin (WRR) for the class of service (CoS) priority queues. Use the
no form to restore the default value.
Syntax
queue mode {strict | wrr}
no queue mode
• strict - Services the egress queues in sequential order, transmitting
all traffic in the higher priority queues before servicing lower
priority queues.
• wrr - Weighted Round-Robin shares bandwidth at the egress ports
by using scheduling weights 1, 2, 4, 6 for queues 0 - 3 respectively.
Default Setting
Weighted Round Robin
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
You can set the switch to service the queues based on a strict rule that
requires all traffic in a higher priority queue to be processed before
lower priority queues are serviced, or use Weighted Round-Robin
(WRR) queuing that specifies a relative weight of each queue. WRR
uses a predefined relative weight for each queue that determines the
percentage of service time the switch services each queue before
moving on to the next queue. This prevents the head-of-line blocking
that can occur with strict priority queuing.
4-223
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Example
The following example sets the queue mode to strict priority service mode:
Console(config)#queue mode strict
Console(config)#
switchport priority default
This command sets a priority for incoming untagged frames. Use the no
form to restore the default value.
Syntax
switchport priority default default-priority-id
no switchport priority default
default-priority-id - The priority number for untagged ingress traffic.
The priority is a number from 0 to 7. Seven is the highest priority.
Default Setting
The priority is not set, and the default value for untagged frames
received on the interface is zero.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
• The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port, IP Precedence or IP
DSCP, and default switchport priority.
• The default priority applies for an untagged frame received on a port
set to accept all frame types (i.e, receives both untagged and tagged
frames). This priority does not apply to IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tagged
frames. If the incoming frame is an IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tagged
frame, the IEEE 802.1p User Priority bits will be used.
• This switch provides eight priority queues for each port. It is
configured to use Weighted Round Robin, which can be viewed with
the show queue bandwidth command. Inbound frames that do not
have VLAN tags are tagged with the input port’s default ingress user
priority, and then placed in the appropriate priority queue at the
output port. The default priority for all ingress ports is zero.
4-224
PRIORITY COMMANDS
Therefore, any inbound frames that do not have priority tags will be
placed in queue 0 of the output port. (Note that if the output port is
an untagged member of the associated VLAN, these frames are
stripped of all VLAN tags prior to transmission.)
Example
The following example shows how to set a default priority on port 3 to 5:
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/3
Console(config-if)#switchport priority default 5
queue bandwidth
This command assigns weighted round-robin (WRR) weights to the four
class of service (CoS) priority queues. Use the no form to restore the
default weights.
Syntax
queue bandwidth weight1...weight3
no queue bandwidth
weight1...weight3 - The ratio of weights for queues 0-3 determines the
weights used by the WRR scheduler. However, note that Queue 0 is
fixed at a weight of 1, and cannot be configured. (Range: 1-31)
Default Setting
Weights 1, 2, 4, 6 are assigned to queues 0-3 respectively.
Queue 0 is non-configurable.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
WRR controls bandwidth sharing at the egress port by defining
scheduling weights.
Example
This example shows how to assign WRR weights to priority queues 1 - 3:
Console(config)#queue bandwidth 6 9 12
Console(config)#
4-225
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Related Commands
show queue bandwidth (4-227)
queue cos-map
This command assigns class of service (CoS) values to the priority queues
(i.e., hardware output queues 0 - 3). Use the no form set the CoS map to
the default values.
Syntax
queue cos-map queue_id [cos1 ... cosn]
no queue cos-map
• queue_id - The ID of the priority queue.
Ranges are 0 to 3, where 3 is the highest priority queue.
• cos1 .. cosn - The CoS values that are mapped to the queue ID. It is a
space-separated list of numbers. The CoS value is a number from 0
to 7, where 7 is the highest priority.
Default Setting
This switch supports Class of Service by using four priority queues,
with Weighted Round Robin queuing for each port. Eight separate
traffic classes are defined in IEEE 802.1p. The default priority levels
are assigned according to recommendations in the IEEE 802.1p
standard as shown below.
Table 4-59 Default CoS Priority Levels
Queue
Priority
0
1
2
3
1, 2
0, 3
4, 5
6, 7
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
• CoS values assigned at the ingress port are also used at the egress port.
• This command sets the CoS priority for all interfaces.
4-226
PRIORITY COMMANDS
Example
The following example shows how to map CoS values 0, 1 and 2 to egress
queue 0, value 3 to egress queue 1, values 4 and 5 to egress queue 2, and
values 6 and 7 to egress queue 3:
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#queue cos-map 0 0 1 2
Console(config-if)#queue cos-map 1 3
Console(config-if)#queue cos-map 2 4 5
Console(config-if)#queue cos-map 3 6 7
Console(config-if)#end
Console#show queue cos-map ethernet 1/1
Information of Eth 1/1
CoS Value
: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Priority Queue: 0 0 0 1 2 2 3 3
Console#
Related Commands
show queue cos-map (4-228)
show queue mode
This command shows the current queue mode.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show queue mode
Queue mode: wrr
Console#
show queue bandwidth
This command displays the weighted round-robin (WRR) bandwidth
allocation for the four priority queues.
Default Setting
None
4-227
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show queue bandwidth
Queue ID Weight
-------- -----0
1
1
2
2
4
3
6
Console#
show queue cos-map
This command shows the class of service priority map.
Syntax
show queue cos-map [interface]
interface
• ethernet unit/port
- unit - Stack unit. (This is unit 1)
- port - Port number. (Range: 1-52)
• port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-4)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show queue
Information of Eth
CoS Value
: 0
Priority Queue: 0
Console#
4-228
cos-map ethernet 1/1
1/1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 0 1 2 2 3 3
PRIORITY COMMANDS
Priority Commands (Layer 3 and 4)
Table 4-60 Priority Commands (Layer 3 and 4)
Command
Function
Mode
Page
map ip port
Enables TCP class of service mapping
GC
4-229
map ip port
Maps TCP socket to a class of service
IC
4-230
map ip precedence
Enables IP precedence class of service
mapping
GC
4-229
map ip precedence
Maps IP precedence value to a class of
service
IC
4-232
map ip dscp
Enables IP DSCP class of service
mapping
GC
4-233
map ip dscp
Maps IP DSCP value to a class of service IC
4-233
map access-list ip
Sets the CoS value and corresponding
output queue for packets matching an
ACL rule
IC
4-126
map access-list mac
Sets the CoS value and corresponding
output queue for packets matching an
ACL rule
IC
4-133
show map ip port
Shows the IP port map
PE
4-235
show map ip
precedence
Shows the IP precedence map
PE
4-236
show map ip dscp
Shows the IP DSCP map
PE
4-237
show map access-list Shows CoS value mapped to an access list PE
ip
for an interface
4-127
show map access-list Shows CoS value mapped to an access list PE
mac
for an interface
4-134
map ip port (Global Configuration)
This command enables IP port mapping (i.e., class of service mapping for
TCP/UDP sockets). Use the no form to disable IP port mapping.
Syntax
[no] map ip port
4-229
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port, IP Precedence or IP
DSCP, and default switchport priority.
Example
The following example shows how to enable TCP/UDP port mapping
globally:
Console(config)#map ip port
Console(config)#
map ip port (Interface Configuration)
This command set IP port priority (i.e., TCP/UDP port priority). Use the
no form to remove a specific setting.
Syntax
map ip port port number cos cos-value
no map ip port port-number
• port-number - 16-bit TCP/UDP port number. (Range: 1-65535)
• cos-value - Class-of-Service value (Range: 0-7)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
• The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port, IP Precedence or IP
DSCP, and default switchport priority.
• This command sets the IP port priority for all interfaces.
4-230
PRIORITY COMMANDS
Example
The following example shows how to map HTTP traffic to CoS value 0:
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5
Console(config-if)#map ip port 80 cos 0
Console(config-if)#
map ip precedence (Global Configuration)
This command enables IP precedence mapping (i.e., IP Type of Service).
Use the no form to disable IP precedence mapping.
Syntax
[no] map ip precedence
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port, IP Precedence or IP
DSCP, and default switchport priority.
• IP Precedence and IP DSCP cannot both be enabled. Enabling one of
these priority types will automatically disable the other type.
Example
The following example shows how to enable IP precedence mapping
globally:
Console(config)#map ip precedence
Console(config)#
4-231
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
map ip precedence (Interface Configuration)
This command sets IP precedence priority (i.e., IP Type of Service
priority). Use the no form to restore the default table.
Syntax
map ip precedence ip-precedence-value cos cos-value
no map ip precedence
• precedence-value - 3-bit precedence value. (Range: 0-7)
• cos-value - Class-of-Service value (Range: 0-7)
Default Setting
The list below shows the default priority mapping.
Table 4-61 Mapping IP Precedence Values
IP Precedence Value 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
CoS Value
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
• The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port, IP Precedence or IP
DSCP, and default switchport priority.
• IP Precedence values are mapped to default Class of Service values on
a one-to-one basis according to recommendations in the IEEE 802.1p
standard, and then subsequently mapped to the eight hardware
priority queues.
• This command sets the IP Precedence for all interfaces.
Example
The following example shows how to map IP precedence value 1 to CoS
value 0:
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5
Console(config-if)#map ip precedence 1 cos 0
Console(config-if)#
4-232
PRIORITY COMMANDS
map ip dscp (Global Configuration)
This command enables IP DSCP mapping (i.e., Differentiated Services
Code Point mapping). Use the no form to disable IP DSCP mapping.
Syntax
[no] map ip dscp
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port, IP Precedence or IP
DSCP, and default switchport priority.
• IP Precedence and IP DSCP cannot both be enabled. Enabling one of
these priority types will automatically disable the other type.
Example
The following example shows how to enable IP DSCP mapping globally:
Console(config)#map ip dscp
Console(config)#
map ip dscp (Interface Configuration)
This command sets IP DSCP priority (i.e., Differentiated Services Code
Point priority). Use the no form to restore the default table.
Syntax
map ip dscp dscp-value cos cos-value
no map ip dscp
• dscp-value - 8-bit DSCP value. (Range: 0-63)
• cos-value - Class-of-Service value (Range: 0-7)
4-233
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Default Setting
The DSCP default values are defined in the following table. Note that
all the DSCP values that are not specified are mapped to CoS value 0.
Table 4-62 IP DSCP to CoS Values
IP DSCP Value
CoS Value
0
0
8
1
10, 12, 14, 16
2
18, 20, 22, 24
3
26, 28, 30, 32, 34, 36
4
38, 40, 42
5
48
6
46, 56
7
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
• The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port, IP Precedence or IP
DSCP, and default switchport priority.
• DSCP priority values are mapped to default Class of Service values
according to recommendations in the IEEE 802.1p standard, and
then subsequently mapped to the four hardware priority queues.
• This command sets the IP DSCP priority for all interfaces.
Example
The following example shows how to map IP DSCP value 1 to CoS
value 0:
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5
Console(config-if)#map ip dscp 1 cos 0
Console(config-if)#
4-234
PRIORITY COMMANDS
show map ip port
Use this command to show the IP port priority map.
Syntax
show map ip port [interface]
interface
• ethernet unit/port
- unit - Stack unit. (This is unit 1)
- port - Port number. (Range: 1-52)
• port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-4)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
The following shows that HTTP traffic has been mapped to CoS value 0:
Console#show map ip port
TCP port mapping status: enabled
Port
Port no. COS
--------- -------- --Eth 1/ 5
80
0
Console#
Related Commands
map ip port (Global Configuration) (4-229)
map ip port (Interface Configuration) (4-230)
4-235
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
show map ip precedence
This command shows the IP precedence priority map.
Syntax
show map ip precedence [interface]
interface
• ethernet unit/port
- unit - Stack unit. (This is unit 1)
- port - Port number. (Range: 1-52)
• port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-4)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show map ip precedence ethernet 1/5
Precedence mapping status: enabled
Port
Precedence COS
--------- ---------- --Eth 1/ 5
0
0
Eth 1/ 5
1
1
Eth 1/ 5
2
2
Eth 1/ 5
3
3
Eth 1/ 5
4
4
Eth 1/ 5
5
5
Eth 1/ 5
6
6
Eth 1/ 5
7
7
Console#
Related Commands
map ip port (Global Configuration) (4-229)
map ip precedence (Interface Configuration) (4-232)
4-236
PRIORITY COMMANDS
show map ip dscp
This command shows the IP DSCP priority map.
Syntax
show map ip dscp [interface]
interface
• ethernet unit/port
- unit - Stack unit. (This is unit 1)
- port - Port number. (Range: 1-52)
• port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-4)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show map ip dscp ethernet 1/1
DSCP mapping status: enabled
Port
DSCP COS
--------- ---- --Eth 1/ 1
0
0
Eth 1/ 1
1
0
Eth 1/ 1
2
0
Eth 1/ 1
3
0
.
.
.
Eth 1/ 1
61
0
Eth 1/ 1
62
0
Eth 1/ 1
63
0
Console#
Related Commands
map ip dscp (Global Configuration) (4-233)
map ip dscp (Interface Configuration) (4-233)
4-237
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Multicast Filtering Commands
This switch uses IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) to query
for any attached hosts that want to receive a specific multicast service. It
identifies the ports containing hosts requesting a service and sends data
out to those ports only. It then propagates the service request up to any
neighboring multicast switch/router to ensure that it will continue to
receive the multicast service.
Table 4-63 Multicast Filtering Commands
Command Groups
Function
Page
IGMP Snooping
Configures multicast groups via IGMP snooping
or static assignment, sets the IGMP version,
displays current snooping and query settings, and
displays the multicast service and group members
4-238
IGMP Query
Configures IGMP query parameters for multicast
filtering at Layer 2
4-242
Static Multicast
Routing
Configures static multicast router ports
4-247
IGMP Snooping Commands
Table 4-64 IGMP Snooping Commands
4-238
Command
Function
Mode
Page
ip igmp snooping
Enables IGMP snooping
GC
4-239
ip igmp snooping
vlan static
Adds an interface as a member of a
multicast group
GC
4-239
ip igmp snooping
version
Configures the IGMP version for
snooping
GC
4-240
show ip igmp
snooping
Shows the IGMP snooping and query
configuration
PE
4-241
show
mac-address-table
multicast
Shows the IGMP snooping MAC
multicast list
PE
4-241
MULTICAST FILTERING COMMANDS
ip igmp snooping
This command enables IGMP snooping on this switch. Use the no form
to disable it.
Syntax
[no] ip igmp snooping
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
The following example enables IGMP snooping.
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping
Console(config)#
ip igmp snooping vlan static
This command adds a port to a multicast group. Use the no form to
remove the port.
Syntax
[no] ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id static ip-address interface
• vlan-id - VLAN ID (Range: 1-4094)
• ip-address - IP address for multicast group
• interface
- ethernet unit/port
- unit - Stack unit. (This is unit 1)
- port - Port number. (Range: 1-52)
- port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-4)
Default Setting
None
4-239
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
The following shows how to statically configure a multicast group on a
port:
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping vlan 1 static 224.0.0.12
ethernet 1/5
Console(config)#
ip igmp snooping version
This command configures the IGMP snooping version. Use the no form
to restore the default.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping version {1 | 2}
no ip igmp snooping version
• 1 - IGMP Version 1
• 2 - IGMP Version 2
Default Setting
IGMP Version 2
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• All systems on the subnet must support the same version. If there are
legacy devices in your network that only support Version 1, you will
also have to configure this switch to use Version 1.
• Some commands are only enabled for IGMPv2, including ip igmp
query-max-response-time and ip igmp query-timeout.
Example
The following configures the switch to use IGMP Version 1:
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping version 1
Console(config)#
4-240
MULTICAST FILTERING COMMANDS
show ip igmp snooping
This command shows the IGMP snooping configuration.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
See Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters” on
page 3-184 for a description of the displayed items.
Example
The following shows the current IGMP snooping configuration:
Console#show ip igmp snooping
Service status:
Enabled
Querier status:
Enabled
Query count:
2
Query interval:
125 sec
Query max response time: 10 sec
Router port expire time: 300 sec
IGMP snooping version:
Version 2
Console#
show mac-address-table multicast
This command shows known multicast addresses.
Syntax
show mac-address-table multicast [vlan vlan-id]
[user | igmp-snooping]
• vlan-id - VLAN ID (1 to 4094)
• user - Display only the user-configured multicast entries.
• igmp-snooping - Display only entries learned through IGMP
snooping.
Default Setting
None
4-241
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
Member types displayed include IGMP or USER, depending on
selected options.
Example
The following shows the multicast entries learned through IGMP
snooping for VLAN 1:
Console#show mac-address-table multicast vlan 1 igmp-snooping
VLAN M'cast IP addr. Member ports Type
---- --------------- ------------ ------1
224.1.2.3
Eth1/11
IGMP
Console#
IGMP Query Commands (Layer 2)
Table 4-65 IGMP Query Commands (Layer 2)
4-242
Command
Function
Mode
Page
ip igmp snooping querier
Allows this device to act as the
querier for IGMP snooping
GC
4-243
ip igmp snooping
query-count
Configures the query count
GC
4-243
ip igmp snooping
query-interval
Configures the query interval
GC
4-244
ip igmp snooping
Configures the report delay
query-max-response-time
GC
4-245
ip igmp snooping
router-port-expire-time
GC
4-246
Configures the query timeout
MULTICAST FILTERING COMMANDS
ip igmp snooping querier
This command enables the switch as an IGMP querier. Use the no form to
disable it.
Syntax
[no] ip igmp snooping querier
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
If enabled, the switch will serve as querier if elected. The querier is
responsible for asking hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic.
Example
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping querier
Console(config)#
ip igmp snooping query-count
This command configures the query count. Use the no form to restore the
default.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping query-count count
no ip igmp snooping query-count
count - The maximum number of queries issued for which there has
been no response before the switch takes action to drop a client
from the multicast group. (Range: 2-10)
Default Setting
2 times
Command Mode
Global Configuration
4-243
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Command Usage
The query count defines how long the querier waits for a response
from a multicast client before taking action. If a querier has sent a
number of queries defined by this command, but a client has not
responded, a countdown timer is started using the time defined by ip
igmp snooping query-max- response-time. If the countdown
finishes, and the client still has not responded, then that client is
considered to have left the multicast group.
Example
The following shows how to configure the query count to 10:
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping query-count 10
Console(config)#
Related Commands
ip igmp snooping query-max-response-time (4-245)
ip igmp snooping query-interval
This command configures the query interval. Use the no form to restore
the default.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping query-interval seconds
no ip igmp snooping query-interval
seconds - The frequency at which the switch sends IGMP host-query
messages. (Range: 60-125)
Default Setting
125 seconds
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
The following shows how to configure the query interval to 100 seconds:
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping query-interval 100
Console(config)#
4-244
MULTICAST FILTERING COMMANDS
ip igmp snooping query-max-response-time
This command configures the query report delay. Use the no form to
restore the default.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping query-max-response-time seconds
no ip igmp snooping query-max-response-time
seconds - The report delay advertised in IGMP queries. (Range: 5-25)
Default Setting
10 seconds
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• The switch must be using IGMPv2 for this command to take effect.
• This command defines the time after a query, during which a response
is expected from a multicast client. If a querier has sent a number of
queries defined by the ip igmp snooping query-count, but a client
has not responded, a countdown timer is started using an initial value
set by this command. If the countdown finishes, and the client still has
not responded, then that client is considered to have left the multicast
group.
Example
The following shows how to configure the maximum response time to
20 seconds:
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping query-max-response-time 20
Console(config)#
Related Commands
ip igmp snooping version (4-240)
ip igmp snooping query-max-response-time (4-245)
4-245
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
ip igmp snooping router-port-expire-time
This command configures the query timeout. Use the no form to restore
the default.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping router-port-expire-time seconds
no ip igmp snooping router-port-expire-time
seconds - The time the switch waits after the previous querier stops
before it considers the router port (i.e., the interface which had
been receiving query packets) to have expired.
(Range: 300-500)
Default Setting
300 seconds
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
The switch must use IGMPv2 for this command to take effect.
Example
The following shows how to configure the default timeout to 300 seconds:
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping router-port-expire-time 300
Console(config)#
Related Commands
ip igmp snooping version (4-240)
4-246
MULTICAST FILTERING COMMANDS
Static Multicast Routing Commands
Table 4-66 Static Multicast Routing Commands
Command
Function
Mode
Page
ip igmp snooping vlan
mrouter
Adds a multicast router port
GC
4-247
show ip igmp snooping Shows multicast router ports
mrouter
PE
4-248
ip igmp snooping vlan mrouter
This command statically configures a multicast router port. Use the no
form to remove the configuration.
Syntax
[no] ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id mrouter interface
• vlan-id - VLAN ID (Range: 1-4094)
• interface
- ethernet unit/port
- unit - Stack unit. (This is unit 1)
- port - Port number. (Range: 1-52)
- port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-4)
Default Setting
No static multicast router ports are configured.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
Depending on your network connections, IGMP snooping may not
always be able to locate the IGMP querier. Therefore, if the IGMP
querier is a known multicast router/switch connected over the network
to an interface (port or trunk) on your router, you can manually
configure that interface to join all the current multicast groups.
4-247
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Example
The following shows how to configure port 11 as a multicast router port
within VLAN 1:
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping vlan 1 mrouter ethernet 1/11
Console(config)#
show ip igmp snooping mrouter
This command displays information on statically configured and
dynamically learned multicast router ports.
Syntax
show ip igmp snooping mrouter [vlan vlan-id]
vlan-id - VLAN ID (Range: 1-4094)
Default Setting
Displays multicast router ports for all configured VLANs.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
Multicast router port types displayed include Static.
Example
The following shows that port 11 in VLAN 1 is attached to a multicast
router:
Console#show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1
VLAN M'cast Router Ports Type
---- ------------------- ------1
Eth 1/11 Static
2
Eth 1/12 Static
Console#
4-248
IP INTERFACE COMMANDS
IP Interface Commands
An IP addresses may be used for management access to the switch over
your network. The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by
default. You can manually configure a specific IP address, or direct the
device to obtain an address from a BOOTP or DHCP server when it is
powered on. You may also need to a establish a default gateway between
this device and management stations or other devices that exist on another
network segment.
Table 4-67 IP Interface Commands
Command
Function
ip address
Sets the IP address for the current interface
Mode Page
IC
4-249
ip default-gateway Defines the default gateway through which
this switch can reach other subnetworks
GC
4-251
ip dhcp restart
Submits a BOOTP or DHCP client request
PE
4-251
show ip interface
Displays the IP settings for this device
PE
4-252
show ip redirects
Displays the default gateway configured for
this device
PE
4-253
ping
Sends ICMP echo request packets to another NE,
node on the network
PE
4-253
ip address
This command sets the IP address for the currently selected VLAN
interface. Use the no form to restore the default IP address.
Syntax
ip address {ip-address netmask | bootp | dhcp}
no ip address
• ip-address - IP address
• netmask - Network mask for the associated IP subnet. This mask
identifies the host address bits used for routing to specific subnets.
• bootp - Obtains IP address from BOOTP.
• dhcp - Obtains IP address from DHCP.
4-249
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Default Setting
DHCP
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN)
Command Usage
• You must assign an IP address to this device to gain management
access over the network. You can manually configure a specific IP
address, or direct the device to obtain an address from a BOOTP or
DHCP server. Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers, 0 to 255,
separated by periods. Anything outside this format will not be
accepted by the configuration program.
• If you select the bootp or dhcp option, IP is enabled but will not
function until a BOOTP or DHCP reply has been received. Requests
will be broadcast periodically by this device in an effort to learn its IP
address. (BOOTP and DHCP values can include the IP address,
default gateway, and subnet mask).
• You can start broadcasting BOOTP or DHCP requests by entering an
ip dhcp restart command, or by rebooting the switch.
Note: Only one VLAN interface can be assigned an IP address (the
default is VLAN 1). This defines the management VLAN, the only
VLAN through which you can gain management access to the
switch. If you assign an IP address to any other VLAN, the new IP
address overrides the original IP address and this becomes the new
management VLAN.
Example
In the following example, the device is assigned an address in VLAN 1.
Console(config)#interface vlan 1
Console(config-if)#ip address 192.168.1.5 255.255.255.0
Console(config-if)#
Related Commands
ip dhcp restart (4-251)
4-250
IP INTERFACE COMMANDS
ip default-gateway
This command establishes a static route between this switch and devices
that exist on another network segment. Use the no form to remove the
static route.
Syntax
ip default-gateway gateway
no ip default-gateway
gateway - IP address of the default gateway
Default Setting
No static route is established.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
A gateway must be defined if the management station is located in a
different IP segment.
Example
The following example defines a default gateway for this device:
Console(config)#ip default-gateway 10.1.1.254
Console(config)#
Related Commands
show ip redirects (4-253)
ip dhcp restart
This command submits a BOOTP or DHCP client request.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
4-251
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Command Usage
• This command issues a BOOTP or DHCP client request for any IP
interface that has been set to BOOTP or DHCP mode via the ip
address command.
• DHCP requires the server to reassign the client’s last address if
available.
• If the BOOTP or DHCP server has been moved to a different
domain, the network portion of the address provided to the client will
be based on this new domain.
Example
In the following example, the device is reassigned the same address.
Console(config)#interface vlan 1
Console(config-if)#ip address dhcp
Console(config-if)#end
Console#ip dhcp restart
Console#show ip interface
IP address and netmask: 192.168.1.54 255.255.255.0 on VLAN 1,
and address mode: DHCP.
Console#
Related Commands
ip address (4-249)
show ip interface
This command displays the settings of an IP interface.
Default Setting
All interfaces
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show ip interface
IP address and netmask: 192.168.1.54 255.255.255.0 on VLAN 1,
and address mode:
User specified.
Console#
Related Commands
show ip redirects (4-253)
4-252
IP INTERFACE COMMANDS
show ip redirects
This command shows the default gateway configured for this device.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show ip redirects
IP default gateway 10.1.0.254
Console#
Related Commands
show ip interface (4-252)
ping
This command sends ICMP echo request packets to another node on the
network.
Syntax
ping host [size size] [count count]
• host - IP address or IP alias of the host.
• size - Number of bytes in a packet. (Range: 32-512, default: 32)
The actual packet size will be eight bytes larger than the size
specified because the switch adds header information.
• count - Number of packets to send. (Range: 1-16, default: 5)
Default Setting
This command has no default for the host.
Command Mode
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec
4-253
COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Command Usage
• Use the ping command to see if another site on the network can be
reached.
• Following are some results of the ping command:
- Normal response - The normal response occurs in one to ten seconds,
depending on network traffic.
- Destination does not respond - If the host does not respond, a “timeout”
appears in ten seconds.
- Destination unreachable - The gateway for this destination indicates
that the destination is unreachable.
- Network or host unreachable - The gateway found no corresponding
entry in the route table.
• Press <Esc> to stop pinging.
Example
Console#ping 10.1.0.9
Type ESC to abort.
PING to 10.1.0.9, by 5 32-byte payload ICMP packets, timeout is 5
seconds
response time: 10 ms
response time: 10 ms
response time: 10 ms
response time: 10 ms
response time: 10 ms
Ping statistics for 10.1.0.9:
5 packets transmitted, 5 packets received (100%), 0 packets lost (0%)
Approximate round trip times:
Minimum = 10 ms, Maximum = 20 ms, Average = 10 ms
Console#
Related Commands
interface (4-145)
4-254
APPENDIX A
SOFTWARE SPECIFICATIONS
Software Features
Authentication
Local, RADIUS, TACACS, Port (802.1X), HTTPS, SSH, Port Security
Access Control Lists
IP, MAC (up to 88 lists)
DHCP Client
Port Configuration
100BASE-TX: 10/100 Mbps, half/full duplex
1000BASE-T: 10/100 Mbps at half/full duplex, 1000 Mbps at full duplex
Flow Control
Full Duplex: IEEE 802.3-2002
Half Duplex: Back pressure
Broadcast Storm Control
Traffic throttled above a critical threshold
Port Mirroring
One source port, one destination port
Rate Limits
Input Limit
Output limit
Range (configured per port)
Port Trunking
Static trunks (Cisco EtherChannel compliant)
Dynamic trunks (Link Aggregation Control Protocol)
A-1
SOFTWARE SPECIFICATIONS
Spanning Tree Algorithm
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP, IEEE 802.1D)
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP, IEEE 802.1w)
VLAN Support
Up to 255 groups; port-based or tagged (802.1Q),
GVRP for automatic VLAN learning, private VLANs
Class of Service
Supports four levels of priority and Weighted Round Robin Queueing
(which can be configured by VLAN tag or port),
Layer 3/4 priority mapping: IP Port, IP Precedence, IP DSCP
Multicast Filtering
IGMP Snooping (Layer 2)
Additional Features
BOOTP client
SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol)
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol)
RMON (Remote Monitoring, groups 1,2,3,9)
SMTP Email Alerts
Management Features
In-Band Management
Telnet, Web-based HTTP or HTTPS, SNMP manager, or Secure Shell
Out-of-Band Management
RS-232 DB-9 console port
Software Loading
TFTP in-band or XModem out-of-band
SNMP
Management access via MIB database
Trap management to specified hosts
A-2
SOFTWARE SPECIFICATIONS
RMON
Groups 1, 2, 3, 9 (Statistics, History, Alarm, Event)
Standards
IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree Protocol and traffic priorities
IEEE 802.1p Priority tags
IEEE 802.1Q VLAN
IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
IEEE 802.1X Port Authentication
IEEE 802.3-2002
Ethernet, Fast Ethernet, Gigabit Ethernet
Full-duplex flow control
Link Aggregation Control Protocol
IEEE 802.3ac VLAN tagging
DHCP Client (RFC 1541)
HTTPS
IGMP (RFC 1112)
IGMPv2 (RFC 2236)
RADIUS+ (RFC 2618)
RMON (RFC 1757 groups 1,2,3,9)
SNMP (RFC 1157)
SNMPv2 (RFC 2571)
SNTP (RFC 2030)
SSH (Version 2.0)
TFTP (RFC 1350)
A-3
SOFTWARE SPECIFICATIONS
Management Information Bases
Bridge MIB (RFC 1493)
Entity MIB (RFC 2737)
Ether-like MIB (RFC 2665)
Extended Bridge MIB (RFC 2674)
Extensible SNMP Agents MIB (RFC 2742)
Forwarding Table MIB (RFC 2096)
IGMP MIB (RFC 2933)
Interface Group MIB (RFC 2233)
Interfaces Evolution MIB (RFC 2863)
IP Multicasting related MIBs
MAU MIB (RFC 2668)
MIB II (RFC 1213)
Port Access Entity MIB (IEEE 802.1X)
Port Access Entity Equipment MIB
Private MIB
RADIUS Authentication Client MIB (RFC 2621)
RMON MIB (RFC 2819)
RMON II Probe Configuration Group (RFC 2021, partial
implementation)
SNMP Community MIB (RFC 2576)
SNMPv2 IP MIB (RFC 2011)
TACACS+ Authentication Client MIB
TCP MIB (RFC 2013)
Trap (RFC 1215)
UDP MIB (RFC 2012)
A-4
APPENDIX B
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problems Accessing the Management Interface
Table B-1 Troubleshooting Chart
Symptom
Action
Cannot connect using
Telnet, web browser,
or SNMP software
• Be sure the switch is powered up.
• Check network cabling between the management station
and the switch.
• Check that you have a valid network connection to the
switch and that the port you are using has not been disabled.
• Be sure you have configured the VLAN interface through
which the management station is connected with a valid IP
address, subnet mask and default gateway.
• Be sure the management station has an IP address in the
same subnet as the switch’s IP interface to which it is
connected.
• If you are trying to connect to the switch via the IP address
for a tagged VLAN group, your management station, and
the ports connecting intermediate switches in the network,
must be configured with the appropriate tag.
• If you cannot connect using Telnet, you may have exceeded
the maximum number of concurrent Telnet/SSH sessions
permitted. Try connecting again at a later time.
B-1
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table B-1 Troubleshooting Chart (Continued)
Symptom
Action
Cannot connect using
Secure Shell
• If you cannot connect using SSH, you may have exceeded
the maximum number of concurrent Telnet/SSH sessions
permitted. Try connecting again at a later time.
• Be sure the control parameters for the SSH server are
properly configured on the switch, and that the SSH client
software is properly configured on the management station.
• Be sure you have generated a public key on the switch, and
exported this key to the SSH client.
• Be sure you have set up an account on the switch for each
SSH user, including user name, authentication level, and
password.
• Be sure you have imported the client’s public key to the
switch (if public key authentication is used).
Cannot access
the on-board
configuration
program via a serial
port connection
• Be sure you have set the terminal emulator program to
VT100 compatible, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity, and
9600 bps.
• Check that the null-modem serial cable conforms to the
pin-out connections provided in the Installation Guide.
Forgot or lost the
password
• Contact SMC Technical Support for help.
B-2
USING SYSTEM LOGS
Using System Logs
If a fault does occur, refer to the Installation Guide to ensure that the
problem you encountered is actually caused by the switch. If the problem
appears to be caused by the switch, follow these steps:
1. Enable logging.
2. Set the error messages reported to include all categories.
3. Designate the SNMP host that is to receive the error messages.
4. Repeat the sequence of commands or other actions that lead up to the
error.
5. Make a list of the commands or circumstances that led to the fault.
Also make a list of any error messages displayed.
6. Contact your distributor’s service engineer.
For example:
Console(config)#logging on
Console(config)#logging history flash 7
Console(config)#snmp-server
host 192.168.1.23
.
.
.
B-3
TROUBLESHOOTING
B-4
GLOSSARY
Access Control List (ACL)
ACLs can limit network traffic and restrict access to certain users or
devices by checking each packet for certain IP or MAC (i.e., Layer 2)
information.
Boot Protocol (BOOTP)
BOOTP is used to provide bootup information for network devices,
including IP address information, the address of the TFTP server that
contains the devices system files, and the name of the boot file.
Class of Service (CoS)
CoS is supported by prioritizing packets based on the required level of
service, and then placing them in the appropriate output queue. Data is
transmitted from the queues using weighted round-robin service to
enforce priority service and prevent blockage of lower-level queues.
Priority may be set according to the port default, the packet’s priority bit
(in the VLAN tag), TCP/UDP port number, IP Precedence bit, or DSCP
priority bit.
Differentiated Services Code Point Service (DSCP)
DSCP uses a six-bit tag to provide for up to 64 different forwarding
behaviors. Based on network policies, different kinds of traffic can be
marked for different kinds of forwarding. The DSCP bits are mapped to
the Class of Service categories, and then into the output queues.
Domain Name Service (DNS)
A system used for translating host names for network nodes into IP
addresses.
Glossary-1
GLOSSARY
Dynamic Host Control Protocol (DHCP)
Provides a framework for passing configuration information to hosts on a
TCP/IP network. DHCP is based on the Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP),
adding the capability of automatic allocation of reusable network addresses
and additional configuration options.
Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN (EAPOL)
EAPOL is a client authentication protocol used by this switch to verify the
network access rights for any device that is plugged into the switch. A user
name and password is requested by the switch, and then passed to an
authentication server (e.g., RADIUS) for verification. EAPOL is
implemented as part of the IEEE 802.1X Port Authentication standard.
GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP)
Defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to
register necessary VLAN members on ports along the Spanning Tree so
that VLANs defined in each switch can work automatically over a
Spanning Tree network.
Generic Attribute Registration Protocol (GARP)
GARP is a protocol that can be used by endstations and switches to
register and propagate multicast group membership information in a
switched environment so that multicast data frames are propagated only to
those parts of a switched LAN containing registered endstations. Formerly
called Group Address Registration Protocol.
Generic Multicast Registration Protocol (GMRP)
GMRP allows network devices to register end stations with multicast
groups. GMRP requires that any participating network devices or end
stations comply with the IEEE 802.1p standard.
Group Attribute Registration Protocol (GARP)
See Generic Attribute Registration Protocol.
Glossary-2
GLOSSARY
IEEE 802.1D
Specifies a general method for the operation of MAC bridges, including
the Spanning Tree Protocol.
IEEE 802.1Q
VLAN Tagging—Defines Ethernet frame tags which carry VLAN
information. It allows switches to assign endstations to different virtual
LANs, and defines a standard way for VLANs to communicate across
switched networks.
IEEE 802.1p
An IEEE standard for providing quality of service (QoS) in Ethernet
networks. The standard uses packet tags that define up to eight traffic
classes and allows switches to transmit packets based on the tagged priority
value.
IEEE 802.1X
Port Authentication controls access to the switch ports by requiring users
to first enter a user ID and password for authentication.
IEEE 802.3ac
Defines frame extensions for VLAN tagging.
IEEE 802.3x
Defines Ethernet frame start/stop requests and timers used for flow
control on full-duplex links. (Now incorporated in IEEE 802.3-2002)
IGMP Snooping
Listening to IGMP Query and IGMP Report packets transferred between
IP Multicast Routers and IP Multicast host groups to identify IP Multicast
group members.
Glossary-3
GLOSSARY
IGMP Query
On each subnetwork, one IGMP-capable device will act as the querier —
that is, the device that asks all hosts to report on the IP multicast groups
they wish to join or to which they already belong. The elected querier will
be the device with the lowest IP address in the subnetwork.
Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP)
A protocol through which hosts can register with their local router for
multicast services. If there is more than one multicast switch/router on a
given subnetwork, one of the devices is made the “querier” and assumes
responsibility for keeping track of group membership.
In-Band Management
Management of the network from a station attached directly to the
network.
IP Multicast Filtering
A process whereby this switch can pass multicast traffic along to
participating hosts.
IP Precedence
The Type of Service (ToS) octet in the IPv4 header includes three
precedence bits defining eight different priority levels ranging from highest
priority for network control packets to lowest priority for routine traffic.
The eight values are mapped one-to-one to the Class of Service categories
by default, but may be configured differently to suit the requirements for
specific network applications.
Layer 2
Data Link layer in the ISO 7-Layer Data Communications Protocol. This
is related directly to the hardware interface for network devices and passes
on traffic based on MAC addresses.
Glossary-4
GLOSSARY
Link Aggregation
See Port Trunk.
Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)
Allows ports to automatically negotiate a trunked link with
LACP-configured ports on another device.
Management Information Base (MIB)
An acronym for Management Information Base. It is a set of database
objects that contains information about a specific device.
MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm
An algorithm that is used to create digital signatures. It is intended for use
with 32 bit machines and is safer than the MD4 algorithm, which has been
broken. MD5 is a one-way hash function, meaning that it takes a message
and converts it into a fixed string of digits, also called a message digest.
Multicast Switching
A process whereby the switch filters incoming multicast frames for
services for which no attached host has registered, or forwards them to all
ports contained within the designated multicast VLAN group.
Network Time Protocol (NTP)
NTP provides the mechanisms to synchronize time across the network.
The time servers operate in a hierarchical-master-slave configuration in
order to synchronize local clocks within the subnet and to national time
standards via wire or radio.
Out-of-Band Management
Management of the network from a station not attached to the network.
Port Authentication
See IEEE 802.1X.
Glossary-5
GLOSSARY
Port Mirroring
A method whereby data on a target port is mirrored to a monitor port for
troubleshooting with a logic analyzer or RMON probe. This allows data on
the target port to be studied unobstructively.
Port Trunk
Defines a network link aggregation and trunking method which specifies
how to create a single high-speed logical link that combines several
lower-speed physical links.
Private VLANs
Private VLANs provide port-based security and isolation between ports
within the assigned VLAN. Data traffic on downlink ports can only be
forwarded to, and from, uplink ports.
Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service (RADIUS)
RADIUS is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on
a central server to control access to RADIUS-compliant devices on the
network.
Remote Monitoring (RMON)
RMON provides comprehensive network monitoring capabilities. It
eliminates the polling required in standard SNMP, and can set alarms on a
variety of traffic conditions, including specific error types.
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)
RSTP reduces the convergence time for network topology changes to
about 10% of that required by the older IEEE 802.1D STP standard.
Secure Shell (SSH)
A secure replacement for remote access functions, including Telnet. SSH
can authenticate users with a cryptographic key, and encrypt data
connections between management clients and the switch.
Glossary-6
GLOSSARY
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
The application protocol in the Internet suite of protocols which offers
network management services.
Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP)
SNTP allows a device to set its internal clock based on periodic updates
from a Network Time Protocol (NTP) server. Updates can be requested
from a specific NTP server, or can be received via broadcasts sent by NTP
servers.
Spanning Tree Algorithm (STA)
A technology that checks your network for any loops. A loop can often
occur in complicated or backup linked network systems. Spanning Tree
detects and directs data along the shortest available path, maximizing the
performance and efficiency of the network.
Telnet
Defines a remote communication facility for interfacing to a terminal
device over TCP/IP.
Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus (TACACS+)
TACACS+ is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running
on a central server to control access to TACACS-compliant devices on the
network.
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
Protocol suite that includes TCP as the primary transport protocol, and IP
as the network layer protocol.
Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP)
A TCP/IP protocol commonly used for software downloads.
Glossary-7
GLOSSARY
User Datagram Protocol (UDP)
UDP provides a datagram mode for packet-switched communications. It
uses IP as the underlying transport mechanism to provide access to IP-like
services. UDP packets are delivered just like IP packets – connection-less
datagrams that may be discarded before reaching their targets. UDP is
useful when TCP would be too complex, too slow, or just unnecessary.
Virtual LAN (VLAN)
A Virtual LAN is a collection of network nodes that share the same
collision domain regardless of their physical location or connection point
in the network. A VLAN serves as a logical workgroup with no physical
barriers, and allows users to share information and resources as though
located on the same LAN.
XModem
A protocol used to transfer files between devices. Data is grouped in
128-byte blocks and error-corrected.
Glossary-8
INDEX
Numerics
802.1X, port authentication 3-67
A
acceptable frame type 3-155, 4-203
Access Control List See ACL
ACL
Extended IP 3-79, 4-117, 4-118,
4-122
MAC 3-80, 4-117, 4-128,
4-128–4-131
Standard IP 3-79, 4-117, 4-118, 4-120
address table 3-121, 4-178
aging time 3-124, 4-182
B
BOOTP 3-19, 4-248
BPDU 3-125
broadcast storm, threshold 3-108, 4-151
C
Class of Service See CoS
CLI, showing commands 4-6
command line interface See CLI
community ports 3-158
community string 2-9, 3-45, 4-137
community VLANs 3-161, 4-211
configuration settings, saving or
restoring 2-11, 3-24, 4-87
console port, required connections 2-2
CoS
configuring 3-167, 4-221
DSCP 3-177, 3-181, 4-232
IP precedence 3-175, 4-228, 4-229,
4-230
layer 3/4 priorities 3-174, 4-228
queue mapping 3-169, 4-225
queue mode 3-172, 4-222
traffic class weights 3-173, 4-224
D
default gateway, configuration 3-18,
4-250
default priority, ingress port 3-167, 4-223
default settings, system 1-7
DHCP 3-19, 4-248
client 3-17
dynamic configuration 2-8
Differentiated Code Point Service See
DSCP
downloading software 3-22, 4-87
DSCP
enabling 3-175, 4-232
mapping priorities 3-177, 3-181, 4-232
dynamic addresses, displaying 3-122,
4-180
E
edge port, STA 3-137, 3-140, 4-192
event logging 4-59
F
firmware
displaying version 3-13, 4-84
upgrading 3-22, 4-87
Index-1
INDEX
G
L
GARP VLAN Registration Protocol See
GVRP
gateway, default 3-18, 4-250
GVRP
global setting 4-216
interface configuration 3-156, 4-218
GVRP, global setting 3-146
LACP
local parameters 4-173
partner parameters 4-173
protocol message statistics 4-173
link type, STA 3-137, 3-140, 4-194
logging
syslog traps 4-63
to syslog servers 4-61
log-in, Web interface 3-3
logon authentication 3-48, 4-94
RADIUS client 4-97
RADIUS server 4-97
TACACS+ client 3-50, 4-102
TACACS+ server 3-50, 4-102
logon authentication, sequence 3-51,
4-95, 4-96
H
hardware version, displaying 3-13, 4-84
HTTPS 3-54, 4-42
HTTPS, secure server 3-54, 4-42
I
IEEE 802.1D 3-125, 4-185
IEEE 802.1w 3-125, 4-185
IEEE 802.1X 3-67, 4-107
IGMP
groups, displaying 3-189, 4-240
Layer 2 3-184, 4-237
query 3-184, 4-242
query, Layer 2 3-185, 4-241
snooping 3-184, 4-238
snooping, configuring 3-184, 4-237
ingress filtering 3-155, 4-204
IP address
BOOTP/DHCP 3-19, 4-248, 4-250
setting 2-6, 3-17, 4-248
IP precedence
enabling 3-175, 4-228, 4-229, 4-230
mapping priorities 3-175, 4-231
J
jumbo frame 4-85
Index-2
M
main menu 3-5
Management Information Bases
(MIBs) A-4
mirror port, configuring 3-110, 4-158
multicast filtering 3-183, 4-237
multicast groups 3-189, 4-240
displaying 4-240
static 3-189, 4-238, 4-240
multicast services
configuring 3-191, 4-238
displaying 3-189, 4-240
multicast, static router port 3-188, 4-246
INDEX
P
Q
password, line 4-17, 4-18
passwords 2-5
administrator setting 3-48, 4-35
path cost 3-127, 3-136
method 3-132, 4-189
STA 3-127, 3-136, 4-189
port authentication 3-67
port priority
configuring 3-167, 4-221
default ingress 3-167, 4-223
STA 3-136, 4-192
port security, configuring 3-65, 4-104
port, statistics 3-114, 4-154
ports
autonegotiation 3-91, 4-147
broadcast storm threshold 3-108,
4-151
capabilities 3-91, 4-148
duplex mode 3-90, 4-146
flow control 3-90, 4-149
speed 3-90, 4-146
ports, configuring 3-87, 4-144
ports, mirroring 3-110, 4-158
primary VLAN 3-159
priority, default port ingress 3-167, 4-223
private VLANs, configuring 3-159
problems, troubleshooting B-1
promiscuous ports 3-158
protocol migration 3-140, 4-195
PVLAN
association 3-162
community ports 3-158
interface configuration 3-165
primary VLAN 3-159
promiscuous ports 3-158
queue weights 3-173, 4-224
R
RADIUS, logon authentication 4-97
rate limits, setting 3-112, 4-160
remote logging 4-63
restarting the system 3-41, 4-30
RSTP 3-124, 4-185
global configuration 3-126, 4-185
S
secondary VLAN 3-159
secure shell 3-57, 4-46
Secure Shell configuration 3-57, 4-50,
4-51
serial port
configuring 4-14
Simple Network Management Protocol See
SNMP
SNMP 3-45
community string 3-45, 4-137
enabling traps 3-46, 4-141
filtering IP addresses 3-76
trap manager 3-46, 4-139
software
displaying version 3-13, 4-84
downloading 3-22, 4-87
Spanning Tree Protocol See STA
specifications, software A-1
SSH, configuring 3-57, 4-50, 4-51
Index-3
INDEX
STA 3-124, 4-183
edge port 3-137, 3-140, 4-192
global settings, configuring 3-130,
4-184–4-189
global settings, displaying 3-126, 4-196
interface settings 3-134, 4-191–4-195,
4-196
link type 3-137, 3-140, 4-194
path cost 3-127, 3-136, 4-191
path cost method 3-132, 4-189
port priority 3-136, 4-192
protocol migration 3-140, 4-195
transmission limit 3-132, 4-189
standards, IEEE A-3
startup files
creating 3-26, 4-87
displaying 3-22, 4-79
setting 3-22, 4-93
static addresses, setting 3-121, 4-179
statistics
port 3-114, 4-154
STP 3-130, 4-185
STP Also see STA
system clock, setting 3-42, 4-72
System Logs 3-33
system software, downloading from
server 3-22, 4-87
troubleshooting B-1
trunk
configuration 3-92, 4-164
LACP 3-96, 4-166
static 3-94, 4-166
T
Web interface
access requirements 3-1
configuration buttons 3-4
home page 3-3
menu list 3-5
panel display 3-4
TACACS+, logon authentication 3-50,
4-102
time, setting 3-42, 4-72
traffic class weights 3-173, 4-224
trap manager 2-10, 3-46, 4-139
Index-4
U
upgrading software 3-22, 4-87
user password 3-48, 4-35, 4-36
V
VLANs 3-141–3-167, 4-198–4-216
adding static members 3-151, 3-153,
4-206
creating 3-149, 4-199
description 3-141, 3-167
displaying basic information 3-146,
4-217
displaying port members 3-147, 4-208
egress mode 3-157, 4-202
interface configuration 3-155,
4-203–4-207
private 3-158, 4-209
W
FOR TECHNICAL SUPPORT, CALL:
From U.S.A. and Canada (24 hours a day, 7 days a week)
(800) SMC-4-YOU; Phn: (949) 679-8000; Fax: (949) 679-1481
From Europe: Contact details can be found on
www.smc-europe.com or www.smc.com
INTERNET
E-mail addresses:
[email protected]
[email protected]
Driver updates:
http://www.smc.com/index.cfm?action=tech_support_drivers_downloads
World Wide Web:
http://www.smc.com
http://www.smc-europe.com
FOR LITERATURE OR ADVERTISING RESPONSE, CALL:
U.S.A. and Canada:
Spain:
UK:
France:
Italy:
Benelux:
Central Europe:
Switzerland:
Nordic:
Northern Europe:
Eastern Europe:
Sub Saharian Africa:
North Africa:
Russia:
PRC:
Taiwan:
Asia Pacific:
Korea:
Japan:
Australia:
India:
Middle East:
Thailand:
(800) SMC-4-YOU;
34-93-477-4935;
44 (0) 118 974 8700;
33 (0) 41 38 32 32;
39 02 739 12 33;
31 33 455 72 88;
49 (0) 89 92861-0;
41 (0) 1 9409971;
46 (0) 868 70700;
44 (0) 118 974 8700;
34 -93-477-4920;
27-11 314 1133;
34 93 477 4920;
7 (095) 290 29 96;
86-21-6485-9922;
886-2-8797-8006;
(65) 238 6556;
82-2-553-0860;
81-3-5645-5715;
61-2-8875-7887;
91 22 696 2790;
97 14 299 4466
66 2 651 8733
Fax (949) 679-1481
Fax 34-93-477-3774
Fax 44 (0) 118 974 8701
Fax 33 (0) 41 38 01 58
Fax 39 02 739 14 17
Fax 31 33 455 73 30
Fax 49 (0) 89 92861-230
Fax 41 (0) 1 9409972
Fax 46 (0) 887 62 62
Fax 44 (0) 118 974 8701
Fax 34 93 477 3774
Fax 27-11 314 9133
Fax 34 93 477 3774
Fax 7 (095) 290 29 96
Fax 86-21-6495-7924
Fax 886-2-8797-6288
Fax (65) 238 6466
Fax 82-2-553-7202
Fax 81-3-5645-5716
Fax 61-2-8875-7777
Fax 91 22 696 2794
Fax 97 14 299 4664
Fax 66 2 651 8737
If you are looking for further contact information, please visit www.smc.com,
www.smc-europe.com, or www.smc-asia.com.
38 Tesla
Irvine, CA 92618
Phone: (949) 679-8000
Model Number: SMC6752AL2
Pub. Number: 149100005200H
Revision Number: F2.2.2.2 E112004-R01
">